Digital PDFs
Documents
Guest
Register
Log In
AA-5104A-TB
May 1977
240 pages
Original
23MB
view
download
OCR Version
15MB
view
download
Document:
DECsystem10 Operator's Guide (KL Series)
Order Number:
AA-5104A-TB
Revision:
0
Pages:
240
Original Filename:
OCR Text
decsyscenito OPERATOR'S GUIDE (KL SERIES) dlifgliltiall decsystcemic OPERATOR’S GUIDE (KL SERIES) AA-5104A-TB May 1977 6.03 MONITOR This document is a procedural text describing the operation of the KL-series DECsystem-10 hardware, version 6.03 of the TOPS-10 monitor for the main processor, and version 6A of the RSX-20F monitor for the console front-end processor. To order additional copies of this document, contact the Software Distribution -Center, Digital Equipment Corporation, Maynard, Massachusetts 01754. digital equipment corporation - maynard, massachusetkts First Printing, May 1977 The information in this document is subject to change without notice and should not be construed as a commitment by Digital Equipment Corporation. Digital Equipment Corporation assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this document. The software described in this document is furnished under a license and may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of such license. Digital Equipment Corporation assumes no responsibility for the use or reliability of its software on equipment that is not supplied by DIGITAL. Copyright (:) The postage prepaid 1977 by Digital Equipment Corporation READER'S COMMENTS form on document requests the user's paring future documentation. critical evaluation The of following are trademarks the last page to of assist us Digital Equipment Corporation: DIGITAL DECsystem-10 MASSBUS DEC DECtape OMNIBUS PDP DIBOL 0S/8 DECUS EDUSYSTEM UNIBUS FLIP COMPUTER LABS FOCAL RSX COMTEX INDAC TYPESET-8 DDT LAB-8 TYPESET-10 . DECCOMM DECSYSTEM-20 TYPESET-11 CHIP PHA RSTS this in pre- CONTENTS Page PREFACE wnN - [] [] [] THE POWERING UP LOADING THE (TOPS-10 Software SYSTEM CONSOLE FRONT END MONITOR) Loading Loading Loading LOADING and Other RSX-20F RSX-20F RSX-20F from Disk from DECtape via the Switch Register THE CENTRAL MONITOR) iii PROCESSOR = | | WWWNNNN — Sy Sy Y | =l Interpreters Utilities SR T CE N N CE CE VT ST ST S S ST O b U UUEEBEWWWWNNN - N Assembler w [] |] wN = MACRO Compilers NOOO SOFTWARE Systems Languages ® whhNdDDND [J ® [] [] [] [] Operating NENENENE CN SN S DECtapes Disk Systems Magnetic Tapes Plotter Terminals and Remote Stations Hardcopy Terminals CRT Display Terminals Remote Stations | W DD [ [} WD @ e DD [4 ANV UL D U - [ ® w N U [] o o e o e ® [} [] [} [] [} [} Processors w [] o T B el el ol ol ol it [} [} [] ® L4 [] [] [] (YOI (O (ORI (ORN (O I O R\ BN ol ool Sl el Systems DECSYSTEM-10 w L] Peripherals Line Printer Card Readers/Punches Processors Front-End (RSX-20F [} HARDWARE Central NN o |J w w COMPONENTS Memory e System Logbook Tailored Operation Procedures Supplied by You p— The i Supplied by DIGITAL Supplied by the Installation The Operator's Notebook — DOCUMENTATION STARTING [] Duties Software-Related Duties | N [] Hardware—-Related [] [] e b [] [] e b [ e [] ° e [] [] [] RESPONSIBILITIES DUTIES N = YOUR YOUR NN NN [] OPERATOR DECSYSTEM-10 [ CHAPTER SYSTEM SYSTEM wwww CHAPTER WWWWww W WN NN - THE w 1 WD CHAPTER ix A S N BATCH (= I I~ | Y~ T T Y~ =0 U W W N > = N }—l SYSTEM Messages BATCON BATCON BATCON Commands Operation BATCON Operator OUTPUT Messages SPOOLERS LPTSPL Operator Messages Operator Messages SPROUT SPROUT INPUT SPOOLER (SPRINT) SPRINT Commands SPRINT Operator Messages PLEASE SEND = O N GRIPES Saving FACT System Shutdown Files DSKLST DSKRAT iv | Day | TASKS Update the Message of the SPACE with /FACT Switch Update Account Files FILCOM Account Files Detached Job Procedure BACKUP (Daily) SPACE with /BATCH Switch = 00~ N [] [] |] [] HHHEEHEOOOJOWUMe WNH e e b TASKS = N OPERATOR/USER COMMUNICATION oo o [] [] e o o e e edWwwww [ ] ® [ ® QUL [] [} o Y= o o R~ o S o S e R A i N gt At At Y R~ R~ S Messages (FILE AND MOUNT/DISMOUNT) Components-to-QUASAR OO0 T S Program QUASAR NSO S OPSER QUEUE GALAXY b e b e b the OPSER Operator OMOUNT DAILY = to Commands Directly to Subjobs OPSER Commands OPSER Commands to the Operator OPSER Commands for All Users TR T Commands WNDNFHFHEFE S o S OPSER Operation (62 L~ ENDS OPSER OPERATOR [ FRONT SERVICES LPTSPL e TOPS-10 from Disk TOPS-10 from Magnetic Tape Initialization Dialog Second CPU (Dual Processor) COMMUNICATIONS GEGEGEGEGEGEGRS NGRS RE RS RS, CHAPTER (Cont.) Loading via the DL1O0 Loading via the DTE20 LOADING THE DX10 DATA CHANNEL Loading Procedure SYSTEM o CHAPTER Loading Loading TOPS-10 Loading LOADING > WWwwwwwwww CONTENTS CONTENTS (Cont.) OTHER SCHEDULED TASKS Account Control BACKUP (Weekly) NON-SCHEDULED TASKS Formatting Disk Packs 5-15 62} o SYSTEM RECOVERY PROCEDURES (o) - CENTRAL PROCESSOR RECOVERY OO OO O | | I T N I | HHRFOONJUOOUwND N — Page Errors Power Fluctuation Power Outage Console/Diagnostic Front End DTE20-Interfaced Communications [ (T8 | o> > Altering Your Memory Configuration Memory Selection and Interleaving O Hardware Errors Parity Error 5-19 5-19 U > W N w N N © [] e [ ] o o [ o [ ] (NN NN N RSX-20F Detected Errors HUNG Condition Crash Restart Procedure FRONT-END PROCESSOR RECOVERY N o e o N N Errors (Monitor Error Stop) STOPCD Environmental [] e Software [} = o o e wWwwwNDhdDdDDNDHE o e O o o & e [] R e XX Xoa X2 KaKeaKale) e R e) o) CHAPTER (o)} Formatting RP02s and RPO03s Formatting RP04s and RP06s 5-15 5-16 5-19 Front Ends DL10-Interfaced Communications Front Ends DX10 DATA CHANNEL RECOVERY DEVICE DW= - [] TUTUT T PRINTER Forms Controlling the Vertical Format Unit Changing and Reversing the Ribbon Cleaning the Line Printer READER Loading and Unloading Cards Cleaning the Card Reader DECTAPE N [] [] [] [] [] [] [ [} [] OPERATION Changing CARD YOI [ J DD DB WWWNDNN LINE [] AN NN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNYS CHAPTER Mounting and Dismounting DECtapes Cleaning DECtape Drives MAGNETIC TAPE Mounting and Dismounting TU1l0 and TUl6 Drives TU40 and TU41l Drives TU70, TU71, and TU72 Drives TU45 Drives Cleaning Magnetic Tape Drives DISK DRIVES Mounting and Dismounting Disk Packs Cleaning Disk Drives Formatting Disk Packs 7-35 7-36 7-36 CONTENTS (Cont.) diskunit BREAK SET CORMAX SET CORMIN SET DATE SET DAYTIME SET MEMORY SET NOMESSAGE SET OPR SET SCHED SET TTY SET VMMAX XCHNGE APPENDIX B RSX-20F B.1l B.2 PARSER CONSOLE PROCESSOR ENTERING AND EXITING CONSOLE MODES PROMPTS B.3 PARSER B.4 PARSER COMMANDS B.5 PARSER ERROR C KL OOO0O0O0O00nn APPENDIX KLINIT OPERATOR KLINIT MESSAGES THE PARSER OPERATOR MESSAGES INITIALIZATION 1 Informational 2 Warning .3 4 FOR THE COMMANDS PROGRAM (KLINIT) DIALOG Messages Messages Dialog Error Messages System Error Messages REPORTS RELATING TO KL MEMORY d = o »n DIALOG q)o > @ CONFIGURATION KLINIT EXAMPLES INDEX Index-1 FIGURES FIGURE > o> DETACH SET PIDS’PSTS’PIPS’P| DIDS’E’TI>3’>'> device — job DETACH T diskunit ATTACH NN device ATTACH wc'umww | I DESCRIPTIONS ATTACH | COMMAND p— INTRODUCTION A.2 @) A.l COMMANDS HHEOOONNOOWUVUTLE D WWNN OPERATOR-PRIVILEGED JoCo o TOPS-10 N A ()O(Pr)ocd | i1 APPENDIX f— Page 3-1 Load Switches 7-1 LP07 Line Printer 7-2 LP10 Line Printer 7-3 LP07 Paper Installation and Switch 7-4 LPO07 Forms Alignment 7-5 LP10 Paper Installation 7-6 LP07 Ribbon Installation vi Register 3-2 7-2 7-3 7-6 7-17 7-9 7-1 CONTENTS (Cont.) Page 7-20 LP10 Ribbon Installation CR10-F CR10-E 7-23 Card Reader Card Reader 7-24 7-28 7-30 7-31 7-33 TU1l6 Magnetic Tape Drive TU40 Series Magnetic Tape Drive TU70 Series Magnetic Tape Drive TU45 Magnetic Tape Drive 7-37 RP03 Disk Drive RP04 Disk Drive RP06 Disk Drive 7-38 7-39 | N I MF10-G | Settings o) the Current W Commands to Display Parameter Settings (Y b Switch Register Bit Definitions Commands to Set Parameters for Batch Jobs Commands to Control Batch Subjobs MF10-A (32K) Memory Address Switch (64K) Memory Address Switch | o O O U W Settings | — O\ TABLE bW TABLES MF10 Interleave Switch Settings MG1l0 and MH10 Memory Bank Selection MG1l0 and MH10 Memory Address Switch Settings MG1l0 and MH10 Interleave Switch Settings Standard LP10 Line Printer Carriage Tape Standard LP10 Line Printer Vertical Action Number of Fillers by Character Filler Class vii and PREFACE This operator's guide provides the system operator with a brief introduction to the DECsystem-10's hardware and software components and serves as a task-oriented reference for operating the DECsystem-10. The procedures documented in this manual are based on a single large in-house installation using all the standard hardware and software. Because individual installations will differ both in the hardware configurations and in the software requirements, you should tailor these procedures to fit the needs of your system and add procedures covering any unique applications. This publication system hardware, covers and three the general system areas: the system operator, Chapter 1 discusses the responsibilities and duties of the operator and introduces the documentation aids that he should his disposal. Chapter 2 gives a brief 7 provides operating peripheral devices. the software. system have at description of the system components. Chapter and maintenance instructions for the system Chapter 3 covers the loading of the main and front-end ©processors. Chapter 4 describes the service programs and commands used by the operator. Chapter 5 details some of the scheduled and non-scheduled tasks that the operator 1is normally responsible for. Chapter 6 contains system recovery procedures to be followed in the event of a system malfunction. Appendix commands examples Appendix console A contains used 1in are shown B contains processor detailed the KL main throughout the the of the processor. procedures. operator-privileged language, operator-privileged Usage command information and subset the of PARSER. Appendix C contains detailed initialization program, KLINIT. This publication reflects release 6A of the RSX-20F formats information on release 6.03 of the front-end monitor. ix the TOPS-10 KL processor monitor and The following publications in the Software Notebooks are suggested as sources of additional information for system operators: Getting Started With DECsystem-10 DEC-10-XGSDA-A-D Getting Started With TOPS-10 Commands DEC-10-OTSCA-A-D DECsystem-10 Operating System Commands AA-0196C-TB DECsystem-10 Monitor Calls AA-0974C-TB DECsystem-10 Galaxy Batch Reference Manual AA-0967B-TB DECsystem-10 Galaxy Operation and System Programming Procedures AA-0966B-TB Programming Specifications (Notebooks 10, Supplementary Operator Procedures (Notebook 13) 11) CHAPTER THE 1.1 As SYSTEM 1 OPERATOR YOUR RESPONSIBILITIES a DECsystem-10 system running operator, and to your primary respond to responsibility user requests is as to keep the quickly and efficiently as possible. You must be familiar with all the resources available to vyour system, know how to interact with these resources, and recognize potential problems that could reduce the effective use of these You must resources. know how to communicate as with the main processor. RSX-20F operator commands and the also be responsible for shifts and for logging a maintenance, and downtime. 1.2 with the front-end processor as well You must Dbe familiar with both the TOPS-10 command language. You will documenting system activities for subsequent permanent record of system availability, YOUR DUTIES Your duties can be classified into two categories: those that are hardware-related and those that are software-related. You may perform these duties on a regular schedule, or on an "on <call" or even an emergency l1.2.1 basis. Hardware-Related Duties Hardware-related duties include the devices and the computer room; supplies such as paper forms, blank the servicing to load In the a event any damaged call field its normal 1.2.2 of card of or user or a requests paper hardware foreign service tape if operating to upkeep of the replenishing of cards, and blank paper mount private tapes or the system consumable tape; and disk packs reader. malfunction material; necessary; condition Software-Related physical as you assess and soon should the attempt as be extent to able of return to the or remove failure and device to the possible. Duties Software-related duties include replying to devices, and running system accounting and by the system manager. user requests, control tasks as assigning specified THE SYSTEM OPERATOR Due to the complexity inherent in large systems, there will be times to function correctly or will terminate cease when processing will abnormally in what is known as a "crash." This can result from problems, hardware problems, or environmental (programming) software malicious inept or Problems also include the presence of problems. a system crashes or ceases to function When system. the on users correctly, it becomes your responsibility to recognize the problem and You should try to bring the take the appropriate corrective measures. as possible. soon as level operating previous its system back up to 1is not feasible, you should attempt to bring up as much of When this the follow should you case, either In possible. the system as accepted procedure for recording data in the event of a crash. 1.3 DOCUMENTATION handle, to easier To make your responsibilities and duties a little You should obtain at least there are a number of documents available. are others reading, Some are for one-time the ones mentioned here. are for you to document pertinent others still and reference, for system information. 1.3.1 Supplied by DIGITAL leaf loose set of DECsystem-10 Software Notebooks are a 13-volume supported all of descriptions updated regularly containing notebooks the DECsystem-10 1In addition to this manual, DECsystem-10 software. Operator's Guide (KL Series), the following publications found in the will Notebooks function as a provide information additional your to relevant system operator. Getting Started With DECsystem-10 Getting Started With TOPS-10 Commands DECsystem-10 Operating System Commands DECsystem-10 Monitor Calls Supplementary Operator Procedures (Notebook 13) If you are using batch processing, you should also have the following: DECsystem-10 GALAXY Operation and System Programming Procedures In addition to the above, vyou may find helpful ideas 1in the DIGITAL also supplies located in Notebooks 10 and 11. SPECIFICATIONS some text files on the magnetic tape used for software distribution. can be identified by their file extension of .HLP, .MEM, files These system your to If these files have been copied over .BWR, or .DOC. disk, you can PRINT them on your line printer or at your terminal. 1.3.2 Supplied by the Installation Installation-supplied documentation’ System Notebook, a operations procedures. Logbook, and usually includes an Operator's possibly a set of tailored system 1.3.2.1 The Operator's Notebook - The Operator's Notebook is the most system among communications shift-to-shift for means practical operators, and between an operator and the 1-2 system supervisor. Oral THE SYSTEM OPERATOR messages are quickly forgotten, loose notes Operator's Notebook provides a permanent center for efficient system operations. are often lost; only the and centralized message You should read the turnover entries as you begin your shift. Entries will include scheduled system downtime, new software to try, problems encountered on previous shifts, warnings on potential intermittent malfunctions, and specific 1instructions for work to be processed on your shift. At the end information non-prime via of as vyour shift, you it applies to the shift operator, should enter the same type of next shift operator. If you are a you can communicate with the sys$tem manager the Operator's Notebook. 1.3.2.2 The System Logbook - The System Logbook is another important piece of documentation. It is the prime source of information about the system programmers, service and 1is system referred managers, to and used by operators, software support personnel, and system field engineers. Entries include reloading; all all monitor 1loads and hardware and software reloads, with reason for problems with symptoms and device identification; and, system shutdowns. For ease in identifying the items, you <can follow the convention of entering hardware entries on the left-hand pages and software entries on the right-hand pages. Whatever the format of the entries, it is most important that you check this log when you report for work and that you keep it updated throughout your shift. 1.3.2.3 Tailored Operation Procedures - Your installation may want to generate a tailored set of operating procedures based upon your specific hardware configuration and the software that is actually in use. Sections can be set up for your daily, weekly, monthly and other scheduled tasks. A customized operator's guide such as this would provide vyou with a compact, easily referenced run book and would be useful in the training 1.3.3 Supplied of new operators. by You In addition to the entries that you generate in the Operator's Notebook and System Logbook, you should retain and file the system console (CTY) output or 1log. This chronological record of system events can be very useful in tracking down highly intermittent system problems. Whenever the system abnormally terminates, you should use one of the memory dump programs to create a hardcopy record of the error conditions. This information will be required by software support personnel or field service engineers when they troubleshoot the problem. CHAPTER SYSTEM To understand the system tasks 2 COMPONENTS that you will be performing, you should be familiar with both the hardware and software components of the DECsystem-10. This chapter ©provides brief descriptions of the hardware devices that you will be operating and the software programs that you and other 2.1 DECSYSTEM-10 system users will be running. HARDWARE The DECsystem-10 hardware that you will be operating general categories: central processors, memory processors, peripherals, and remote stations. 2.1.1 The Central KL10A falls into five systems, front-end 1080 1088, Processors central processor, used in a microcoded instruction set of cache memory, eight sets of sixteen purpose registers, virtual memory the DECsystems and has 386 instructions, a high speed 2K fast integrated-circuit general capability, and a PDP-1ll1 based Console/Diagnostic processor with a 30-character-per-second console terminal. This console terminal allows the system operator to communicate with the central processor as well as with the Console/Diagnostic processor. The KL10B 1090 plus l. Up 2. Up 2.1.2 Core central processor, and 1099, offers the following: to five the high-performance features high-speed and data functions channels to three 1integrated communications (DTE20's) . A fourth DTE20 1is used Console/Diagnostic processor. Memory on the of 32K, modules may be 36-bit words storage and DECsystems 64K, attached of directly module 64K DECsystems as the KL10OA (RH20's). processor channels 1interface the to Systems memory, 32K in same integrated combinations The used the words 128K to a and the 1088, 1090, 256K word system addressable capacities for 1080, for the MF1l0, 64K 2-1 and 1099, modules. Up providing a consists to maximum 16 of of memory 4,096K storage. various and 128K storage words for systems the MGl0, are: and SYSTEM 128K to and 256K words for four the COMPONENTS MH10. memory ports while Each each MGl0 MF1l0 up to eight memory ports. Each port can the use of the MX10 memory multiplexer. 2.1.3 Front-End memory module contains be further expanded through Processors The PDP-11 based Console/Diagnostic processor, discussed as part the central processor, is also referred to as a console front end. provides the means for the system operator to communicate with central up and MH10 memory module contains of It the processor. Additional PDP-11 based front-end processors, referred to as communications front ends, can be attached to the KL10B processor via the integrated DTE20 interface or DL10 data channel. On the KL10A they are attached via the DL10. Communications front ends provide the facilities for supporting interactive terminals and unit record remote stations. They can be attached 1locally via direct electrical connections or remotely via dedicated or dial-up telephone lines. A DC76 front end, for example, provides asynchronous line protocol to support terminals such as the LA series DECwriters, LT series Teletypes, and the VT series video terminals. The DC75NP and DN85 front ends provide synchronous 1line protocol support remote stations such as the DC72NP, the DAS80 series, and DAS92. They attach to the processors via the DL10. to the The DN87 and DN87S front ends provide both synchronous and/or asynchronous protocol, depending upon the line options selected. The DN87 attaches to the KL10A and KL10B via the DL10 communication channel. The DN87S attaches to the KL10B via the integrated DTE20 interface. 2.1.4 Peripherals Peripheral and | equipment, 1099, consists supported of unit by the record, DECsystems 1080, magnetic disk, 1088, 1090, and magnetic tape devices. 2.1.4.1 1. Line Printer line printers are available: drum. The LP1l0-H impact printer with a 96-character print set, dual speed of 925/675 1lines per minute, optical vertical format control using 1l2-channel tape, and a quick-change print character The set LP07 drum. impact printer Charaband(R) lines per minute, (R) following impact printer with a 64-character print set, dual 1250/925 lines per minute, optical vertical format using 12-channel tape, and a quick-change print character 3. The The LPl0-F speed of control 2. - Charaband 1is a with a quick-change, (64/96 characters), and Direct Access Vertical registered trademark Corporation 2-2 dual character dual speed of 1200/900 of Format Unit. the Dataproducts SYSTEM 4. The LAl180 impact (7 128-print-character per second resulting The CR10-D x 7 dot matrix) printer set, and a print speed of 180 in 60-400 lines per minute. 2.1.4.2 Card Readers/Punches are available: l. COMPONENTS - table model The following card reader card readers processing with and 1000 a characters punches cards per 1200 cards per 300 cards per minute. 2. The CR10-E minute. console 3. The table model CR10-F card reader card processing reader processing minute. 4. The CP1l0-D card punch processing 100 cards per minute. 2.1.4.3 DECtapes - The TU56 DECtape drive 1is a high reliability, bi-directional, random access, magnetic tape storage device available on the DECsystem-10. Each TU56 is a dual tape transport, and, up to 4 of the dual drives can be attached to each TD10-C DECtape controller. 2.1.4.4 Disk Systems - There are five DECsystem-10: the RHS04 fixed-head RHP03, RHP04, and RHPO6 removable disk disk systems available on the swapping system, and the RHPOZ, pack systems. The RHS04 is a fast access, high transfer rate, swapping system and is used very effectively in implementing the virtual memory option in which pages (512 words) of memory are swapped between core and secondary storage (RHS04). Page swapping can take place directly between one part of core and secondary storage concurrently with program execution The RHP02, in RHPO03, another part of core. RHP04, and RHPO6 disk systems offer storage capacities of 5.12, 10.24, 20.48, and 40.96 million words per drive, respectively. The RHP04 and RHP06 disk systems are each available with a dual-port option. This option allows a disk drive to be accessed over either of two paths or both concurrently. In the KL series processors, for example, one dual-ported disk drive can contain files to be accessed by both the main processor and the console front-end processor. If both ports are connected to the main processor, the operating system can maximize I/0 throughput by starting simultaneous data transfers on two channels, concurrently. 2.1.4.5 drives 1. Magnetic Tapes - The are following magnetic tape systems and supported: The TUlOA-E 9-track recording density of tape speed of 45 inches and TUlOA-F 7-track drives with a 200, 556, and 800 bits per inch and a per second. SYSTEM 2. The and TUl6 9-track 1600 bits COMPONENTS subsystem with recording per a -inch and tape densities speed of 45 of 800 inches per second. 3. The TU40 9-track densities of of 150 inches and TU41 200, 556, and per second. 4, The TU45 9-track drive with 1600 bits per inch and tape 5. The TU70 9-track and 1600 bits tape per 7-track 800 drives bits per with inch and recording tape speeds recording densities of 800 and speed of 75 inches per second. drive with 1inch and recording densities of tape speed of 200 inches 800 per second. 6. The TU71 7-track tape drive with 556, and 800 bits per inch and recording densities of 200, tape speed of 200 inches per second. 7. The TU72 9-track tape drive with recording densities of and 6250 (nominal) bits per inch recording density and speed of 125 inches per second. 2.1.4.6 Plotter - The DECsystem-10 supports the following 1. The XY10-A (CALCOMP Model 565) plotter with inch, or .1 millimeter step size at 18,000 and using l2-inch-wide paper. 2. The XY10-B (CALCOMP Model 563) plotter size at 12,000 steps per minute or .005 step size at 18,000 steps per minute, and plotters: .01 steps with inch inch, .005 per minute, .01 or .1 using 1600 tape inch step millimeter 3l-inch-wide paper. 2.1.5 The and Terminals And DECsystem-10 remote remote supports stations Stations hardcopy comprised terminals, of CRT unit-record display equipment terminals, as well as terminals. 2.1.5.1 supported l. Remote Hardcopy Terminals in The both LA36 local and - The remote DECwriter 1II, 96-character print set, speed and input keyboard. following hardcopy terminals are modes: an impact 10/15/30 teleprinter with character-per-second 2. The LA35RO DECwriter, a receive-only an LA36 without a keyboard. 3. The LA37APL DECwriter, an LA36 with dual APL/ASCII <character set. It provides the user with the choice of full APL, full upper/lower case ASCII, or upper case TTY all in one terminal. terminal and a print basically SYSTEM 4. The a LA180 DECprinter 1l28-character I, print COMPONENTS a 7x7 set dot and a matrix speed impact of 180 printer with characters per second. 2.1.5.2 CRT Display Terminals - The following are supported in both local and remote modes: 1. CRT display terminals The VT50 and VT50H video terminals, providing a screen format of 12 lines at 80 characters per line with a 5 x 7 dot matrix of 2. 64 characters. The VT52 video terminal, providing a lines at 80 characters per line with a screen format of 7 x 7 dot matrix of 24 96 characters. 3. The VT61 video terminal, providing a screen format 24 lines at 80 characters per 1line with a 7 x 8 dot matrix of 128 characters. The VT61 has a more powerful microprocessor than the VT50 series and can offer more stand-alone capabilities in the area of text editing. 2.1.5.3 Remote Stations remote stations: The following devices are supported as l. The DC72 remote station, with peripherals reader, line printer, and hardcopy and display 2. The DN80 series remote stations that can provide remote job entry facilities (DN80), remote terminal facilities (DN81), or a combination of both (DN82). 3. The DAS92 remote station, which <can be configured in combinations of terminal 1lines and a card reader and/or a line 2.2 - such as card terminals. printer. DECSYSTEM-10 The DECsystem-10 three general SOFTWARE software that you must be categories: operating familiar with falls systems, languages, into and utilities. 2.2.1 Operating Systems The main operating system for the DECsystem-10 is called the TOPS-10 Monitor. It supports time-sharing, batch processing, real-time, and remote communications. The front-end operating system runs in the Console/Diagnostic processor and aids the central processor and TOPS-10 in handling system tasks such as system 1loading, console communications, and diagnostic functions. The front-end operating system 1is <called RSX-20F. SYSTEM 2.2.2 COMPONENTS Languages The DECsystem-10 supports three types of translators used in symbolic language programming: assemblers, compilers, and interpreters. 2.2.2.1 MACRO on DECsystem-10. the devices can be Assembler selected - MACRO It 1s at run is the symbolic assembly device-independent; time MACRO also contains powerful macro replace commonly wused sequences and may vary program input from capabilities that of instructions and run allow with used output to the a run. user to single statement. 2.2.2.2 Compilers language designed algorithms. - The COmmon processing programs The the Language, solution The DECsystem-10 for the translation system that provides functions, and control The ALGOrithmic for ALGOL of is composed of Oriented Language, language designed for COBOL, written are familiar to easily learned and English-like in terms statements that are is business that are self-documenting. DECsystem-10 compiler; an object time system, LIBOL; program; a ancillary programs. COBOL checkout and debugging is scientific or compiler ALGOL object-time of mathematical an industry-wide data applications. COBOL COBOL a a processes, the ALGOL of the source code and the 1I/0 services, a library of system resources. Business are ALGOL, computational the business result in user. programs includes source program, the COBOL library maintenance COBDDT; and other The FORmula TRANslator 1language, FORTRAN, 1is a widely used, procedure-oriented language designed for solving scientific-type problems. It has, however, found extensive use throughout the data processing industry and especially 1in the universities and 1in timesharing utilities. DECsystem-10 FORTRAN-10 includes the FORTRAN-10 compiler; checkout and debugging 2.2.2.3 Interpreters an object-time FORDDT. - The Algebraic the DECsystem-10 adaptation Corporation. Commands to AID imperative English as.part a APL (A of Programming especially sentences routine suited to be for and language, can executed Language) Beginner's All-purpose problem-solving FOROTS; and a FORTRAN Interpretive Dialogue, AID, |is of JOSS, a program developed by the RAND are entered via the user's terminal as is a dealing array-structured data. However, data processing language as well The system, program, executed immediately completely with to or conversational numeric and it is intended for use as a mathematician's tool. Symbolic easy be stored later. Instruction learn, and Code, system character a general BASIC, 1is particularly suited to a a time-sharing environment. BASIC contains its own editing facilities; a separate system editor is not required. Although BASIC provides a subset of elementary statements for simple programs, the full language includes handling statements covering matrix computations, capabilities, mathematical functions, and the user-defined functions. advanced string generation of SYSTEM Utilities And Other 2.2.3 COMPONENTS Software The DECsystem-10 provides many utilities, text processors, support programs. file Some manipulators, of the group of programs well as controlling more as well maintenance important as ones editors, and monitor are: GALAXY A BACKUP A TECO A SOUP A set of programs to facilitate user program source files. DDT The Dynamic checkout and PIP A file interchange program to selectively from one media to another and concurrently editing and directory manipulation. RUNOFF A system program later to restore text programs, that can control up to the system unit record 127 batch devices. jobs to save disk files on magnetic tape, any or all of the files back to disk. character-oriented text editor with any source document without requiring Debugging updating of the Technique programs. A linking loader to into one executable OPSER A service program for control multiple jobs and the ability to edit special formatting. updating used text processing program that produces a paged, right-justified output from an appropriate RUNOFF commands. LINK-10 as for of system the or on-line transfer files perform limited final edited formatted, merge independently translated version of a user's program. the system operator, enabling from a single terminal. file with modules him ¢to CHAPTER 3 STARTING THE SYSTEM Before starting the system, you should familiarize yourself with the and other controls indicator 1lights, various operating switches, the DECtape below directly panel processor located on the console Below these controls, another panel contains a row of 30 drive. The switches that are switches and additional indicator 1lights. numbered from 0 through 17 comprise the switch register and will be used during the system load procedure. Refer to Figure 3-1 in the following descriptions. The four load switches are labeled above from left to right as DISK, DECTAPE, SW/REG, and ENABLE. The purpose of each is given below. LOAD SWITCH PURPOSE DISK Load the system from a disk pack (Section 3.2.1) DECTAPE Load the system from DECtape (Section 3.2.2) SW/REG Load the system according to the contents ENABLE Enable loading via any load switch switch register (Section 3.2.3) of the labeled POWER ON There are two power switches. The black switch, used to supply or normally switch the is below, above and POWER OFF cut power to the system. The red EMERGENCY POWER OFF switch should be used only in emergencies, such as a fire, where you must turn off the power as quickly as possible. After you press this switch, you must call your field service representative to restore power. The switch register contains 18 switches representing bit settings of 0 or 1 and numbered 0-17 from right to left according to PDP-11 convention. Note that this is the reverse of the way that bits are numbered in the main PDP-10 processor. The information represented by the switch settings is described in Table 3-1 in Section 3.2.3. If the power The power light glowing red indicates that power is on. site has set your at ive representat service light is blinking, a field the system because set OVERRIDE with system the run not Do OVERRIDE. will not power down from overheating. If it glows, notify vyour The fault light should normally be off. indicates a malfunction light glowing A tive. field service representa such as overheating. STARTING THE SYSTEM FRULY Figure 3-1 Load Switches and Switch Register STARTING THE SYSTEM Loading the system involves turning the power ON, loading the front end with the RSX-20F monitor, and then loading the processor with the TOPS-10 monitor. 3.1 In POWERING most light press 3.2 you the black LOADING After UP cases to the console central should right power THE only of the switch CONSOLE FRONT initially powering indicated, you have front-end processor. have up a You to check to see that load switches is glowing red. to the POWER ON position. END the few can (RSX-20F system, or, the power Otherwise, MONITOR) when a complete alternatives in how you do a standard load from reload is load the console a disk pack or DECtape, or vyou can load using the switch register. 1In most cases, you will load from a disk pack because it is much faster than DECtape. However, 1if hardware problems prevent loading from a disk pack, or if your system manager wants you to use software residing on a DECtape, you may need to load the system using the DECtape drive. Also, if you need to 1load the system using some non-standard hardware configurations or special software, you will have to use the switch register. The switch register allows you to load from any disk pack or DECtape and also enter the KL 1initialization operator dialog (KLINIT). The KLINIT dialog allows you to verify the microcode, reconfigure cache and main memory, and load a non-default bootstrap program. The procedures for loading the front-end processor via a disk pack, a DECtape, or the switch register are described in the next three sections. 3.2.1 Loading RSX-20F from Disk This is the most common way to load the console front end. It assumes that the system power is ON, that all hardware and software have been correctly installed, and that the disk pack has been mounted properly. Also, the disk pack containing both the TOPS-10 monitor and the RSX-20F front-end monitor must be on a dual-ported drive (controller select switch points to A/B), and the drive must be unit 0 with respect to both the central and front-end processors. The operation l. 2. Set is the as follows: ENABLE/DISABLE This will Press the enable DISK the load load other switch three to load ENABLE. switches. switch. This will cause the front-end processor to access the disk on drive 0 and load the RSX-20F monitor. The KL initialization program (KLINIT) is loaded and, 1in turn, 1loads the KL10 microcode. The default hardware configqurations of cache and external memory are set up. The bootstrap program for the TOPS-10 monitor is then loaded into the central processor and started. The following is an example of the output you will receive on the console terminal. STARTING RSX-20F [SYO: [DBO: VOO6A 0:16 REDIRECTED MOUNTED] KLI -- VERSION KLI -- MICROCODE KLI -- ALL CACHES 131 LOADED ENABLED SIZE RQO 000000 512K 04 CONFIGURATION: BOOTSTRAP Vnn RUNNING VERSION ADDRESS BOOTS DBO:] V002Q MEMORY -- SYSTEM 21-JUN-76 TO LOGICAL KLI THE CONTROLLER RQ1l RQ2 FOR RQ3 CONTYPE INT DMA20 4 ALL LOADED AND STARTED (nnn) BTS> The first line of creation time loaded into the DBO: for (the the output tells and date of front end. the The disk front pack end on and the RSX-20F monitor that was next two lines tell you you just that drive 0) The next tasks. the KL initialization program. KLINIT that is running, and tell was successfully memory 1loaded, Loading configured, RSX-20F lines are cache that mounted while The the proper correctly the system operation l. 2. Set is the software on unit was by version of microcode enabled, running. as follows: Be ENABLE/DISABLE This will enable Press DECTAPE This rive bootstrap external the on sure load other load DECtape to switch three and leave to load program (KLINIT) microcode. The external memory TOPS-10 monitor KLI -- are set 1is then is mounted ENABLE. switches. 0:16 to access the DECtape The KL initialization the KL10 cache and up. The bootstrap program for the loaded into the central processor and 21-JUN-76 REDIRECTED TO MOUNTED] VERSION DECtape 1in turn, loads configurations of started. The following is an example receive on the console terminal. [SYO: [DTO: the DECtape switch. 1is loaded and, default hardware VO06A that the will cause the front-end processor 0 and load the RSX-20F monitor. RSX-20F program front end should be used if vyou if you need a particular version of It assumes that the system power is exists 0. is the the (SYO0:) output from DECtape This method of loading the console cannot load from a disk pack, or software that 1s only on DECtape. ON, that system device eight They document the you that the KL10 the and the version for the TOPS-10 monitor was loaded and started. The next two lines are the bootstrap program's version number and prompt. If an error occurs during the KL initialization program, you will receive an error message preceded by "KLI -- ?" and you will be placed in the KLINIT dialog mode described in Appendix C. 3.2.2 was is the DTO:] V002Q RUNNING 3-4 of the output you will STARTING THE SYSTEM KLI -- MICROCODE VERSION KLI -- ALL CACHES LOGICAL MEMORY ADDRESS 000000 SIZE 512K 131 LOADED ENABLED CONFIGURATION CONTROLLER RQO 04 KLI -- BOOTSTRAP BOOTS Vnn (nnn) RQl FOR RQ2 ALL LOADED AND RQ3 CONTYPE DMA 20 INT 4 STARTED BTS> The first line of creation time output tells you the version and the and date of the RSX-20F monitor that was Just loaded into the front end. The next two lines tell you that DT0: (the DECtape on unit 0) is the system device (SY0:) for the front-end tasks. The next eight lines are output by the KL initialization program. They give the version of KLINIT that is running, and tell you that the KL10 microcode was successfully 1loaded, the cache was enabled, external memory was configured, and that the bootstrap program for the TOPS-10 monitor was loaded and started. The next two lines are the bootstrap program's version number and prompt. If an error occurs during the KL initialization program, you will receive an error message preceded by "KLI -- ?" and you will be placed in the KLINIT dialog mode described in Appendix C. Loading RSX-20F via the Switch Register 3.2.3 You must load the console front end via the need to do 1. any of the switch register 1if you following: Enable specific cache or configure external instead of using the default configurations. memory yourself Load a TOPS-10 bootstrap program from a file with a name other than BOOT.EXB; for example, BOOTM.EXB containing BOOTM which 3. loads a monitor from magnetic tape. Load from a disk pack or DECtape that is not on unit 0. The software for the front-end processor must reside on a DECtape or disk pack connected to the front end. If both the front-end software and the system monitor reside on the same disk pack, the pack must be mounted on a dual-ported drive and the controller select switch must be The set to A/B. operation 1. Set is as follows: the ENABLE/DISABLE 1load This will enable the other Set the appropriate switch to ENABLE. three load switches. switches (or bits) in the switch register. register. switch Switch 0 is mandatory when loading via the Switches 1 and 2 must be set on if you intend to use the KL If RSX-20F resides on a disk initialization dialog (KLINIT). pack, set switch 7 on; if RSX-20F is on a DECtape, switch 7 must be off. Switches 8-10 must be set to specify the drive number of the disk or DECtape. For a detailed description of all the bit settings in the switch register, see Table 3-1l. 3-5 . STARTING 16 | 15| 14 SYSTEM Table 3-1 Register Bit Definitions Switch 17 THE 11 ] 10 8 Bit 716 3 2 1 Meaning If You this is set, the remaining must set this to load via bits are the switch interpreted. register. If both 1 and 2 are set, RSX-20F is loaded and the KL initialization operator dialog (KLINIT) is loaded and started. This is the usual case when loading via the switch register. If only loaded; -10 and If one of the two is set, the RSX-20F monitor is no communication 1is initiated between the -11 processors at this time. both 1 and 1like it 2 are not set, is via the DISK much However, 10-8 bits are specify the bits 8-10. unit number of Currently used, and If this on a If this since not is set, the dual-ported is not drive on These three of other the the set, unit 1is loaded load switch. interpreted, the not bootstrap the allow bootstrap indicate system DECTAPE bootstrap be you can device in set. device is a disk pack drive. front-end bits must the or 0; bootstrap you to device bits device is a DECtape processor. 9 specify (0 to 8 set and the 7). unit No indicate number bits unit set 3. 14-11 Currently not used, and must not be set. 15 This indicates the action taken when an I/0 error occurs during the bootstrapping. If this is set, the operation 1is retried indefinitely if an error occurs. If not set (the unsuccessful 17,16 Not Bits are set position. when used, the and normal case), a halt occurs after ten retries. must not be corresponding set. switch is in the wupward STARTING Press the SW/REG load THE SYSTEM switch. This will cause the front-end processor to access the disk drive (switch 7 set on) or the DECtape drive (switch 7 set off) with the unit number as specified in switches 8-10. The KL 1initialization program (KLINIT) is loaded and started and the default hardware memory are set TOPS-10 monitor confiqurations up. is The then of standard loaded cache bootstrap into the the output and external program central for the processor and started. The following the console RSX-20F [SYO: [DB3: is an example terminal VOO6A if 0:16 -- VERSION KLI -- MICROCODE KLI -- ALL ADDRESS SIZE RQO 000000 512K 04 BOOTS will and 9 receive are set on on. 131 LOADED CONFIGURATION: BOOTSTRAP Vnn you ENABLED MEMORY -- 8, RUNNING VERSION LOGICAL KLI 7, DB3:] V002Q CACHES 0, 21-JUN-76 REDIRECTED TO MOUNTED] KLI of switches CONTROLLER RQl1 RQ2 FOR RQ3 CONTYPE INT DMA20 4 ALL LOADED AND STARTED (nnn) BTS> The first creation loaded DB3: the line into end microcode date front disk on have are output version of output and the (the front would of time end. by the KLINIT was 1If DT3: memory bootstrap program started. The version number you the version and RSX-20F monitor that was lines tell you that system device (SY0:) for 7 had for a DECtape. not been The set, next the DB3: eight lines KL initialization program. They give that is running, and tell you that the was for loaded, the configured, the TOPS-10 next ¢two and prompt. 1lines and cache was that the monitor are the [SYO: [DB3: V006A 0:16 the KL10 enabled, standard loaded and was bootstrap program's If, in the previous example, you had also set switches 2 on, the console output would have been as follows: RSX~-20F the just two bit successfully external the The next 3) is the unit tasks. been tells of 1 and 21-JUN-76 REDIRECTED TO DB3:] MOUNTED] KLI -- VERSION KLI -- ENTER V002Q DIALOG RUNNING [NO,YES,EXIT,BOOT]? KLI> Switches 1 and initialization Just asked you answer. When the dialog number and For a 2 you will on specify that you wish to enter the have end answered with the all the applicable bootstrap KL has an questions, program's version prompt. complete examples, set program (KLINIT) operator dialog. KLINIT the first question and 1is waiting for refer description to Appendix 3-7 of C. the KLINIT dialog messages, and STARTING 3.3 LOADING THE CENTRAL THE PROCESSOR SYSTEM (TOPS-10 MONITOR) When the front-end processor has been loaded wusing any one of three methods described in Section 3.2, the system informs you: KLI The -- actual LOADED AND bootstrap program method of If used you BOOTSTRAP loading the the DISK front load, the STARTED that has been 1loaded depends upon the end. DECTAPE 1load, or the SW/REG 1load with switches 1 and 2 off; you will have loaded the bootstrap program found in the file BOOT.EXB. This would usually be BOOTS, a program to load the monitor from a disk pack. If you had used the KLINIT dialog you could have 1loaded a monitor from magnetic tape. to specify program 1like a non-default BOOTM, which For descriptions of the wvarious bootstrap programs, Specifications section of the Software Notebooks. 3.3.1 In Loading response KLI you can from the TOPS-10 to -- the the disk file file, load the refer to the from Disk message: BOOTSTRAP press BOOT will LOADED carriage AND STARTED return SYSTEM.EXE or key you and can 1load the specify default another file monitor such as: into options an and magnetic tape, the should be mounted on any drive but DSKB:TSTSYS .EXE and load a different monitor. When the TOPS-10 monitor 1is loaded, it will enter initialization dialog with you to determine start-up conditions. These are covered in Section 3.3.3. 3.3.2 Loading TOPS-10 from Magnetic In order to load the TOPS-10 following prerequisites must be l. The magnetic drive 2. 0. tape If remember to type drive The and bootstrap BOOTM, must monitor is BOOTM number from a met: containing this tell Tape not the monitor possible, which in the program to load reside on a drive mount by command a it on entering the controller line. monitor from front-end 1load magnetic device; tape, disk or DECtape. 3. Load the console front (Section 3.2.3) with at use the will allow you to end via the least bits KLINIT SW/REG 0, 1, dialog. and load 2 procedure. set ON. This STARTING 4, When THE SYSTEM KLINIT prompts you KLI LOAD KL BOOTSTRAP|[YES,NO,FILENAME]? the name For example, -- with: KLI> answer with bootstrap. respond of the file if BOOTM containing give you the LOADED AND STARTED was in the the magnetic file tape MTBOOT.EXB, with: KLI>MTBOOT.EXB KLINIT will KLI -- load BOOTM, BOOTSTRAP and you would then When BOOTM outputs be message: under control of the prompt characters: its bootstrap program. BTM> you can give the file specification for the monitor as: BTM>DSKB:MAGSYS.EXE[1,4]/TM02:3 to load a specific monitor controller or the default 0 of a TM10 file, which controller. Use Use Use Use for for for for /TM10:n /TM02:n /TX0l:n /TX02:n you can from simply is tape give a drive DSKB:SYSTEM.EXE[1l,4] the TOPS-10 monitor 1s loaded, it initialization dialog with the operator start-up options and conditions. These Section 3.3.3. TOPS-10 When the monitor error ?THIS AND 1is NOT RUN BUILT FOR A PROPERLY ON the system load get drive into to determine are covered an the 1n the time see the that the following XXXXXX A yyyyyy. xxxxxx and yyyyyy can be KAlO0, KI10 or KL1O. persists, the system manager should review the If tape issued: MONITOR WAS WILL in on TMO02 to enters system checks to If they are not, where procedure a Initialization Dialog TOPS-10 monitor is loaded, the and processor are compatible. message on return TU1l0, TU40, and TU41 tape drives. TUl6 and TU45 tape drives. TU70 and TU71 tape drives. TU72 tape drives. When 3.3.3 3 carriage If this message monitor generation Software Notebooks. diagnostic software at program monitor (SYSCHK) generation time, was 1included the system will in the prompt with: SYSCHK A response (N,Y): of Y runs a 5-second diagnostic program accessibility of all configured memory and system N or a carriage return skips the diagnostic. 3-9 that devices. ensures A reply the of STARTING The system then specified date; for ABC123 When reply types out at system example: KL10 SYS#1234 system prompts: WHY RELOAD: one of the acceptable NXM CM PARITY HALT SA POWER LOOP NEW STATIC HUNG SCHED HARDWARE PM OTHER retrieved at a name as to as the 24 characters system creation answers: within 60 seconds, OTHER Supplementary Operator's later (up well 07-12-76 following Software Notebooks for The reply 1is stored reply time) OPR If you do not reply ONCE manual in the SYSTEM system generation the with the THE is assumed. Refer Procedures section to of the the the meanings and usage of the above replies. in the system error file (ERROR.SYS) and can be time using the SYSERR program. For example, a of: WHY RELOAD:SCHED will record When the that this particular monitor load was a scheduled reload. system prompts: DATE enter the month numeric may year 1is or the be day and alphabetic abbreviated optional. last two. 1If 1If to any entered, the year it is month, point where monitor creation date. If, was June 21, 1976; any of be September as DATE:SEP DATE:S DATE:8 When the 8 8, either is must be either the not entered, it is same as in the creation date recorded 1in it for the still full order. The unique. The four to assumed example, following the monitor replies would 1976. 1976 8 76 SEP system prompts: TIME: enter a 4-digit time based on a 24-hour TIME: 2015 represents When reply the 8:15 PM. system prompts: STARTUP OPTION: with of one the following: QUICK REFRESH LONG GO UNITID NOINITIA DESTROY CHANGE clock. For digits be the example, STARTING THE SYSTEM A complete description of each start-up option 1is contained 1in the ONCE manual in the Supplementary Operator's Procedures section of the Software Notebooks. The usual operator's reply is GO to start the system with a minimum amount of dialog or QUICK to start the system immediately without dialog. 3.3.4 Loading Second CPU (Dual Processor) If your system is a dual processor, this is the time to initialize the second CPU. The master CPU 1is designated CPUO while the second or slave CPU is referred to as CPUl. The second CPU needs 1its own RSX-20F front-end software mounted on a DECtape or disk accessible to its front-end processor. Load the second front-end processor as described enter the KLINIT dialog. Load the microcode and main memory. When you receive the message: KLI -- LOAD KL BOOTSTRAP [YES, NO, in Section 3.2.3 reconfigure cache and and FILENAME]? KLI> answer "NO" KLI -- which will bring EXIT RESTART]? ([YES, up: KLI> Reply with YES (or default with a carriage return) to the RSX-20F monitor. Proceed as follows: STEP FUNCTION “\ Type control backslash to enter PAR>SET CONSOLE Set PAR>SET NO Inhibit RELOAD PAR>SET CONS PAR>J OPR 400 console Return Start [CPU1] 3.4 and you to programmer automatic console CPUl to reload the Parser. of CPUl on COMMUNICATIONS FRONT an error. mode. location 400. This is the response typed on CTYl has completed initialization. LOADING exit mode. operator at KL memory will when CPUl ENDS Communication front ends must ©be loaded with appropriate software based on the type of remote terminals and/or stations to be serviced. This section deals only with the loading of a front-end processor with a specific or default file that resides on disk. How the software was generated and placed into the disk file 1is <covered 1in the System Programming Procedures It is have and Techniques assumed that you have logged in the Software Notebooks. already loaded the TOPS-10 monitor and 1in. The loading procedure varies with the type of 1interface to the KL processor. The DC75NP, DN85, and DN87 front ends interface via the DL10 Data Channel. The DN87S front end interfaces wvia the DTEZ20 Ten-Eleven Data Interface. 3-11 STARTING 3.4.1 Loading via THE SYSTEM the DL10 The program used to load a front-end processor via the DL10 is BOOT1l1. Your system programmer will usually have made this program available on your DSK: [1,2] area or it may reside in the SYS: system library. Load BOOT1ll by typing: BOOTI11 .R TOPS-10 with: will load and start BOOT1l which will, 1in turn, prompt you FILE: and expect, as a response, a standard followed by switches telling BOOT1ll response such DECsystem-10 what to do. file descriptor A representative as: FILE:DN87 .BIN/CLEAR/START/PORTNO: 2 will clear the PDP-11 the memory with of the the PDP-11 program in on the port number 2 to 2zeros;. file DSK:DN87.BIN; and 1load start the PDP-11 on program. If you reply with a carriage return, the default action 1is: FILE:DSK:PDPXI0.BIN/START/PORTNO:0 Note the however system, BOOT11l that the keeps you "CLEARING if there port is number informed in of more than the above its one DLl1l0O-interfaced response must progress with the LOADING "PDP-11 LOADED "PDP-11 STARTED Additional information on BOOT1ll switch options messages are in the BOOT1l specification in the The Loading program via used the Load SYS: system DTELDR .R TOPS-10 by following messages: to and a 1list of error Software Notebooks. DTE20 load is called DTELDR. Your program available to you the specified.. PDP-11 "PDP-11 3.4.2 be a front-end processor via the system programmer will usually on your DSK: [1,2] area or it DTE20 interface have made this may reside 1in library. typing: DTELDR will load and start DTELDR which will then prompt you with: * DTELDR expects you to reply with a file specification default) ; an action switch, and optional modification default file specification is: 3-12 (or assume a switches. The STARTING THE SYSTEM DSK:DTELxy.BIN where: x is the CPU number implementation). y The is is (only If x is 0 1is omitted, allowed zero the DTE number (0 through 3) of the reserved for the Console/Diagnostic action switch to load the front end is in the current assumed. PDP-1l1 interface. processor.) (DTEO is: /RELOAD: xy where x and y, defined as above, determine the front end RELOAD 1loads the specified file into the appropriate starts the primary protocol. The front end 1is then communications. Modification switches that .BIN may /NODUMP The /RELOAD switch automatically takes a dump of PDP-11 before cancel image 1loading format. a file. Use this switch to dump. Error logging is automatically in effect when you 1load a front end. Use this switch to cancel error logging. To load a DN87S DN87S.BIN and DTELDR the in are: The /NOLOG is applicable /IMAGE memory file be to be loaded. front end and enabled for on DTE number 2 with a skip the automatic dump, program 1located 1in DSK: type the following to the prompt: *DN87S.BIN/RELOAD: 2/NODUMP If the program DTELO2.BIN, you had been need only 1located 1in the default 1location, DSK: type: * /RELOAD: 2/NODUMP Another action switch available with DTELDR is /AUTO. This switch, when set for an active DTELDR job, will automatically reload any front end that crashes with its unique default file. To take advantage of this feature, you must ensure that the default files contain the appropriate For programs. example: DSK:DTELOl1.BIN must contain the program for the number 1 front contain the program for the number 2 front end. DSK:DTELO2.BIN must end. By including the following sequence in the OPR.ATO file (see Section 4.1.1.2), you can provide for both the automatic loading of a front end at system initialization time, and the subsequent automatic reloading of any front end that might crash. : SLOG :DEF DTE= :1log on a subjob sname it DTE DTE-R DTELDR +1load DTE-/RELOAD: 2/NODUMP DTE-/AUTO s1load DTE number 2 sset automatic reload and 3-13 start DTELDR STARTING For additional .R information on THE SYSTEM DTELDR, type: DTELDR */HELP 3.5 LOADING The THE DX10 DATA CHANNEL PDP-8 in the DX10 data operation of the TU70 series The bootstrap from the must be BOOTDX Since program, PDP-8 runs in it does job must have call. file, the 3.5.1 The it USER mode This load the (or enable dump) PDP-8. the programs These programs timesharing systenmn. format. a DECsystem-10 direct privilege to into to is to the DX10 allowing assigned hardware, it to wuse from the system the the BOOTDX TRPSET accounting . Procedure program, BOOTDX, by typing: When wunder instructions 1loaded systems. designed system file be tape system manager. Loading .R is file mode must magnetic the TRPSET privilege monitor by disk image I/0 of BOOTDX, DECsystem-10 in channel normally resides in the system area, SYS:. Load BOOTDX BOOTDX is loaded and started, it responds with the prompt: FILE: and waits for a reply consisting of a standard DECsystem-10 file descriptor followed by one or more switches defining the operation to be performed. If the file “ descriptor DSK:DXMPA.A8 or is omitted, DSK:DXMPA.BIN the default (for a load is: operation) or DSK:DXMPA.LSD If no switches are (for a typed, dump the operation) default is: /CLEAR/LOAD which it. first Another clears commonly the used PDP-8 and switch is: then loads the channel /CLEAR which sets PDP-8 memory to all HALT instructions. program into STARTING THE .R SYSTEM BOOTDX FILE:SYS:/CLEAR/START memory, will load and start the BOOTDX bootstrap program, clear PDP-8 and start it at SYS: from DXMPA.BIN or DXMPA.A8 file the load location 200 octal. While this is going following progress messages "CLEARING DX-10 "DX-10 LOADING "DX-10 LOADED "DX-10 STARTED at your TTY: on, you will receive the CHAPTER 4 SYSTEM SERVICES initiated to run Timesharing requires that several programs be may vary from programs these of list the Although throughout the day. in this section installation to installation, the programs discussed generally user can be considered necessary for the efficient servicing of commands. The programs and commands explained below enable you to handle user-initiated requests such as: disk/DECtape file transfers; disk line printer 1listings; pack, magtape, and DECtape mount requests; and batch Jjob requests. The variety of user paper tape output; requests will require you to supervise the running of several Jjobs therefore, must become proficient 1in each You, simultaneously. execute each one with a minimum of delay. to procedure and be able 4.1 OPSER The OPSER program enables you to monitor and control up simultaneously, from a single terminal. These to 14 jobs, Jjobs are known as in this subjobs because they run under the control of another job; can communicate with any as the operator, You, instance, OPSER. active subjob directly or via OPSER. 4.1.1 OPSER Operation up. OPSER is normally started automatically when the system is brought At this time OPSER reads and processes the file SYS:0PR.ATO (the Auto initiate the File). This file contains the OPSER commands that will running of system service programs such as input and output spoolers, components of the GALAXY batch processing system, and device-servicing programs. If you want to start OPSER yourself, type: .R OPSER When OPSER responds with an asterisk, tell it to load and process Auto File by *: AUTO the typing: SYS:0PR.ATO OPSER will respond with an asterisk or an exclamation point, at which time you can give it any of the OPSER commands described later in this chapter. SYSTEM It is important for commands to 4.1.1.1 Commands command by command the you OPSER a to to remember program and the OPSER colon (:) SERVICES and to distinguish typing directly to between the Program - You must precede must type enough letters each you unique. typing subjobs. to OPSER make the NOTE The commands :MONITOR, :SLOGIN, :WHAT, :WHERE are exceptions. The minimum number of letters you must type for each of these commands is as follows: and +tMONITO : SLOG cW :WHE OPSER prompts (!) when that no your you it is subjobs part. with ready currently active There are string. four an asterisk (*) exclamation but you methods can of point still means Type the subjob 2. Type the mnemonic number you the word ALL, command 4. Leave to the OPSER apply (or to the all indicates active specification you intend referenced via B, least one other in an out the (1), job point subjob is subjobs. OPSER command the :DEFINE with to OPSER that you want entirely, (2), or the | command sequence, A, at subijobs. If the previous command referenced a list of referenced is the default for any subsequent :WHAT exclamation numbers). assigned which to subjob assumes subjob you the an with subjobs command. Use that communicate specifying l. 3. or receive your commands. An asterisk indicates active or a subjob is waiting for some action on are An either to to (3) in apply which case to last the above. subjobs, command. the 1last one For example, 1in C :STOP C is the If A, B, commands subjob implicitly referenced and were only C were :WHAT the in active the :STOP subjobs, typed, command. and the ALL :STOP C would again be the implicit argument of the :STOP command. following SYSTEM 4.1.1.2 Commands Directly to SERVICES Subjobs subjob, you must indicate for which intended. Do this by preceding the the to name stop assigned subjob 3 via the (LP1l) 13-STOP :DEFINE you could - When you give commands subjob (or subjobs) the command with the subjob command) and a hyphen. to a command is number (or For example, type: ;using the subjob number ;using the subjob name in OPSER or !LP1-STOP There all is a the method subjobs available at once. For within each of the subjobs, subjob, you can do it with the WHAT instead a for example, sending if you of typing command. single the want same to command know WHAT to You simply the to status every single type: ALL-WHAT and OPSER sends Whenever you enter a identify the entry as !hh:mm where xxx line. !S-R the SPRINT / CTY the STEP OPSER 2,167 FIL= ! :WHAT FIL !FIL-R PIP (operator (OPSER each subjob. subjob, OPSER will timestamp and or name is used in the preceding representative of CTY command output. command) timestamp) (SPRINT prompt) included OPSER !:DEF a following interest Actual *:SLOG number the in .R the output entries Consider to follows: subjob example, 113:20(S) Sample command to (xxx) is For command ouput will following be in this manual will of conserving timestamped. sequence of usually space and omit timestamp reducing clutter. commands: EXPLANATION Run the Login a OPSER program. subjob under Associate subjob Print the Tell out FIL to n [2,167]. with status run of the name FIL. FIL. PIP. *FILC.EXT=FILA.EXT,FILB.EXT Use two Pip to create other files. 1:STOP FIL Return FIL !1:KJOB FIL Logout FIL. Cause OPSER 1+EXIT to to one file monitor mode. exit the to from data monitor. in SYSTEM SERVICES The example above shows how to log system program, in a subjob, and log out the subjob. give it a name, run a Once the concept of subjobs is understood it is simple to give system commands and program commands to a subjob. The entire range of monitor and program commands can be sent to a subjob as long as the command is preceded by a subjob name or number followed by a hyphen. This becomes very important in explaining the service programs which are run under OPSER. To CTRL/C a subjob a CTRL/A must be used, since CTRL/C under OPSER 1is equivalent to :EXIT. For example, to CTRL/C subjob FIL which is running PIP the command is: FIL-"A<CR> Whatever was being done under PIP would be allowed to finish, subjob FIL would be put at monitor and then 1level. A useful feature of OPSER is the ability to automatically execute a predefined set of commands contained in a disk file. This 1s known as the AUTO feature sequence of +:SLOG of commands: OPSER. For example, consider the following 2,167 FIL= :DEF :WHAT FIL FIL-R PIP FILC.EXT=FILA.EXT,FILB.EXT :STOP FIL :KJOB FIL If the above commands were placed in a file named FIL.ATO, you could accomplish exactly what was done manually in the example above by entering the :AUTO single OPSER command: FIL Commands included in a file named OPR.ATO are whenever the system is OPSER is used to control a large part of system important that you become proficient in its use. 4.1.2 executed automatically loaded. operation; it 1is while others are commands that are OPSER Commands users all to available Some OPSER commands are available only to those with OPERATOR privileges. 4.1.2.1 OPSER Commands for the Operator - OPSER available to you at the operator's console are the following: :JCONTn Continues job n that was waiting for operator :KSYS hh:mm :KSYS +hh:mm :KSYS by specified time Stops timesharing at the five minutes least be at This must hh:mm. used, If +hh:mm is later than current time. the number of hours and/or minutes means it action. 1least at be from the current time and must All users logging in receive a five minutes. 4-4 SYSTEM message will SERVICES stating end. messages hour when the before 30,15,8,4,2 n :RESTRICT dev:,... at :KSYS is are at which users minutes, of MIN. running time command :KSYS Note that :KSYS the effect of The colon and similar given, one then at minute to before stop. The TIMESHARING ENDS only for a [1,2] job terminal. without an :KSYS hh:mm the time 1in 1 form: works the OPR is ends, scheduled the timesharing receive timesharing timesharing messages IN the Logged-in optional; both hh:mm Restricts the specified argument or :KSYS undoes +hh:mm. specification and hhmm are is wvalid. devices to the operator's use. The operator can assign the devices to a wuser, but the user cannot reassign them to anyone but the operator. :SET BATMAX n Restricts BATCON controller) BATMIN n Reserves :SET LOGMAX n Restricts n The jobs the for :SET RUN CPUn Allows the RUN NO system to turn :SET RUN ONLY The 1is the :SET RUN ALL CPUn CPUn n command the removes :SET the RUN run. adds the CPU the CORMIN, OPR, DATE, SCHED, dev: Returns to device that complement of in filespec :AUTO /hhmm filespec off line. 1). The processor to :SET NO RUN system the named all the .SET y, BREAK, MEMORY, See wuser been pool. CPU to CPUs where y CORMAX, NOMESSAGE, the equivalent A for resource restricted. an pool It is a the :RESTRICT. Processes the specified file Processes the occurrence hhmm jobs. or Appendix free has OPSER Commands for all Users - The available to all user s of the system. :AUTO puts VMMAX. 4.1.2.2 are the only DAYTIME, TTY, the 0-14 system pool. monitor commands explanation. :UNRESTRICT jobs 1is and (0 Simulates the monitor command is one of the following: y n CPUs. from ALL n multiprocessor named running allows RUN into a on number named :SET of CPU of ONLY available :SET pool of only processors RUN n subjobs. run operator :SET system range to system only BATCON system :SET batch run simultaneously. inclusive. ¢:SET (the to OPSER commands commands that contained follow in the the next immediately. specified file of hhmm today. today, the immediately. file will If be at it is past processed SYSTEM ¢:AUTO /<hhmm filespec SERVICES Processes the specified file at the next occurrence of hhmm today. If it is past hhmm today, the file will not be processed. ¢:AUTO />hhmm filespec Processes the specified file at the next occurrence of hhmm. If it is past hhmm today, hhmm the file will be processed at tomorrow. NOTE In the above commands, "filespec" stands for file specification and consists of a device, filename, extension, and a directory name in the form: dev:file.ext [proj-prog]. where: dev: is any valid default file device name. The stands for any 1to 6-character filename. There 1is no default; you must supply a filename. is .ext any 1- extension. [proj-prog] to filename 3-character The default is .ATO. is the directory area that contains the directory the is default The file. project-programmer the by indicated number you used to log 1in. Closes the disk log file without opening :CLOSE : CONTINUE input is DSK:. (This is a transaction file new one. a where OPSER logs its activities). : Continues processing the AUTO file after This CTRL/C. a by interrupted being allows the operator to gain control of a subjob during AUTO file processing. : CURRENT Types the name of the current subjob :DAYTIME Types the current date and time. :DEFINE XXX=n Gives subjob n the name XXX, if 1if one has not defined; been has one been defined, it types the number of the current subjob (the last one typed in). which may 1In from one to six characters long. be recommended. are names general, short may be omitted from number subjob The OPSER the command string, in which case assumes the last subjob you referenced. SYSTEM SERVICES Restrictions The first character of the name must be alphabetic and the second through sixth (if any) must be alphanumeric. The subjob name "B" 1is reserved as the mnemonic assigned :DEVICE dev:10g:n for BATCON and should to any other subjob. :EXIT n,m, ... or CTRL/C be Causes OPSER to exit to the monitor, where you can ASSIGN the device (dev:) on subjob (n) and also associate a logical name (log) with that device. The logical name is optional but if you omit 1it, you must tell OPSER. You do this by typing a colon (:) where the logical name would have appeared, e.g., :DEVICE DTA: :4. If you issue a .REENTER command before returning to OPSER, you will abort the .ASSIGN command. ~ When you are ready to return to OPSER, :ERROR not type :CONT. Silences all output except error messages from subjobs n,m, etc. The :REVIVE command will resume reporting all messages. When OPSER 1is first started, :REVIVE is in effect. Exits to active. :FREE Types the subjob. +HELP Types a commands the monitor number of if no the subjobs first are wunused text briefly explaining and their formats. the :KILL n,m,... See :KJOB n,m,... Logs out the specified subjobs n, m, etc., saving all their files. Also, the /Z switch is passed to the KJOB program in order to suppress the normal queuing done at logout time. :LOGIN p,pn Logs 1in a new subjob under project programmer number p,pn. If p,pn is not given, OPSER's project programmer number is assumed. Exits to active. :MONITOR :MSGLVL :KJOB. n the monitor Determines whether or (JOBSTS) bits appear the job :WHAT command. status bits even if subjobs are not the job status in the response to If n equals 0 the are included 1in the :WHAT output. If n equals 1 (default), the :WHAT output does not include these bits. The actual letters typed out represent the following: SERVICES P O HX SYSTEM tQUEUE 1line logged in monitor mode input wait output wait for JACCT. Initiates sends to the the :RESOURCES Lists :REVIVE Clears n,m,... for for for for the first line (line) free as a subjob QUEUE and command monitor. the available the : TSILENCE system effects and of resources. the : ERROR :SILENCE, commands for subjobs n,m,etc., and causes normal echoing of output from them. When OPSER is first started, :REVIVE is in effect. :SCHED Types the out :SILENCE :SLOGIN n,m n,m,... set except from timesharing. Regular No further LOGINs 2 CTY. No further LOGINs from terminals, and answering no of data sets. Batch jobs only. Device MOUNTs can operator be Unspooled jobs allowed. No operator Suppresses log output Same as Puts the SEND all terminal from subjobs output subjobs without coverage. monitor :LOGIN, remote done 200 the by intervention. 400 terminal in. :STOP as 0 Simulates n,m,... bits are: 1 100 line schedule Bits 4 :SEND the operator. but command. and transaction n,m,etc. also until silences the job n,m,etc., is into all logged monitor mode. :SYSTAT xxX Runs XXX :TIME n SYSTAT under Types out with the optional the first free the total running time n since the 1last :TIME followed by the integrated running time and core size. :TLOG dev:file.ext[n,m] Closes log, the <current n,m,... Suppresses subjobs to the all log, on file default terminal n,m,etc., but transaction log. job transaction new no designated, the DSK:OPSER.LOG[1,2]. for n command, product of OPSER if any, and opens a specified file. If :TSILENCE arguments subjob. the is is output from continues output SYSTEM :TTYTST SERVICES Types the out octal :WHAT n,m,... a ASCII 40 Types test pattern characters to the 174 <consisting of corresponding to inclusive. status of the specified subjob(s). This typeout includes a SYSTAT of each job with the current time, the time of the last input and the :WHERE 4.1.3 devn: OPSER Operator The following terminal. ?0PRAFE AUTO OPSER the ?0PRANI DEVICE Input READ BAD CANNOT cannot FILE There ?0PRBTS BAD next time of Types the number of the physical the 1listing is set to timed AUTO location device dev appear on in of 0), the and file. node/station subjob n. OPSER can your operator ERROR a read error while it was trying to process file. because it device that ?0PRBFS the from encountered auto 1linear MSGLVL Messages messages FILE last output, a JOBSTS bits (if DO be INPUT performed 1is can not only a do on the valid output. specified device name device; or either because it is a SPEC is a TIME syntax error in the file specification. SPECIFIED There is Section a syntax 4.1.2 for error in the time information about specification. _See the format of OPSER commands. ?20PRCKJ CANNOT BE KJOB'ED OPSER 1is unable to condition is a job ?0PRCMM CANNOT BE PUT The operator IN 1log being the over MONITOR COMMAND The a NOT operator unique One cause of this MODE attempted to return CTRL/C) but was wunable This condition indicates a ?70PRCNU job out. quota. to to do so system or the monitor (:EXIT even after several a program problem. or tries. UNIQUE has entered an command. 4-9 abbreviation that does not specify SYSTEM ?20PRCUA CANNOT USE SERVICES ALL The operator typed Certain commands :DEFINE). ?0PRDCO Refer OPSER operator DEVICE CANNOT The a command with "ALL" as the argument. do not accept "ALL" as an argument (e.g., to Section 4.1.2 for 1information about the device commands. DO OUTPUT specified in the :TLOG command 1is not an output device. $OPRDNR DAEMON NOT RUNNING The DAEMON program has ?0PRDUE DAEMON UUO not been initialized. ERROR An error occurred when OPSER called Consult the system administrator. $OPRFMM :KSYS The HAS A MINIMUM operator :KSYS must specified command. be OF +00:05 The or 5 DAEMON to do accounting. MIN. an argument value of greater. the The that was "+hh:mm" value of too small form of the hh:mm for the the commarnd form of command must be at least five minutes later than current See Section 4.1.2.1 for details about the format of the time. this command 20PRJNA NO JOB NUMBER ASSIGNED This message dgenerally occurs 1in response 0 the :WHAT command. It happens in cases where the monitor does not know about the subjob specified in the command. ?0PRJRO JOB(S) RUNNING ON n,m,... TYPE ":KILL ALL" TO KILL THE SUBJOBS The operator tried to :EXIT or CTRL/C from OPSER but subjobs n,m, etc. were active. The subjobs must be killed first. ?20PRLEF ENTER An FAILURE ENTER failure transaction ?0PRNAS NO code ACTIVE log ON LOG FILE occurred file when OPSER ¢tried to open the (:TLOG). SUBJOBS The operator issued a command to a subjob but no subjobs were running. 20PRNFP NO FREE PTY'S There are no more which to run pseudo-teletypes subjobs. 4-10 (PTY'S) available wunder SYSTEM 20PRNFS NO FREE SUBJOBS This message occurs in a command that uses a when there are no free ?20PRNSM NO SERVICES SUCH response to either free subjob (e.g., subjobs available. the :FREE :QUEUE). command or It happens MNEMONIC The mnemonic specified in the command is not associated with any of the subjobs. This 1is either because it was typed incorrectly or because the name had not previously been associated with a subjob via the :DEFINE command. [OPRPAF PROCESSING AUTO COMMAND FILE] OPSER ?20PRSJW IS is currently processing STUCK WITH JACCT the auto file. ON The operator tried to return to the monitor (:EXIT or CTRL/C) but was wunable to do so, even after several tries. This condition ?0PRSNA SUBJOB n indicates IS NOT SUPERSEDING system or PREVIOUS to subjob n and :AUTO OMOUNT it is not active. :AUTO command. issued. This REQUEST The operator issued another supersedes the one previously 4.2 program problem. ACTIVE A command was given $OPRSPR a new one (FILE AND MOUNT/DISMOUNT) OMOUNT is a program used to process FILE or MOUNT/DISMOUNT commands. FILE commands are used for file transfers to or from disk and DECtape. MOUNT/DISMOUNT commands are used for the physical mounting or dismounting of disk packs, magnetic tapes or DECtapes. The following discussion of OMOUNT is from the operator's viewpoint in responding to such requests. Refer to the DECsystem-10 Operating System Commands manual for a discussion of MOUNT/DISMOUNT and FILE from the user's viewpoint. (Also see the OMOUNT specification 1in the Software Notebooks for additional operator information.) Depending on the volume of file transfers, it may be advantageous for you to run two OMOUNT programs; one specifically for FILE commands to minimize the waiting period for completion of a wuser request. At monitor load time, when the OPSER program is automatically logged in under [1,2], one or more OMOUNT jobs can also be initialized with the appropriate commands in the OPR.ATO file. You may also start OMOUNT jobs manually if the need arises. following example, DECtape unit 6 is assigned to an OMOUNT M6 . In the job named SYSTEM §2EB .R EXPLANATION OPSER *:SLOG 1:DEF 1,2 M6= IM6-AS SERVICES Run the Log in Give DTAG6 OPSER a subjob the Assign program. name DTA6 M6 to IM6-R OMOUNT Run IM6-START Cause OMOUNT MOUNT requests A second step for DTA6. START In OMOUNT above 1If most the followed by FILE this second would cases, perform be a your OMOUNT response hyphen MOUNT job to action, and a an M6 TTY12 TAPE requested After followed OMOUNT by a FILE familiarize drive other will then carriage 21 146,504 subjob. M6. program. to accept submitted for FILE all FILE by users. a DECtape you have also have the one to only, the the A by a subjob typical to be mounted 1is to number example of LOCKED ON a DTA(6): one response covers 99% of and continual use of OMOUNT 1% of (DTA6 the If process or mounted with the switch on WRITE the tape on DTA6, simply type M6- remaining suggested for wuser name DSKB:,DSKB:CRBDOC.RNO WRITE , carriage return. This requests. Experience you with than the and all but the first M7 for M6 and DTA7 requests request type return. 21 [146,504] to mount the DECtape on DTA5 M6-5 1instead of M6-<CR>. M6-DTB2. You was OMOUNT and IM6-<CR> LOCK. OMOUNT the follows: 108:17:56 (M6) R JOB 13 Job job [1,2]. M7-START:FILE. necessary command to job could be initiated by repeating substituting, for example, the name and command the under above you MOUNT requests. You can in this case). If you request, choose and to mount DISMOUNT type it requests use a choose M6-DTA5 on DTB2, such the will or type as: 108:14:25(M6) M JOB 17 TTY201 1,2 1 MOUNT 1,2 1 DISMOUNT DTA ACCT /WL WRITE-LOCKED ASSIGN DTA (0) IM6-<CR> 108:18:13(M6) D JOB 17 TTY201 DTAOQ PROCEED? IM6-Y<CR> The response to a MOUNT command is dismount time, you are asked the of the following: Reply NO | Cancel a <CR> as in the FILE command. question PROCEED?. Answer with Action the request and queue. YES Proceed At one if possible. 4-12 delete it from the SYSTEM SERVICES Reply Action CANCEL Same as NO. DEFER: t Defer processing this request for the specified amount of time, where t=time in the form: mm minutes (1440 maximum) or hh:mm hours and minutes (24:00 maximum). HELP Type out list of wvalid replies to PROCEED question. PAUSE Wait for current operator input after finishing the requests. START : x Start processing x type requests after completing the current one. "x" can be FILE, MOUNT, NONE, or ALL. START with no argument assumes a default of ALL. STOP: X Stop processing x type requests after completing the current one. "x" can be FILE, MOUNT, NONE, or ALL. STOP with no argument assumes a default of ALL. WAIT Defer the request and wait for operator input. WHAT Retype previous dialogue. /START command and /STOP may and all resulting accompany other TTY replies. Responses to OMOUNT requests, either FILE or MOUNT, are normally self-explanatory. There are times, however, when some type of error is encountered and special action is required. When you receive an error message, stop the particular command causing the error, abort it, and notify the user about the problem. The most common errors occur on FILE commands when the DECtape is full, the DECtape directory is full, or an error 1s encountered on a particular file. The sequence of commands necessary to abort a command is as follows: 1:STOP M6 IM6-START This OPSER command will cause be returned to monitor level. This to passes Jjob M6 the to job M6 to monitor command, START, reinitialize the OMOUNT program., IM6-START This passes to reprint the error. the the START command request that to OMOUNT initiated NOTE If the running OMOUNT specific program requests, was the START command should contain or imply the same argument as the original START command. (For example, START:FILE). SYSTEM IM6-/C You would SERVICES This command cancels causing the error. then send a message to the wuser the informing wuser request him of the specification in the Software Notebooks further discussion of the OMOUNT program. and the problem. Refer to the OMOUNT OMOUNT.HLP file for 4.3 QUEUE QUEUE is a program which allows a user to add, schedule, list, modify, and delete queue entries in the various system queues. Although the QUEUE command is, for the most part, a user, rather than an operator oriented function, you should become familiar with all of its options and capabilities: QUEUE evokes many questions from wusers, and you must be ready to offer the maximum amount of assistance. A complete discussion of QUEUE is contained in the GALAXY Operations and System Programming Procedures manual of the Software Notebooks. The QUEUE command queues user requests that are to be acted upon by corresponding spooler and batch programs. The following system queues are available: QUEUE MNEMONIC CONTENTS LPT Line PTP | printer requests Paper tape punch requests INP Batch system CDP Card PLT Plotter punch requests requests requests Because the list of QUEUE switches is extensive, the entire list will not be included in this document. The more commonly used switches will be discussed along with several examples. However it 1is important that you become familiar with all the switches contained in the QUEUE specification in the Software Notebooks. The basic format of the QUEUE command is: .Q gueuename:=filespec/switch In this format, queuename refers to the queue mnemonic, LPT, PTP, INP, CDP, or PLT. filespec refers to a disk file to be listed, punched on paper tape, card punched, plotted, or input to the Batch controller. switch refers to one or more of the allowable QUEUE switches; the most common ones are listed below. SYSTEM SERVICES MEANING SWITCH /AFTER: hhmm The request cannot be processed after the specified time (24-hour /COPIES:n Repeat the output 63 inclusive. /DEADLINE : hhmm The request must be started before specified time (24-hour time). /DISPOSE:DELETE Delete /DISPOSE : PRESERVE Save : RENAME /DISPOSE Rename the /KILL Remove the specified specified queue. /LIMIT:n Output is 1limited to the specified number of pages, cards, minutes or feet. /LIST List the entries /MODIFY/switch:arg Change the specified switch entry to the new value "arg". Multiple switches can be altered using /MODIFY. /PRIORITY:n Give /TAPE : IMAGE Punch the tape the delete 62 the file times where n =1 after file after file after the n until time). - the spooling. spooling. into area [3,3] and entry from the spooling. in the queue. request a priority where n=0 - inclusive. in image mode (PTP only). The following switches apply only to the INP or Batch queue. MEANING SWITCH can Job the Set the maximum core that use where n=decimal value of core in K. /CORE:n /RESTART:0 or after restarted If 0, job cannot be system crash. If 1, job can 1 a be restarted. Specify the maximum amount of CPU time allowable for the job in hours-min-sec. simplify the PRINT equals 0O LPT: PUNCH equals O PTP: SUBMIT equals 0 INP: CPUNCH equals 0 CDP: TPUNCH equals 0 PTP: PLOT equals o /TIME:hhmmss To further available: PLT:= queue commands the following alternatives are SYSTEM Some examples are given SERVICES below: EXAMPLES EXPLANATION .PRINT FILEA,FILEB Enter files FILEA and line printer queue. .PUNCH FIL.BIN/TAP:IMAGE Enter the file FIL.BIN into the tape queue to be punched in image .SUBMIT FIL/AFTER:1800 .SUBMIT Enter queue [2,167]FIL=/KILL .Q .PRINT the file FIL.CTL 1into to be processed after 6 Kill from the the entry input FIL.CTL queue. List all entries of for all into the paper mode. the input pm. user [2,167] queues. FILEA/MOD/COPIES:3/FORMS:NARROW Modify the print produce 3 copies It is good practice to examine the queues backlogs or Jjobs that are stuck in queue software alter FILEB problem. /AFTER You and can then modify /DEADLINE requests for FILEA on narrow forms. to periodically checking for because of some hardware or or remove parameters to requests suit your or even operations schedule. 4,4 GALAXY BATCH SYSTEM The GALAXY Batch system operates under the control of the DECsystem-10 Operating System, TOPS-10, increasing the efficiency of the system by processing jobs that do not require operator interaction. The types of Jobs that you should consider for running in a batch environment are: large, long-running jobs; frequently run jobs; jobs requiring large amounts of data; and, jobs requiring no user interaction. The You GALAXY Batch system uses the following components: QUASAR the system BATCON the batch QUEUE LPTSPL the system the spooling SPROUT the spooling processor for other output SPRINT the spooling processor for input devices can automatically monitor load SYS:0OPR.ATO time load by queue system job and queueing program processor for the start including the any of the appropriate line printer above OPSER devices programs commands at in the file. 4,.4,.1 QUASAR QUASAR 1is queued BATCON and spooled requests are or the appropriate spooler. the There is no communicate manager controller master direct with controller interaction QUASAR via in the GALAXY processed between QUASAR commands to 4-16 Batch by system. QUASAR and All user directed to and the operator. You BATCON and the spoolers. SYSTEM SERVICES QUASAR communicates with you via messages prefixed with "CTQ" that are issued by BATCON or one of the spoolers. If QUASAR is not automatically started at monitor load time, manually do so as you can follows: type this if OPSER is not running .R OPSER log in a subjob give the subjob the name QUA *:SLOG *:DEF QUA= 1load and start QUASAR *OQOUA-R QUASAR (now log in and load BATCON and the spoolers) If QUASAR should stop running for any reason, you can it by reloading it in the same subjob, for example: simply restart QUA-R QUASAR However, since the new QUASAR does not know about the existence of BATCON and the spoolers, you must go through a routine of killing and restarting them, for example: kills BATCON B-KILL kills the printer spooler kills the input spooler LO-KILL SP-KILL Each of the KILL commands causes any processing to stop immediately But since these jobs are unknown to and sends a message to QUASAR. the "new" QUASAR, it sends a message to you through them. The message is ?CTQMFQ MESSAGE FROM QUASAR - NOT A KNOWN COMPONENT This means that although you have stopped the actual processing of the They the original requests for them still exist in the queues. jobs, in put 1is QUASAR "new" the when way will be processed in the normal contact with BATCON and the spoolers. This occurs as soon as the programs have been STARTed as follows: B-START LO-START SP-START 4.4.1.1 system Component-to-QUASAR Messages - The following messages Most of these are error messages issued by the interface module which BATCON and the spoolers use to communicate with QUASAR. system you problems; indicate serious 2CTQCAP CANNOT ACQUIRE A PID should bring attention of the system programmer or system administrator. messages them to the not does The program (i.e., BATCON or one of the spoolers) They acquire a system name from INFO. to have privileges must be run under [1,2] or a remote operator number [1xx.2]. 2CTQFCI FAILURE TO CONNECT TO THE INTERRUPT SYSTEM of A failure occurred when the program (i.e., BATCON or one spoolers) attempted to enable a PSI system monitor call the for IPCF interrupts. Consult the 4-17 system programmer. SYSTEM ?2CTQIRF IPCF The RECEIVE IPCFR. BATCON FAILURE monitor or SERVICES one call of failed the when spoolers) the tried program to (i.e., receive an IPCF that of the message. ?2CTQMFQ MESSAGE FROM The stands xxx ILLEGALLY The QUASAR for - xxX one of FORMATTED operator DEVICE specified unacceptable to the a the following NAME device name program The MESSAGE component message to system An attempt a user (i.e., the BATCON 1in an program be PRIVILEGES was who programs. made does BATCON run remote to not or station KNOWN QUASAR one or is of is one of the spoolers) format. sent the This sent a indicates message. a Consult the spoolers by ENABLED run be BATCON or one sufficient run under or of [1,2]. through number. The format for number is [lnn,2] where number. For the privileges under [1,2] station 36 would 1log in addition, LPTSPL must always A one invalid that have must either project-programmer project-programmer NOT format programmer. INSUFFICIENT must a BATCON TYPE QUASAR problem with in (i.e., spoolers). ILLEGAL messages: example, a to run these The spoolers a remote operator a remote operator represents the nn remote with a [p,pn] of be run from SYS: operator at [136,2]. 1In COMPONENT not the in contact spoolers) with the that tried to does not component send (i.e., a BATCON message. or This condition generally indicates one of two problems. Either the component itself is defective or QUASAR crashed and when it was run again, the operator did not put the components back into contact with it. Consult the system programmer. SPECIFIED QUASAR REQUEST received a IS NOT message YOURS that it 1is ~currently processing. difficulty with the program that the system programmer. UNKNOWN QUEUE QUASAR received message This sent apply to the request condition indicates a the message. Consult SPECIFIED a specified message to a that queue condition indicates a the message. Consult process is not a queue known request to difficulty with the program the system programmer. 4-18 but QUASAR. that the This sent SYSTEM ?2CTQNGS NO GALAXY-10 SUPPORT SERVICES IN THIS MONITOR The monitor currently running does not support the GALAXY or later monitor and have 6.02 a be should It system. VMSER, ?2CTQSIF SEND PSISER, TO INFO and IPCSER. FAILED to tried The program (i.e., BATCON or one of the spoolers) send an IPCF message to INFO and the IPCFS. monitor call failed. This is indicative of an IPCF problem. Consult the system ?2CTQSQF SEND programmer., TO QUASAR FAILED The program (i.e., BATCON or one of the spoolers) tried to monitor call an IPCF message to QUASAR and the IPCFS. send failed. This is indicative of an IPCF problem. Consult the system 4,.4.2 programmer., BATCON BATCON is a system program that reads entries from the system batch gqueue and initiates and controls batch jobs. Entries in the system batch queue (INP:) consist of wuser disk files containing monitor commands, system program commands, data normally entered from a terminal, and GALAXY Batch system commands. The actual format of these files will not be discussed here, but the operator should become familiar with these control files by reading the GALAXY Batch System documentation and actually creating them. This section deals with how the operator controls and responds to BATCON to ensure maximum efficiency of the program. BATCON can be initialized automatically at monitor 1load time along with the previously mentioned spooler jobs. It is recommended that it be controlled through OPSER. The operator interaction with BATCON consists mainly of changing certain parameters at preset times during the day to regulate BATCON's scheduling of Jjobs. BATCON schedules jobs based on certain parameters for both individual jobs and total number of jobs able to be run. A list of these parameters along with commonly used BATCON commands 1is presented below. For a complete discussion of all possible commands the operator is referred to the GALAXY Batch System documentation 4.4.2.1 in the Software Notebooks. BATCON Commands - The general directed to BATCON through OPSER Bn-command 1is: format of a command string argument where B is the letter that must precede all commands issued to BATCON. B must be the OPSER defined subjob name for BATCON if BATCON 1is being run under OPSER. SYSTEM n indicates in your SERVICES the BATCON subjob number. If you omit the n command string, BATCON assumes the command is for the last subjob you specified in a command. You may substitute the word ALL for intended previous n. In this subjects of case, Some commands all active command. the BATCON are batch general subjobs (i.e., do are not apply a specific number. In subjob) and hence do not require the these cases you should omit the The format of the command then becomes: number. B-command command is be one of the a to subjob subjob argument commands abbreviated indicate the to unique described as few below. letters as Commands are may necessary to command. NOTE There is accepted the be argument If a command BATCON will The be will commands l. for requires assumed an only to to STOP 1s this for rule. START. desired, at ST 1is an Therefore, least STO each an command a key argument, and word, it may or must be it be a if must number, may not be specified; error message. The default value for when the command itself is not given. available Commands command characters, issue exception typed. varies of an abbreviation to set the operator parameters fall for into Batch three jobs a string required. otherwise, an argument categories: (refer to Table 4_1)1 2. Commands to Table 4-2), display and the 3. Commands control Batch to current parameter subjobs (refer settings to Table (refer 4-3). to SYSTEM Commands to Command CORE n Set SERVICES Table 4-1 Parameters for Batch Jobs Explanation Limits the total core available for all Batch jobs to nkK, where n represents a decimal number in the range of zero (0) to the amount of swapping space available. The default 1is 1.5 times the amount of physical memory the system makes available to the EXIT user. (See note 1.) Ceases active selection of new Jjobs, waits Jjobs to be completed, and then for currently returns to the monitor. MCORE n Limits to nK the core available for an 1individual Batch job. The n stands for a decimal number in the range from zero (0) to CORMAX (the parameter set by the OPSER command ":SET CORMAX" or the wvalue built into the system at MONGEN time. The default 1is the value MJOB n of CORMAX. (See note 1.) Limits the number of Batch jobs that can be run concurrently to n, which represents a decimal number in the range zero (0) to the wvalue of the JOBMAX assembly parameter. (Refer to the BATCON specification in the Software Notebooks for more information about JOBMAX.) MTIME n Limits each individual Batch job to n seconds of CPU time, where n is a decimal number in the range zero (0) to 262,143 seconds. Any Batch jobs in the 1input queue that have estimates larger than n will not be selected for execution by BATCON. The default is no limit. NEXT n Selects the job with the queue the next job to be processed. sequence number n as RESET Stops scheduling new jobs, waits for all currently active Jobs to be completed, and returns to operator command wait. At this point, all parameters are RESET to their default settings. START Begins Batch processing. command to cancel the You effect can of also use RESET or a this EXIT command. TIME n Limits the total amount of CPU time available to all Batch Jobs to n seconds, where n represents a number in the range zero (0) to 262,143 seconds. The default is no limit. Note 1l: This command 1is not available if no specified at GALAXY system generation time. 4-21 core enforcement was SYSTEM SERVICES 4-2 Table Commands to Display the Current Parameter Settings Explanation Command Type out the current values of the parameters set the commands in Table 4-1 above. Also, type out number of the current default subjob, the number CURRENT active HELP job that affect List all streams the the and any exceptional conditions Batch System. wvalid BATCON commands themselves will descriptions are given 1in Operator's Guide. commands. be this Only listed; section Type out the correspondence between the Batch number and the monitor job number. WHAT Type out a of the current the detailed of the MONJOB description by the of Jjob: subjob the subjob number, the monitor job number, the job name, the project-programmer number, the program running, its state and the amount of CPU time used. 1In addition, this command causes the last line of text entered into the specified job's LOG file to be displayed. Table Commands GO n message Display the next n lines of the control file of the specified subjob on the operator's terminal. Only the lines contained in the current core buffers can be displayed. n 1is a positive, non-zero, decimal number and must be specified. If n exceeds the number of remaining lines in the control file, the display will stop at the end of the file. Continue the specified subjob that has either been halted by the STOP command or 1is waiting for a response. The message is optional, but 1if present, it will be placed in the LOG file of the specified subjob KILL Batch Subjobs Explanation Command EXAMINE 4-3 to Control and be indicated as a comment. argument;message Cancel the the specified subjob. Argument must be one of following: FLUSH - cancel without error recovery or queueing of output (passes the switch /Z:0 ERROR NERROR - cancel with cancel normal without user error error automatic to KJOB). recovery. recovery. SYSTEM SERVICES Table Commands 4-3 (Cont.) to Control Batch Subjobs Explanation Command If the argument 1is not specified, KILL ERROR is assumed. The message is optional, but 1if present, appear as a comment in the LOG file of the subjob. it will specified NOTE If the argument to this command 1is any message must be preceded by a (;) or an exclamation point (!). OPERATOR missing, semicolon message Send the supplied message to the specified subjob. This command is the response to dialogue mode and has no effect unless the wuser has included the Batch command, .OPERATOR, within the control file. Dialogue mode is the operator-program communication facility provided by BATCON. REQUEUE hh:mm Return the specified subjob to the system input queue for processing later. The argument hh:mm is used to give the subjob an AFTER parameter (e.g., Bl-REQUEUE 1:00, requeues subjob 1 and provides an AFTER parameter of one hour). If the argument is missing, the assembly parameter REQTIM is used. Consult the system administrator to determine the value of the assembly parameters. NOTE When specifying an AFTER time, if only one set of numbers is specified, minutes will be assumed. It 1s only when two sets of numbers, separated by a colon are specified that hours and minutes are given below. B1-REQUEUE requeues 20 assumed. Examples 20 subjob 1 and provides an AFTER parameter of minutes. B11-REQUEUE requeues 1l are hour 1:30 subjob and 30 11 and provides minutes. an AFTER parameter of SYSTEM SERVICES Table Commands to Command 4-3 (Cont.) Control Batch Subjobs Explanation B3-REQUEUE 100 requeues subjob 3 and provides an AFTER 100 minutes (1 hour and 40 minutes). ROUTE a TO parameter of b Route all output destined for station "a" to station "b". Station "a" refers to the wuser's 1logical location as logged in or changed via the LOCATE command. a and b are 2 digit octal node numbers in the range, 01-77. WARNING Use discretion when building control files using the ROUTE command; this command 1is likely to be changed or superseded 1in the future. STOP message Halt the specified subjob. The job will not be resumed until a GO command is issued. The message is optional but if present, it will appear as a comment in TELL the LOG file of the specified subjob. message Enter the supplied text as of the specified subjob. 4.4.2.2 BATCON Operation - BATCON a comment is in the normally LOG file initialized automatically at monitor load time requiring no operator intervention. If for some reason you must start BATCON manually under OPSER, the following be procedure, with appropriate commands and arguments, should followed: STEP !1:SLOG ! :DEF 1,2 B= EXPLANATION Log in Give an OPSER the subjob subjob the under name B. [1,2]. It important to note here that the is reserved for BATCON and that subjob may be so defined. !B-R BATCON 1B-MJOB 4 Run the Limit BATCON number of program. jobs to 4. is very letter B no other SYSTEM STEP !B-MCORE SERVICES EXPLANATION 56 Limit single job core to 56K.(See note 200K.(See note time to 3600 to 7500 1) IB-CORE 200 Limit total job core to 1) IB-MTIME 3600 Limit single job CPU seconds. IB-TIME 7500 Limit total job CPU time seconds. !B-START Start scheduling jobs. Once BATCON is started, you need only to adjust parameters to maintain optimum system performance. At wvarious times during the day the following parameters might be either increased or decreased depending upon the current system load. MJOB MTIME MCORE (See note 1) TIME CORE (See The intended from note 1) effect overloading of the adjusting system these during parameters peak times, jobs to the slack times of the day. You should effect the various commands have on BATCON. A user control complete a include FILE, file includes specified all task. As MOUNT/DISMOUNT, and the part be to to prevent defer the control BATCON the familiar 1instructions of PLEASE is and larger with the necessary file a to user commands. The FILE, action by you as the OMOUNT jobs may MOUNT, far as along and DISMOUNT commands require no special BATCON is concerned. They are handled through with regqular interactive wusers. The PLEASE commands do require a special response in order for the job to continue. When a subjob issues a PLEASE command, the output is directed to the terminal controlling BATCON. Upon receipt of such a command you must take whatever action 1s necessary and then indicate to the subjob that you have done name or what was number. 118:42:33 necessary An example by of typing this Bn-ESCape process where n is the subjob follows: (B) SUBJOB# 1 PLEASE USE JOB#6 DECTAPE 2-167-1 FOR NEXT MOUNT WAITING.... 1B1-$ Your as only $) times batch the response to Batch the example successful above LOG progress job. 1In file. of the the you might use Note Not available LOG Batch above DECtape 1: The the if file job example Bl-ESCape to the used to contains and is if you following the was completion of you may need to send a message request. The TELL command is user's the in indicate DEFCOR wuser enter a are assembly (ESCape PLEASE who such running printed command 4-25 the upon unable to prints request. submitted a message At the into transaction completion to find the inform the user: parameter is zero of of the user (0). SYSTEM Bl-TELL CANNOT B1-$ FIND TAPE 2-167-1 SERVICES WILL ABORT MOUNT It is very important that you monitor the BATCON periodically to ensure that all jobs are running wait or °C state. If a job is waiting COMMAND job and and are for its subjobs not hung in a operator action, periodically a message will be typed on your operator terminal. The message contains information about the job and the text, "WAITING FOR RESPONSE", followed by several bells. The frequency of this message normally is one minute. However, this feature may be changed or removed entirely by resetting the assembly parameter, PROMPT. To monitor a BATCON ! :WHAT job, you should B use the Prints out the OPSER command) !B-CURR out BATCON parameters. Prints out subjobs !Bn-WHAT Prints You can then irregularities determine and take the the status abort a Batch job, BATCON values status from the output of the necessary action to reason you must of current the out commands: status Prints !BALL-WHAT If for some required: following of of all of BATCON (an the BATCON subjob n these commands any correct the problem, the following action is BALL-WHAT From the information printed out, you can determine the Batch subjob number. Knowing the subjob number is very important. You must be absolutely sure that you are aborting the correct one. Bn-KILL This causes subjob n to be aborted which allows for error processing. and uses the default argqument ERROR Whenever you use the TELL or KILL command a record of this appears 1in the wuser's LOG file. It is therefore very important that you use the TELL command to inform the user of any abnormalities encountered. This command does not hinder the processing of the job but serves as a means of communication with the user even though he is not necessarily present on 4.4.2.3 can the system. BATCON appear ARGUMENT on IS Operator your OUT UNABLE The job TO - The following messages from BATCON console. OF RANGE The numeric argument limits permitted for BATCON Messages operator specified is greater that command. than or lesser than the KJOB could two not has made give alternative be KJOBed. attempts to actions. This message send a KJOB is issued command. after Further BATCON messages SYSTEM SERVICES COMMAND IS AMBIGUOUS a The operator has entered an abbreviation that does not specify unique command. FORMAT ILLEGAL NUMBER Illegal characters appear in a that field only contain must numerics. ILLEGAL SUBJOB SPECIFIED beyond JOB CANNOT the BE assembly parameter PUT or 1 than The operator specified a subjob number that was less JOBMAX. MONITOR MODE IN after mode A subjob did not return to monitor Further messages give alternative actions. sent a without one it [} C. MISSING ARGUMENT OR ILLEGAL DELIMITER A command that requires an argument was entered or with a punctuation error. NO SUBJOBS ARE ACTIVE A subjob command has been issued but no subjobs are currently running. RESPOND Bn-GO (or KILL) Subjob n is waiting for a response. after a PLEASE This message usually appears command. RESPOND Bn-OPR line Subjob n is requesting a response to dialogue mode. SUBJOB IS NOT ACTIVE "n" specifies a subjob that is not currently running. SUBJOB #n JOB #n This is a general heading to clarify the source of more messages. UNKNOWN BATCON COMMAND The command entered cannot be recognized by BATCON. for Under certain exceptional conditions, there may be no LOG file BATCON to write to (e.g., after a KJOB command is issued). When this is the case, any output sent from the subjob is typed (with a heading) on your operator console. Although this can sometimes be annoying, information there is a good chance that the output will contain error 1in diagnosing the problem that occurred (e.g., that you will need ?SWAP READ ERROR during KJOB/LOGOUT) . SYSTEM 4.5 OUTPUT SPOOLERS The output spoolers access the specific requests to create the The output SPROUT The spoolers for card spooler monitor consist punch, programs load controlled The time from the of paper are the system output queues specified output. LPTSPL tape usually (depending terminal commands LPTSPL, SERVICES on along printer spooler, 1line or initiated the examples line for punch, printer plotter by contents the with several discussed 1in and to the the job examples which below, The outputs card outputs to LPT1 is called very important spoolers. Because these jobs become determines If the the spoolers jobs from explain how job is run file) at and are other system jobs. this section apply to card punch called option CP. The of LPTSPL LO and the LPTSPL job which are arbitrary, but they of commands to the various under initiated, case the and OPSER, the job name start these following steps command. of line Log L1l= !L1-ASSIGN !L1-R are the output some printer you need error. and card only The punch spoolers. EXPLANATION 1,2 !:DEFINE of automatically scratch to initialize STEP !+SLOG destination are punch is <called L1. These names the 1issuing upon automatically auto SPROUT: In act output. OPSER of and LPT1 LPTSPL !L1-MLIMIT 100 in Give a subjob this Assign under subjob LPT1 to the job [1,2]. name L1. L1. Run the line Set the initial page outputting to a subjob under printer spooler limit program. on LPT1 to 100. !L1-START !:SLOG LPT1: 1,2 !:DEFINE !LO-R Log LO= !LO-ASSIGN LPTO LPTSPL !LO-MLIMIT Begin 2000 in Give this Assign subjob LPTO0 to LPTI. the job [1,2]. name LO. LO. Run the line Set the initial page outputting to printer spooler limit program. on LPTO to 2000. !LO-START 1:SLOG 1,2 !:DEFINE !CP-R LPTO: Log CP= SPROUT !CP-MLIMIT Begin 2000 in Give Run a subjob this the LPTO. under subjob the [1,2]. name SPROUT program. limit Set the initial to 2000 cards. on CP. the card punch SYSTEM STEP SERVICES EXPLANATION ICP-LOCK Pause after !CP-MESSAGE FILE Print file Start the is !CP-CARDS each job. identification as processed. card punch each file spooler. Once the spoolers have been started, they will automatically act upon requests that have been queued by the users. You need alter parameters or issue spooler commands only to ensure the most efficient operation of the spooler devices. A list of commands 1s given below. For each command the 1list gives the name of the command, an explanation of the effect of the command, and the spooler(s) to which the command applies. LPTSPL or SPROUT implies that the command 1is applicable only to the line printer or SPROUT devices respectively; ALL implies that the command can apply to any output device. COMMAND ALIGN EXPLANATION file BACKSPACE SPOOLER Output a test file for a specific form on the line printer. This command 1is used to aid the operator in checking the alignment of the paper with the carriage tape. The default file is <current form type>.ALP, unless there is a /ALIGN switch for the form in SYS:LPFORM.INI See Section 4.5.1. n CARDS Backspace the begin printing there. Start SPROUT processing queued CHKPNT label file n pages Save to the the line card files EXIT SPROUT in the control file by the Cause the spooler to the monitor if ALL operator. to return the spooler is idle. If this command 1is given while the spooler is active, an error message 1s 1issued. 4-29 ALL the Print out the current value of all parameters that can be controlled LPTSPL punch. identified by "label" as a potential restart point in event of a system failure. CURRENT and LPTSPL ALL SYSTEM COMMAND FORMS SERVICES EXPLANATION SPOOLER formsname ALL Inform the "formsname" The default FORWARD n FREEZE spooler that is now mounted. is NORMAL. Forward space the file n pages and begin printing there. LPTSPL Cause forms ALL the currently mounted (cards, line printer, paper tape, or plotter "frozen". The spoolers schedule a different Continue processing GO form a LOCK, PAUSE, or paper) to will not type of be form. after STOP has ALL been issued. Type out a list of all the HELP spooler Abort the current to the next job. KILL LIMIT n LOCK MESSAGE ALL commands. job and go Change the limit for the current job to n pages, cards, feet, or minutes. ALL PAUSE job. ALL automatically after each FILE Type only the specified messages on the operator's console. JOB where: ERROR ALL NONE ALL ERROR prints that FILE prints of JOB all occur each the fatal errors while processing. file file identification processed. prints job information at the beginning and end of each job. (LPTSPL only) ALL SYSTEM COMMAND SERVICES EXPLANATION SPOOLER ALL prints the information specified on all three of the above. NONE cancels any previous arguments of the MESSAGE command. NOTE The MESSAGE command supports multiple arguments separated by commas. However, the arguments are processed in order from left to right. Therefore if conflicting arguments valid one will apply. For MLIMIT MESSAGE ALL, MESSAGE FILE, n Do FILE No JOB, not NONE run outputs are specified, example: Conflict; any more conflict; the ALL NONE applies Applies job which than n last ALL pages, feet, or cards, or which uses more than n minutes of plotter time. This command has no effect on the job currently being processed. (n is a decimal number) NEXT n Select the job with the gqueue sequence number n as the next job to be processed. ALL NOSUPPRESS Remove the effect of the SUPPRESS command immediately. NOSUPPRESS is in effect at the time the spooler 1is initialized. LPTSPL PAUSE Finish ALL job PLOT Start queued REPRINT processing and then the current stop. SPROUT processing to the files SPROUT plotter. Stop processing the current copy of the current file immediately and start it over. ALL SYSTEM SERVICES EXPLANATION COMMAND REQUEUE/switches SPOOLER Stop writing now and place the job back into the queue for later processing. ALL Note that different switches apply to different spoolers as indicated in the right-hand column. The switches are optional and can be omitted. The default for reprocessing at position of the LPTSPL is to the current file. start The default for reprocessing at the job. SPROUT is to start the beginning of Switches: /A:n Start reprocessing minutes. after /B:n Start reprocessing back 1in the file. n pages /F:n Start reprocessing n forward in the file. pages LPTSPL LPTSPL ALL /H Start 12 ALL reprocessing after hours. /T Start reprocessing at beginning of the job. This RESET n 1s the default ALL the for SPROUT. Reinitialize the spooler. If the spooler 1is idle when a RESET command 1is issued, the command will be processed. If jobs are active, an error message 1s 1issued. ALL SYSTEM COMMAND SPOOLER EXPLANATION Stop processing the current copy of the current file immediately and begin the next copy. If the last or only copy is being processed at the time this command is issued, start the next file SKPCOPY in the ALL request. Stop processing the current copy of the current file immediately and begin processing the next file in the request. SKPFILE START SERVICES ALL output-dev=queued-dev LPTSPL Immediately start processing files queued to the queued device and output them on the output device. If no output LPTSPL If no queued LPTSPL as the Stop STOP device assumes LPT: device assumes the default. is specified, as the is specified, output default. device immediately. ALL NOTE "ST" is an acceptable for the START command. if STOP is desired, at "STO" must be typed. SUPPRESS/switch abbreviation Therefore, least Cause the spooler to ignore all vertical paper motion characters except for the line feed. This command has the following two switch options that control the scope option of is the the command. The FILE default. Switch: FILE The the the SUPPRESS command applies current file. This is default. only to LPTSPL SYSTEM COMMAND SERVICES EXPLANATION JOB The SUPPRESS entire print TAPE UNFREEZE SPOOLER command job. applies to Starts SPROUT processing files queued to paper-tape punch. Remove the the the SPROUT effect of the FREEZE ALL effect of the LOCK ALL command. UNLOCK Remove the command so that the spooler will continue automatically after each job. WHAT | Type out on the operator's ALL console the present status of the spooler. This information consists of the job name, the user's name, his ‘ project- programmer number, the job's sequence number, and information about the file being processed. Once you have familiarized yourself with the general spooler commands it becomes important to know when to use them. Following is a discussion of some applications of the spoolers. 4.5.1 LPTSPL LPTSPL is the program which handles the 1line printer through QUEUE. printers are assumed to be in use. all PRINT requests 1In the discussion LPTO prints, say, submitted for below, two line at a rate of 1000 1lines per minute and LPT1 prints 600 lines per minute. Because of the difference in speed, a higher limit might be set on the job controlling LPTO0. This does not mean, however, that the limit on LPT1 must always be lower The commands which the examples will than LPTO. follow could apply on or be based one to the both Initially, when the monitor is loaded, both started automatically with a line printer the following page limits: LO-MLIMIT 2000 L1-MLIMIT 100 jobs LO and L1 although other. spooler assigned 3jobs could be each and with ~ to SYSTEM SERVICES During the normal daily operation, your only interaction with the spoolers would be to increase or decrease the MLIMIT of a particular job. This is not normally done during prime time unless the spoolers are 1idle and a wuser must have a listing which is over the current limit. In this case you would type: LO-MLIMIT where n is n the new value of MLIMIT. LPTSPL is so designed that when an out-of-paper condition on a 1line printer is detected, it will notify you, and then wait until the situation is corrected. The spooler will then continue automatically. You need not 1issue any commands. All you must do is correct the problem and the software will do the rest. 1In the event of such a condition on LPT1l, vyou will receive the following message on the terminal: 113:27:05(L1) % DEVICE LPT1 IS NOT READY ! Once the problem continue. is corrected the 1line printer will automatically There are returned some error conditions which may cause the spooler to be to monitor level. These conditions are obscure and would serve no useful purpose being explained here. The spooler will output an error message indicating the problem, and the end result is that the spooler will be returned to monitor or "C level. the spooler program must be restarted before processing requests. When in doubt as to the state you need only occurs, can the continue spooler, type: LO : WHAT to print out the status of the job. it must 1If this it of be restarted as 1If the spooler is in a “C state follows: §EEE EXPLANATION !LO-R LPTSPL Run the spooler ILO-MLIMIT 1020 Set the page 'LO-START LPTO: program. limit. Start processing print requests. It is very simple to remove completed listings without hampering operation of the line printer. You may, however, stop and start spooler to remove listings or clear up a jam. Use the commands: the the !LO-STOP !L0-GO These are the only commands needed to stop and continue the spooler program. The MLIMIT parameter can be raised during a period that 1s not very busy, to allow large listings to be printed. You can ask the spooler to type out its current status to ensure that MLIMIT has been changed correctly. The following example shows the MLIMIT being raised to 3500 and then checked: SYSTEM SERVICES STEP EXPLANATION !LO-MLIMIT 3500 !LO-CURRENT ~ Raise the page This causes current may be need still temporarily The a time to be be commands when the output, output to to divert printer magnetic LPTO0 the spooler of Then, Have MTAOQ:=LPTO: after printer the queue line as Set down for free some out and the other repairs. If files disk space, they can printed MTAQ printer is subjob the at a later time. are: to current !LO-REWIND LO run output repaired, Exit LPTSPL. device to requeue the MTAO: the monitor at MTAOQ. files onto the the !LO-R PIP Using PIP, ILO-LPTO0:/X=MTAQ:* * 1L0-"A magnetic tape CTRL/A to the to LPTSPL return Reload LPTO: Start the end of the job. Rewind ILO-START type follows. !LO-EXIT !LO-R to MLIMIT parameters. and onto 3500. EXPLANATION LPTSPL ILO-START tape output STEP !LO-R is to perhaps to values operator—-set There limit tape. transfer to the files from to the printer queue. subjob acts like a CTRL/C monitor. LPTSPL. the line printer spooler. Occasionally a user will inadvertently QUEUE a file to be printed which 1is not in the <correct form such as a binary file. If it is discovered before printing of the file begins, the print request may be deleted from the QUEUE via the QUEUE/KILL command discussed earlier. When this is not discovered until the file begins to print, the line printer will rapidly eject pages, print groups of unrecognizable characters, or continually hang up. You must then use the spooler KILL command as follows: !LO-KILL This will abort the current print request and proceed request. This command must be used with caution as it user's disk file to be deleted along with the request. As mentioned earlier, coverage, the spooler means that a user may when the spoolers are is operator coverage, system 1s describe assignment use. The queue spooler running the jobs. a output idle. it is will line 1is directly to operating printers the the next cause the with operator This assigned. 1line printer even While this is reasonable as long as there not desirable during those times when the no operator spooler even system the have necessary the spoolers regquest not with action to when Jjobs to can output though coverage. to release Jjobs and make to the the line line the The following 1line printers them available printers printers are upon not for from general receipt assigned steps of to a the SYSTEM §IEB SERVICES EXPLANATION 1:STOP LO Stop the spooler. ILO-FINISH LPTO: The FINISH command effectively deassigns the line printer. !LO-R LPTSPL Run the !LO-START LPTO: Ready the spooler spooler receipt of The steps above would be repeated for and LPT1l: for program. to output a print job L1 to LPTO0 upon request. substituting L1 for LO LPTO:. The special forms handler in LPTSPL provides a means by which various parameters may be set automatically on the basis of form names. This is accomplished through the use of a disk file, SYS:LPFORM.INI, which contains a Each line list of forms in LPFORM.INI and default is of the switches. form: formname/swl/sw2/sw3... or formname:locator/swl/sw2/sw3... formname a 1to 6character administrator is free descriptive of the types form name. The system to specify form names of forms wused at the installaton. locator a field used to describe one or more be for affected by various parameters. the locator field are: ALL LOCAL REMOTE Snn LPTn printers to Legal values all line printers all local line printers all remote line printers all printers at station nn (octal) the specific line printer n If the locator field is omitted, ALL 1is assumed. If more than one locator field is used, each must be separated by a comma and the list enclosed 1in parentheses. Some examples are given below: formname: LOCAL/swl/sw2 formname: (LOCAL,S2)/swl/sw2 /swl/sw2/sw3... one or more switches used to describe in which the SWITCH /ALCNT:nn forms are to be printed. the manner MEANING nn specifies the number of times that the forms alignment file 1is to be printed. This switch is used in conjunction with the ALIGN command. Typing forms any character to alignment printing. 4-37 LPTSPL will terminate SYSTEM SWITCH /ALIGN:ss SERVICES MEANING ss is a 1- to 6-character specifies the name of the file (extension.ALP) to be /ALSLP:nn forms type. with the ALIGN nn specifies printing /BANNER:nn of used in nn specifies or /DRUM: ss /HEADER: nn is that used in conjunction the number forms of seconds alignment conjunction with the number between file. This the ALIGN of each switch command. banner pages is a 1- to 6-character ASCII string that specifies the chain or drum to be wused on the line printer. The switch name and argument are typed on the operator's console when the forms are scheduled. 1If both the /CHAIN and the /DRUM switches are specified for the same entry in the LPFORM.INI file, the spooler will type only the last one it encountered. nn specifies nn the number of file headers number of lines to (picture desired. specifies the be printed the banner, trailer, and header pages. argument is used for internal <calculations does /NOTE: aa (job desired. ss pages) /LINES:nn switch string forms alignment position this command. the is headers) /CHAIN:ss This ASCII default used to aa not is sent affect a message to the the of file up to to be 50 operator at on The and printed. <characters the time the that 1is forms are scheduled. /PAUSE Causes the the spooler to pause type of form specified. the UNLOCK operator before This each job using switch overrides command. /RIBBON:ss ss is a 1to 6-character ASCII string that specifies the type of ribbon to be used on the line printer. The switch name and argument are typed on the operator's console at the time that the forms are scheduled. /TAPE : XXX XXX is a specifies control 1to 6-character the name of the to be used. 1If the ASCII string vertical forms printer has an that unit optical vertical forms unit (uses paper carriage tapes), a message 1s sent to the operator to mount the carriage tape named XxxX. If the printer has a direct access vertical forms unit (DAVFU), LPTSPL will attempt to 1load the DAVFU with the file SYS:xxx.VFU. If LPTSPL finds the file, it notifies the operator that the file 1is being loaded. 1If the file cannot be found, an error message informs the operator that the job has been requeued. If the /TAPE defaults to switch NORMAL. is not specified, the name SYSTEM SWITCH SERVICES MEANING /TRAILER:nn nn specifies the number of Jjob trailer (pages) desired. /VFU: xxx This switch /TAPE : XXX. performs the same function as /WHAT Causes the spooler to type a short WHAT message to the operator for each job printed. This message consists of the job name, the wuser's name and project-programmer number, and the sequence number. /WIDTH:nn The value of nn is used for internal calculations to determine a width class. The width class specifies the number of characters per line to be printed on the banner, header, and trailer pages. There are three width classes. 1. Wwidth class 1 (nn=0-60) specifies that wup 66 characters per line will be printed on banner, header, and trailer pages. to the 2. Width class 2 (nn=61-100) specifies that up to 90 characters per line will be printed on the banner, header, and trailer pages. 3. Width class 3 (nn=101-132) specifies that to 129 characters per line will be printed the banner, header, and trailer pages. up on The LPFORM.INI file is searched until the first occurrence of a 1line that contains both the name of the forms currently mounted and a locator field (either implicit or explicit) that is in agreement with the printer specified in the START command. The parameter switch settings on this matching line are then used. So, the sequence, NARROW/swl/sw?2 (equivalent to NARROW:ALL/swl/sw2) NARROW:LOCAL/swl/sw2 would never reach the second line, since the first 1line will always match. The spooler will request the operator to change the forms only if the first four characters of the new form name differ from the first four characters of the o0ld form name. This allows entries in LPFORM.INI of the form: NARROW/HEADER:1/BANNER:1/TRAILER:1 NARRO1l/HEADER:0/BANNER:1/TRAILER:1 NARRO2/HEADER:0/BANNER:0/TRAILER:0/WHAT The spooler will schedule any NARRO1l, or NARRO2, without (provided that one of the However, the switches will of the three types asking the operator forms, NARROW, change the forms specified forms already 1s mounted). be different for each of the specified forms. 4-39 of to SYSTEM Assume that the LPFORM.INI file SERVICES contains the following entry: LABELS:LPT1/CHAIN:96CHRS/RIBBON:CARBON/VFU:LBLDAV/NOTE:USE If you issue a command such 4-UP LABELS as: PRINT NAFILE/FORM:LABELS The print request is queued on the printer queue. When the request 1s scheduled to be processed, LPTSPL searches the LPFORM.INI file for a formsname matching the /FORM: switch argument. Finding the LABELS entry, LPTSPL outputs of switch settings the following: MOUNT LABELS FORMS THEN TYPE GO You will also be reminded following messages: the via the [DRUM (CHAIN) :96CHRS] [RIBBON : CARBON] [NOTE:USE 4-UP LABELS] If LPT1 has LPTSPL the [LPTLVF file is LOADING VFU If the a direct attempts found, LBLDAV file access ¢to 1load the IN vertical it with forms the unit file, following message is (DAVFU ) LBLDAV.VFU. 1If issued: LPTI1] cannot be found, FOR LPT1, the following message is issued: $LPTCFV CANNOT You can the /VFU: If PLEASE 4.5.1.1 can PUT LPT1 VFU then LBLDAV either does not have tape following message: VFU TAPE on msg IN WILL a to the NOT represents DAVFU, be file, JOB kill the job, or change LPTSPL assumes that a paper mounted. You will receive the LPTI1 Messages operator's ACCOUNTING Where 1is LBLDAV Operator the locate REQUEUING switch. carriage LPTSPL appear ?LPTAWN FIND - The following messages from console. BE DONE one of - msg the following two messages: LPTSPL ?LPTCAF SYSTEM SERVICES l. NO PRIVILEGES The the FACT file, and operator 2. DAEMON - The DAEMON must be started NOT It entries written to CAN'T ACCESS LPTSPL FILE to of an one CODE error nnn of Xxx the FACT.SYS to write has not been operator to allow file. XxxX looking are error privileges program by nnn - while and the the no the codes up the code file number listed in it was and text the Monitor manual. CAN'T CHANGE The into filename, print. respectively Calls be encountered trying $LPTCCF RUNNING initialized. has FORMS operator IN THE issued processed. a MIDDLE FORMS Type PAUSE NOT SUPPORTED OF A JOB command and while wait for a the job was current being job to be completed. 3LPTCCL CCL ENTRY LPTSPL IS does increment ?LPTCFA CAN'T was file must CANNOT support 1). It FIND ALIGN LPTSPL $LPTCFD not of FIND on CCL treated FILE: filename to the unable be is find entry as a (i.e., standard specified RUN with an RUN. alignment file. The SYS:. DEFAULT VFU FILE FOR dev, LOADING HARDWARE VFU AS DEFAULT LPTSPL can't find the default VFU file and VFU instead. The operator should place the printer on 1line. hardware and 3LPTCFV CANNOT FIND VFU LPTSPL cannot If the file LPFORM.INI [LPTCPC CLEARING The ?LPTDDE DEVICE dev The was device device not 1issued DOES to a specified to that AND PAUSE JOB for job the device. or change the reference. COMMANDS] command were and DAVFU 1loading the the forms other continues while LPTSPL commands was pending. processing. EXIST in designation assigned REQUEING "START" there command(s) NOT dev, remove RESET, and the FOR specified DAVFU file available, kill the EXIT, started clears the not entry PENDING LPTSPL The find 1is file operator already filename 1is realign this the START was job. typed command does incorrectly not or the exist. device SYSTEM ?LPTDIS DEVICE dev IS SERVICES SPOOLED The device specified in the START command can write only on physical devices. 3$LPTEWL ERROR WRITING LOG FILE, STATUS [LPTFAF LOG formsname FORMS ARE FORMS it was trying to write out FROZEN] the operator that the PARAMETER FILE LPTSPL can't default ?LPTFSD LPTSPL file. Informs s LPTFPM spooled. nnn LPTSPL encountered an error while the is find specified LPFORM.INI the IS forms are now frozen. MISSING LPFORM.INI file and will use the values. FILE SKIPPED DUE TO I/O ERRORS, STATUS nnn LPTSPL, skipped the file it was processing because it encountered too many I/O errors. The allowable number of error recoveries ($LPTIDE), before this message is issued, 1is a conditional assembly parameter of LPTSPL and is set by the system administrator. The default number is five, 2LPTICA ILLEGAL COMMAND The argument for $LPTIDE this ARGUMENT arg is either misspelled or is not a valid argument command. INPUT DATA ERROR nnn, RECOVERY ATTEMPTED An error was encountered while LPTSPL was reading the file was trying to output. The nnn reflects the I/O status. $LPTLAS LPTSPL IS ALREADY START'ED ON dev The operator already [LPTLIR LPTSPL it issued a START command running IS to a device that was LPTSPL. RESET ON dev] The copy of LPTSPL that was processing on another device has been RESET on the specified device by the operator and is awaiting [LPTLVF a new START command. LOADING VFU This message DAVFU filename IN dev] informs the operator file filename into that LPTSPL the device dev. is loading the SYSTEM [LPTLWP LPTSPL WILL PAUSE AT The operator the middle WHAT [LPTSIS END OF JOB] issued a PAUSE command to LPTSPL while it was 1in of a job. This message occurs 1in response to a command. SPOOLER IS This SERVICES STOP'ED OR PAUSE'ING] message is output in response to the WHAT operator command. $LPTURC cmd IS The operator ?LPTVFE VFU AN UNRECOGNIZED issued ERROR ON dev, a COMMAND command PLEASE that REALIGN is unknown THE WAITING FOR formsname FORMS TO BE LPTSPL. FORMS The device dev had a format error 1in printer is now off-line. Reset forms to before turning printer on-line. [LPTWFF to the DAVFU and the top-of-form position MOUNTED] The spooler is waiting for the operator to mount the specified forms. The operator must change the forms and type GO. This message is output in response to the WHAT operator command. [LPTWFS WAITING FOR A START COMMAND] The operator must issue a START command to begin processing. This message is output WHAT operator command. 4.5.2 to the SPROUT SPROUT, all cause LPTSPL in response to the files spooling processor queued to spooled for output, output is a program devices other that handles than the line printer; both those submitted through QUEUE and spooled requests generated by user programs. The spooled devices for which SPROUT processes files are the paper-tape punch, the card punch, and the plotter. Once SPROUT 1is running, QUASAR, the master controller, handles the scheduling of jobs to be processed. Your primary responsibilities are to start up one or more copies of SPROUT to process output files on appropriate devices; adjust various system parameters when necessary to ensure optimum system performance; monitor the supply of tape, cards, and/or plotter paper; attend to jams in the devices; and, distribute the output if it is the practice at your installation for the operator to do so. One or more copies of SPROUT are usually brought up automatically (via the OPR.ATO file, Section 4.1.1.2) when the TOPS-10 monitor is loaded. If it becomes necessary to start SPROUT manually, you may use the procedure(s) given below. Remember that a separate SPROUT job must be loaded and started for each type of spooled output device. You cannot have files queued to more than one type of output device running under a single copy of SPROUT. 4-43 SYSTEM If OPSER is type one or not more *:SLOG and already of the running, a subjob ! :DEF CP= give the subjob !CP-R SPROUT load SPROUT when log SPROUT prompts start the *:SLOG and a slash, start plotter the 1,2 log in give this !PL-R SPROUT load SPROUT Should any inoperative, card prompts with a CP spooler the down you the name PL type plotter of the spooled devices output can be diverted to goes Next, subjob subjob slash, start punch name R OPSER. type another PL= SPROUT the card-punch | :DEF when by typing to OPSER. spooler: !PL-PLOT the in with !CP-CARDS To start it up procedures following 1,2 SERVICES spooler supported by magnetic tape. can type the for the card SPROUT become For example, if following: *CP-R SPROUT !CP-CARDS MTAQ:=CDPO: and the card images intended magnetic tape device 0. For punch will be diverted to additional information, including error procedures, refer to the chapter in the "GALAXY Operations and System Programming SPROUT Procedures" 4.5.2.1 can the SPROUT appear ?SPOAWN in on Operator the 1. msg NO WILL BE represents fact DAEMON - file, NOT - DONE one The of RUNNING SPROUT FILE to CAN'T The CHANGE operator processed. DAEMON started an into error output. FORMS issued Type has be IN a of THE no from two SPROUT messages: privileges program by to write and looking xxx error MIDDLE OF completed. 4-44 has not been operator to allow file. nnn=xxx while command and the FACT.SYS the FORMS PAUSE the CODE nnn text respectively of one Monitor Calls manual. tSPOCCF following The filename, encountered attempting the - written ACCESS messages msg must entries CAN'T - operator It be following and initialized. to The terminal. NOT PRIVILEGES the 2. Messages operator's ACCOUNTING Where ?SPOCAF Software Notebooks. wait A up refer the to codes file the it was number 1listed in and the JOB while for the a Jjob current was job being to be SERVICES SYSTEM $SPOCCL CCL IS ENTRY SUPPORTED NOT SPROUT does not support CCL entry (i.e., RUN It is treated as a standard RUN. increment of 1). with an [SPOCPC CLEARING PENDING EXIT, RESET, AND PAUSE COMMANDS!] The operator 1issued a START class command while the spooler was already STARTed and there were other commands pending. The spooler clears the command(s) and continues processing. ?2SPODDE DEVICE dev DOES NOT EXIST The device specified in the start-class command (i.e., CARDS, PLOT, or TAPE) does not exist; either because it was typed this to assigned incorrectly or because the device was not job. ?SPODIS DEVICE dev IS SPOOLED The device specified in the start-class command (i.e., CARDS, SPROUT can write only on physical PLOT, or TAPE) is spooled. devices. [SPOFAF formsname FORMS ARE FROZEN!] Informs the operator that the specified forms are now frozen. ?SPOFLE FORMS LIMIT EXCEEDED ON DEVICE dev file SPROUT has processed a exceeded 2SPOFSD a on device which has Just its output forms limit. FILE SKIPPED DUE TO I/0O ERRORS, STATUS nnn it because it was processing file the skipped SPROUT The allowable number of errors. I/O many too encountered error recoveries (%$SPOIDE) before this message is issued is a of SPROUT and is set by the parameter assembly conditional The default number is five. system administrator. ?2SPOICA ILLEGAL COMMAND ARGUMENT arg The argument is either misspelled or is not a valid for 3$SPOIDE this argument command. INPUT DATA ERROR nnn, RECOVERY ATTEMPTED An error was encountered while SPROUT was reading the file it The nnn reflects the I/0 status. was trying to output. ?SPOODE OUTPUT DEVICE ERROR ON dev, STATUS nnn An error was encountered while SPROUT was trying to write the specified device. on SYSTEM tSPORUU REQUEST An output not $SPOSAS SPROUT or UNIMPLEMENTED request available The [SPOSIS USES IS was in the ALREADY operator TAPE) SERVICES queued that current STARTED issued when FORMAT a SPROUT specified version ON of an option that is SPROUT. dev!] start-class was already command (i.e., processing on CARDS, the PLOT, device. SPOOLER IS STOP'ED OR PAUSE'ING] This message is output in response to the WHAT operator command. [SPOSIR SPROUT The IS copy been RESET ON dev] of SPROUT which RESET awaiting a by new the was processing operator start-class on the command on another specified (i.e., device device CARDS, has and PLOT, is or TAPE) . [SPOSWP SPROUT WILL The operator the middle the [SPOWFF WHAT WAITING PAUSE AT issued of a operator FOR END OF a PAUSE job. spooler 1is specified forms., GO. This message command This to message SPROUT is while output in was in response it to command. formsname The JOB!] FORMS TO BE waiting for The operator is output in MOUNTED!] the operator to mount the must change the forms and type response to the WHAT operator command. [SPOWFS WAITING The FOR START-CLASS operator PLOT, or message 4.6 INPUT SPRINT input is SPOOLER must issue COMMAND! ] a start-class TAPE) to cause SPROUT output in response to command to the begin WHAT (i.e., operator which reads BATCON input any sequential queue. Normally the input stream is from a card reader, but disk and can be handled. SPRINT analyzes the input stream spooler control cards (column 1=§) and processes them. magnetic tape card reader The remaining also cards are creates into this copied SPRINT as a may subjob to the be of various job's file. either by means intervention. This command. (SPRINT) is a DECsystem-10 system program stream and enters jobs into the SPRINT CARDS, processing. LOG Other of files for and enters a may be file information wuser control cards processing or for by the report of entered into by means user job. processing of this file operator — run either OPSER. as a directly-controlled timesharing job or SYSTEM SERVICES To start SPRINT running as a timesharing job, type: SPRINT .R to which SPRINT responds with: / To start SPRINT running as an OPSER subjob, type the following to OPSER: *:SLOG 1,2 *:DEF S= *:S-R SPRINT OPSER responds with the timestamp lThh:mm(S) followed by SPRINT's response / When SPRINT responds with a slash, SPRINT is ready to receive commands The following sample of console log from the operator's console. output is the result of loading and starting SPRINT and then querying its status. The SPRINT commands are described in detail below. operator command to load SPRINT 1S-R SPRINT | 113:20(S) OPSER timestamp 1S-START 113:20(S) operator command to start SPRINT OPSER timestamp 1S-WHAT SPRINT ! SPRINT prompt operator command to query subjob . 113:21(S) SPRINT ! IS prompt OPSER timestamp IDLE ON CDRO SPRINT response SPRINT prompt The START command tells SPRINT to begin processing. START command The format of the is: START dev:filename.ext If the entire argument is omitted, the command /START is interpreted If only the filename and extension are typed, the as /START CDR:. command /START MYFILE.SPT is interpreted as /START DSK:MYFILE.SPT. the input; for devices three SPRINT specifically supports card-reader, magnetic tape and disk. Each of the three input devices is handled differently with respect to input mode and in response to end-of-file as described in Table 4-4. SYSTEM Input Device Mode CDR Super-Image SERVICES Table 4-4 Device Characteristics Response To Tries to found, EOF read next sleeps for job. 10 If none seconds, and is tries again. MTA ASCII Waits for another START command. DSK ASCII Waits SPRINT responds to all for commands another with START either command. a slash (/) or an exclamation point (!). A slash is used when SPRINT is not processing and is awalting operator input. An exclamation point 1is wused when SPRINT is processing a job but is also waiting for a type-in. Before the each card, presence SPRINT processes the command). lines) by disk of using an block, or operator tape block command. is If read, a it immediately (except as noted You may continue a command on the standard continuation SPRINT command has checks been in the description of a subsequent line (or character, the hyphen the 1last non-TAB, non-space, or non-comment character on the lines) to be continued. SPRINT responds to a continuation number sign (#) prompt. The following sequence of illustrates the use of the continuation for typed, (-) as line (or with a commands character; /START DSKB:INPUT.#SPT[77,77] 4.6.1 The SPRINT SPRINT Commands commands are: COMMAND DESCRIPTION EXIT (See note 1) Go to monitor takes effect GO Continue HELP Type Kill KILL(See note 1) n Set a this list of the current abc at Controls job or now next the a of This command current job. STOP and and job is allowable end which of commands subsequent the level. end PAUSE the maximum all effect MSGLVL until the for the after stream MCORE command at command. their flush actions. the input encountered. core 1limit to jobs. This command the current job. messages SPRINT nK takes types to the stopped 1in the operator. . A Note 1l: middle If of this a job, command it will is issued cause an while SPRINT automatic GO. is SYSTEM SERVICES DESCRIPTION Q ] O Kk-HO COMMAND Type short messages Type long messages o I Suppress 'user error to operator. to operator. cards. WNOHODN Type the first fatal error card of the job. Type each error card. Do not type any cards to the operator. Type each $JOB card. Type each $ card. Type all cards. The default is 100 (type long messages not type user errors or cards.) PAUSE Pause at RESET (See note 1) Re-initialize effect the end of the current SPRINT. This as CTRL/C CTRL/C START This command current job. is delayed to the but do job. has the same ("C "C START). end of the START Start SPRINT processing. This command may not be typed once SPRINT has begun processing unless a RESET is typed first and no jobs are active. STOP Stop reading immediately and wait for further commands. The GO command will cause processing to continue with no 111 effects. msg TELL WHAT 4.6.2 The SPRINT following $SPTAWN Operator is ACCOUNTING Gives job. the the current status of the the SPRINT diagnostic WILL NOT - msg represents one of the fact in the Messages NO PRIVILEGES l. file, BE DONE - The operator and error messages. following two messages: has no privileges to write and DAEMON NOT RUNNING - The DAEMON program has not been initialized. It must be started by the operator to allow entries to be written into the FACT.SYS file. 2. BAD (msg) a list of Where msg ?SPTBFA This command places the message current job's LOG file. FORMAT FOR ACCOUNTING FILE The accounting file ACCT.SYS is not in a format understood by SPRINT. SPRINT only recognizes ACCT.SYS formats 2, 3, and 4. while SPRINT 1: If this command is issued middle of a job, it will cause an automatic GO. Note 4-49 1is stopped 1in the SYSTEM 2SPTCCC CAN'T CREATE SPRINT msg is CTL OR LOG unable represents message section SERVICES FILE to create one of of - msg either the the the control messages Commands CAN'T CLEAR UFD in when creating SPRINT invoked and 3$SPTCCL CCL ENTRY SPRINT IS $SPTCDI DEVICE dev Input for NOT of ?SPTCER support It be that (e.g., requested COMMAND give ERROR is a CARD-MOTION card interlock about this a user's afterwards. problem. CCL entry treated as a (i.e., RUN standard RUN. with an on the device in the specified example, input may can only output, do START have been such requested as the LPT:). - amount RETYPE of core the command that the monitor was ON not read RESET LINE error ERROR CAN'T OPEN THE OPEN an it, syntax was the in string. CDRn correctly. button on the Reset card the 1last card and reader. DISK call on of more a device DSK serious failed. monitor This 1is generally a problem. CAN'T READ ACCOUNTING FILE SPRINT encountered accounting DOUBLE file. DIRECTORY Two directory filename. DOUBLE Two DEVICE names (e.9., difficulties Consult the names cannot appeared LPT:PTP:) in or, EXTENSION ILLEGAL Two extensions cannot or attempting to read the administrator. appear without an intervening ILLEGAL DOUBLE filename while system ILLEGAL a row two DSKA: :FILEX) . ?SPTDEX the INPUT For device symptom 2SPTDDV is performed to An 2SPTDDI DO unable press ?2SPTCRA programmer not SPRINT A 2SPTCOD Software CAN'T EXPAND CORE There ¥SPTCME interlock release l). line-printer ?2SPTCEC not command. a the error SUPPORTED CAN'T cannot START software system does increment a could your file. the INTERLOCK UFD, Consult LOG in Manual Notebooks. ?SPTCCI or explained comma (,). appear wihout an colons in a intervening appeared row without \ in an a filename row (e.g., intervening SYSTEM ?2SPTDFN DOUBLE Two or, [SPTDNR FILENAME filenames appeared in a periods appeared in INPUT DEVICE A card DAEMON An $SPTDVE UUO device ERROR ON not read - CODE existed ERROR when not READING HOPPER ON One of the 1. The SPRINT hopper output more cards DAEMON Thés LUUO is IN <card and do job to your system Calls manual Report any administrator. Reset card the 1last card and reader. your two is empty of is and job full room is the attempting to read the administrator. CDRn conditions end correct ON while system SPRINT has and made exist: is not SPRINT for condition expecting been reached, cannot more or read any them. and press the RESET SPECIFICATION format of the directory information enclosed square ([]) or angle (<>) brackets is incorrect. ILLEGAL to 1last The ?SPTILU action FILE stacker DIRECTORY the FULL the until case, to difficulties STACKER because In either button. on Consult following The the called correctly. button file. input cards Reset the DECsystem-10 Monitor the error code nnn. ACCOUNTING OR operator CDRn read encountered EMPTY ILLEGAL this RESET accounting 2. of ERROR was TEST2) nnn message the requires correctly. occurrences card TEST1 TEST..CBL). button. FAILED DEVICE SCOBOL (e.g., CDRn to of INPUT (e.g., row reading. RESET error SPRINT ?SPTIDS row a READY] input for was the press $SPTHPE NOT accounting. Refer for an explanation A ?SPTERA it MISSED press $SPTDUF dev specified prepare DATA ILLEGAL two The tSPTDTM SERVICES within the Rerun the SPRINT caused by an internal error in SPRINT. the LOG job. ?SPTIOE I/0 ERROR WRITING LOG OR CTL An I/0 error The job must ?SPTLKE occurred be encountered specified by the while writing or the CTL file. 1looking up a file rerun. LOOKUP/ENTER ERROR nnn SPRINT FILE - XXX an error operator in 4-51 the while START command. nnn and XxX SYSTEM SERVICES refer to the number and text respectively messages explained in the DECsystem-10 Commands Manual (DEC-10-OSCMA-A-B-D). 2SPTNCA NO CORE FOR ACCT.SYS SPRINT of one of the Operating System INDEX builds an in-core 1index of the This message 1indicates that core area sufficiently to build accounting ACCT.SYS. expand its ?2SPTNDV ?SPTNHS NULL DEVICE A colon has NO HIGH JOBS file not ILLEGAL been SEGMENT - SPRINT was not monitor call. ?SPTNJA NO SPRINT could the index. found without TYPE R invoked Reload, a preceding device name. a GET command then START or or a ROUN. SPRINT via a RUN or save it, and RUN ACTIVE A command was given by the operator to perform an action (KILL, TELL, etc.) for the current job, but SPRINT was not processing any Jjobs at the time the command was issued. 2SPTNSD NO SUCH DEVICE dev The device does job. $SPTNST SPRINT IS NOT not SPECIFIED PPN or it was not assigned to this START'ED The operator must section 4.6.1) to ?SPTNYP exist IS NOT type START (refer to the START command cause SPRINT to begin processing. 1in YOURS The project-programmer number on the $JOB card is different from the one used to log in. This occurs only when a user, rather than the system operator is running SPRINT. [SPTOIR OPERATOR INTERACTION REQUIRED] This is the response interaction is required $SPTPKF PICK FAILURE The card reader. ON to to the WHAT command continue processing. if CDRn about to be Check the appropriate action. or a duplicate, back read cannot be drawn through the first card in the input hopper and card take To continue reading, replace the in the input hopper and press the card, RESET button. $SPTRCK READ CHECK operator : ON CDRn A card was not read correctly. Reset the press the RESET button on the card reader. last card and [SPTRLC RESET THE LAST CARD AND PRESS THE RESET BUTTON] A card went through the correctly. This message following four messages: 4-52 card-reader 1s but was always preceded by not read one of the SYSTEM ?SPTROM REMOTE OPERATOR l. %$SPTCME 2. 3. 4, %SPTDTM %SPTDVE 3$SPTRCK MUST The operator at a version of SPRINT ?SPTSND SFD NESTING TOO SERVICES RUN SYSTEM SPRINT remote Batch that did not station reside 3$SPTSPL DEVICE dev number IS of a filespec more than SPRINT IS ALREADY SFD's. START'ED ON START command processing on the UNRECOVERABLE INPUT DEVICE spooled. ERROR when - SPRINT was already STATUS nnn input error indication The I/0 status was nnn. from 4,7.1 it between the operator and an commands: the PLEASE command discussed below. interactive and the SEND user |is command. PLEASE The PLEASE the user. command provides for two-way communication between you 1It is initiated by the user typing at monitor level: .PLEASE text is performed simply output whatever typing on your operator action a message 1s followed [40,64] types the .PLEASE MOUNT terminal requested, by a (CTY). you can After answer following SA029 ON DTA3 you the 1is transmitted to **PLEASE JOB 44 [40,64] MOUNT SA029 ON DTA3 W/E the <CR> CTY TTY150 by the user programmer line: W/E have user <CR>. - The message and text<CR> Whenever you receive a message via the PLEASE command, issuing the command 1is identified by job number, project number, terminal number and name. For example: User which OPERATOR/USER COMMUNICATION The communication handled by two Both commands are The is dev was 1issued device. SPRINT received an could not recover. 4.7 a SPOOLED A ?SPTUIE run required a the maximum The input device specified in the START command SPRINT should read only from physical devices. $SPTSTD to DEEP The directory specification 1in directory path which contained permissable attempted on SY¥S:. and appears USER SPS as follows: SYSTEM SERVICES You mount the tape and answer: OK GO AHEAD Your reply completion At this <CR> appears on the of his request. time either you wuser's or the user terminal to may ESCape type inform him to of the return both terminals to the monitor state. It is essential that an ESCape be typed to allow your CTY to receive another PLEASE command. The next important point you must remember is that a job must never be logged in on the operator's PLEASE command terminal. This will cause the user to receive a busy message from PLEASE and his command transmitted. It is also important that you respond to will the not be PLEASE commands as quickly proceed to other work user cannot 4.7.2 as possible for in most cases until his request is completed. SEND The SEND command provides a means of communication. One line of information at a one terminal to the other. The format of the .SEND TTYn:text .SEND JOB You, as either n where text can only send .SEND initiate 150 would CANNOT FIND the as follows: event .SEND All When - I of ALL a CANNOT SYSTEM terminals that are ;;CTY: - THE SYSTEM a sends user ; sTTY150 - the FIND you TAPE You will know which You have special line job turned WILL ON terminal privileges TAPE 5 the one job operator or to particular user, you number using SYSTAT follows: following reload, RELOADED on will BE RELOADED message on his the OF CTY THE the you IN 5 can inform all users MINS receive: initiated that to 5 BE TOP number transmit information to simultaneously. A user, to or the monitor WILL IS as TAPE a message, 5 command CTY inter-terminal is transmitted from command is: time SEND number user's receive prospective THE the SEND from line ;7CTY: In a message a I user on terminal: n= TTY case of sending correct terminal TTY150 The the one-way can use this command to user or to all users another user. In the would first determine the then n= where the operator, a particular however, and the IN 5 will DTA the user MINS receive CABINET command does not by the have. line You number. can send a message to any terminal regardless of the state of the job on that terminal. A user will receive a ?BUSY message 1if the receiving terminal 1is not at monitor command level and the GAG switch is set (SET The TTY GAG is SEND command initiated from a the initial does not terminal. state). require a 4-54 Jjob to be 1logged in to be CHAPTER 5 OPERATOR TASKS The procedures explained in this chapter are performed periodically to provide the installation with information about system usage and performance and a means of ensuring the integrity of the system. Most of the procedures can be accomplished using the GALAXY Batch Systemnm, thereby requiring a minimum of operator intervention. However, there are some procedures that must be performed manually because of specific program responses required of the operator. The tasks as they are described in this chapter include explanations of what the programs do and why they are run, along with the steps required to execute them. It will be your responsibility to be able to run all these procedures without using the Batch System, if the need arises. 5.1 The DAILY TASKS following 5.1.1 Update operator the tasks Message of are usually run on a daily schedule. the Day The file NOTICE.TXT, located in the SYS:[1,4] area of the disk, contains messages that are transmitted to users as they log in. These messages, normally preceded by the date on which they first appear, are usually brief and contain important system information. For example, a message may specify the hours that the system will be on the air, or state when the disks will be refreshed, or mention new system features. You can change NOTICE.TXT during the day to warn users of problems on the system, to notify them of your intention to stop timesharing, or to direct wusers to a more lengthy file for additional information. To change, add, or delete a message in the file NOTICE.TXT, you can log in on [1,2] and run an editing program such as TECO. (Refer to Introduction to TECO and TECO in the Software Notebooks.) For example, to add a message as of April 12th and delete a 3-line message dated March 18th, you would enter: .R TECO *ER SYS:NOTICE.TXTSEW SYS:NOTICE.TXTSYSS Run TECO and specify that file NOTICE.TXT is to be updated. SYS: equals disk area [1,4]. OPERATOR TASKS *IAPR 12 THIS IS AN EXAMPLE OF<KCR> A TWO LINE MESSAGE.<CR> <CR> The command "I" places you 1in input mode and inserts everything fol- lowing it up to, but $$ not first the including, ESCape, into the message file. If "I" 1is the first command after entering TECO, the insertion is made at the beginning of the file. New messages are always the beginning at NOTICE.TXT file. The prints as $. double ESCape ends the insertion command. placed of the ESCape command This *SMAR 18S0L3KS$S$S string 1line the for searches containing the text "MAR 18", uniquely identifying and message, old the plus 1line that deletes the *EXSS . next two. A new NOTICE.TXT is filed; the o0ld version is automatically saved as and you exit NOTICE.BAK; TECO monitor Note that the above commands could have been and return level. strung together to as follows: .R TECO *ER SYS:NOTICE.TXTSEW SYS:NOTICE.TXTSYSS *IAPR 12 A LINE TWO THIS IS AN EXAMPLE OF<CR> MESSAGE.<CR> <CR> $$ *SMAR 18S$O0L3KSEXSS 5.1.2 SPACE with /FACT Switch The SPACE program is run to provide disk usage information. A listing is produced showing each user's quotas and actual usage. Entries pertaining to disk usage are entered into the system FACT file for later use. SPACE 1is usually run as part of the daily Batch Job submitted to the batch input queue with a SUBMIT command, e.g., SUBMIT TASKS. To run SPACE manually, you must be logged in under [1,2] and type the following commands: OPERATOR TASKS COMMAND .R FUNCTION SPACE Run *DSK:=/FACT the SPACE Create a disk filename appropriate file. *7C program. file Return to monitor .PRINT SPACE.LST If MONEY the file to Use the a program back-up /HELP MONEY BACKUP program not and in the to be save SPACE.LST run it SPACE at for to this later program or produces a command sequence if magnetic tape described in the 1listing that is to DTAn be printed. time, copy the FACT.SYS type the monitor Running chapter. showing command SPACE with individual user the the Notebooks. FUNCTION Assign FACT.SYS=DTAn:* * ~ make FACT follows uses DECtape as be the back-up medium, use Software the .COPY default and system processing. COMMAND .AS a level. more information on this program. is illustrated further on in this procedure charges. The back-up medium; Queue is tape switch HELP SPACE for the BATCH switch The | with of SPACE.LST entries in the DECtape unit accumulated n FACT Create a single from the DECtape (n=0-7) files disk files. and on mount it. file, FACT.SYS, NOTE If you are processing only the FACT.SYS file that you have just created with the SPACE program, you can omit the above .AS DSK SYS Assign the area two disk steps. logical name .RUN MONEY([1,4] Run the MONEY program will produce the MONEY .DEA SYS Remove .PRINT .DEL MONEY.SUM,*.LPT FACT.SYS of MONEY program to look for the FACT file. Queue logical the Delete money FACT.SYS name SYS to cause at your disk on [1,4]. This listings on disk. SYS from disk. listings to from disk. the be printed. NOTE When MONEY is run through BATCON, the command AS DTAn is replaced by MOUNT DTA:FACT/VID:FACTFILE and any reference FACT: . 5-3 to DTAn: 1is replaced by OPERATOR TASKS 5.1.3 Update Account Files CAUTION No attempt should be made to update the accounting files unless the operator is completely familiar with the operation of the REACT program. The discussion below gives a few common examples using REACT. A complete discussion of the REACT program is contained in the RUNREA specification found in the Supplementary Operator's Procedures of the Software Notebooks. There are no safeguards built into the REACT program and a mistake could prove to be quite serious. For this reason all accounting file updates should be performed by qualified operators Updates are made of these files the current only. to the system files on disk and also to backup copies on DECtape or magnetic tape. Following is a list of accounting files: FILE FUNCTION ACCT.SYS Contains the users' project programmer numbers and associated data necessary for users to log onto allowable the system. AUXACC.SYS Contains the each user. disk gquotas for QUOTA.SYS Contains user disk quotas c¢cn other than the standard system file structures. STRLST.SYS Contains entries for all file structures showing the structure owner, configuration and structure type. The functions performed by the operator are to 1insert new entries, delete existing entries, or change existing entries. Several examples are shown Example Add a 1l: new below. Inserting user an entry [50,1234] to in ACCT.SYS. the ACCT.SYS file. STEP FUNCTION .R REACT Run the REACT program. *R Read ACCT.SYS from SYS into the REACT buffer. *T 50,1234 NAME : JONES<CR> Insert 50,1234 will then 5-4 prompt into you the for file. the REACT user's OPERATOR TASKS STEP FUNCTION CODE:ABCS name. <CR>. code Enter the name followed by a REACT then prompts you for the (password). Enter the password followed by character default an ESCape. An instructs REACT to conditions for ESCape assume the all other parameters. *W Write as Example 2: Inserting Add an entry for an user entry the updated buffer back onto SY¥YS ACCT.SYS. in AUXACC.SYS. [50,1234] to the AUXACC.SYS STEP file. FUNCTION .R REACT \ Run *A the REACT program. Read AUXACC.SYS from SYS into the REACT buffer. *T 50,1234 NUM STRS:1<CR> STR NAME :DSKB<KCR> RESRVD: 0<CR> FCFS:1000<CR> QUOTA OUT:500<CR> STATUS Insert 50,1234 into the file. Then answer questions as to number of structures, disk quotas, and status bits. This information is contained on an access form which is prepared in the office. BITS:0<CR> W Write the updated buffer back as Example 3: Deleting Delete [2,167] entries. from the ACCT.SYS file. §IEE FUNCTION .R REACT Run *R Read ACCT.SYS into the REACT Kill the *K 2,167 *W Example Change onto AUXACC.SYS. the REACT program. (delete) Write updated 4: Changing the FCFS entry file back for buffer. 2,167. onto SYS. entries. for DSKB to 1000 for user [2,167] in AUXACC.SYS. SYS OPERATOR TASKS STEP .R FUNCTION REACT Run *A the Read *C 2,167 REACT AUXACC.SYS Change 2,167. CHANGE: FCF information ARGS:DSKB:1000$ what the Reply to Write the *W Example Add a 5: Inserting quota entry for an entry user in program. the REACT on what new the into ACT will is value buffer. now prompt for be changed and (ARG) 1is Dbe. back onto to to prompts. updated file SYS. QUOTA.SYS. 10,110 on disk DSKC. STEP FUNCTION .R REACT Run *Q DSKC:[1,4] Read *T 10,110 Insert *RESRVD: 0 the REACT program. QUOTA.SYS Reply user to quota from DSKC. 10,110, the of 0 prompt for the with a user on this reserved a 1logged-in file structure, *FCFS:1000 *QUOTA OUT:500 Example 6: Add file Reply to the prompt quota of 1000 blocks. Reply to the prompt quota of 500 blocks. structure REACT *S *I with a 1logged-out Inserting a file structure entry in STRLST.SYS. DSKC for user 10,110. EEEE .R with FUNCTION Run the Read DSKC REACT STRLST.SYS. Insert structure PROJ ,PROG:10,110 Reply to NAME : SMITH User name, NUM Number UNITS:?2 program. a of UNIT ID:1RPOO3 Unit KONT TYPE:DP Controller UNIT TYPE:2 Unit DSKC. series units in of the identification, type type, prompts file with p, pn, structure, OPERATOR TASKS STEP FUNCTION CLASS:0 Class UNIT REACT ID:2RP004 for of file then as structure. repeats many the units last as four prompts specified in NUM UNITS: . KONT TYPE:DP UNIT TYPE:3 CLASS: 0 *W Write The entire RUNREA REACT and acquainted 5.1.4 dialogue REACT with is quite documents all the FILCOM Account updated complex. in possible the the file You should Software prompts and back onto SYS. refer Notebooks to and the become responses. Files At specified times, run the file compare program (FILCOM) between disk [1,4] versions, and backup tape versions of the ACCT.SYS and AUXACC.SYS files. These files contain the entries necessary for a user This to 1log procedure onto the notes any system as well discrepancies as the user in the two disk files quota and entries. is used to prevent any user's tampering with the accounting files. For additional security, the REACT program used in the following command sequence can be renamed or removed from disk tape. The FILCOM can be performed as part of following procedure assumes that backup files are on magnetic tape, replace DTA with Assign Mount .R DSK LPT REACT *R kept on The they FUNCTION DTAX .AS and MTA. COMMAND .AS entirely a daily Batch job. are on DECtape; if - DECtape the ACCT Assign the that disk. output Run the Read disk REACT the drive x DECtape on a logical 1listings where x=0-7. DTAX. name will of go LPT so to the program. system file ACCT.SYS from the disk. *p Purge any *L ACT.DSK Create a LIST all CODES?:Y the system *R DTAX: Read *p Purge expired disk account file ACT.DSK entries plus numbers. containing passwords from file. ACCT.SYS any from expired the DECtape. account numbers. the OPERATOR TASKS COMMAND FUNCTION *L ACT.DTA Create a disk file ACT.DTA containing all the entries plus passwords from the DECtape file. LIST-CODES?:Y *A Read the disk. *L. AUX.DSK Create all AUXACC.SYS from the DECtape. a the Return file. disk file AUX.DTA containing entries from the DECtape file. to the monitor and run the FILCOM program. *ACCT=ACT.DSK,ACT.DTA Create a disk file differences in any *AUX=AUX.DSK,AUX.DTA Create a disk *7C ACCT.SCM,AUX.SCM *.DSK,*.DTA ACCT.SCM containing the ACCT.SYS files. file any differences .DELETE the containing system Create . PRINT AUX.DSK the *I, AUX .DTA FILCOM file from from Read .R disk file AUXACC.SYS entries *A DTAX: *"C a the all system in AUX.SCM containing the AUXACC.SYS files. Return to the monitor and .SCM files to be printed. queue the Delete above by REACT the files created program. the | NOTE When this BATCON, DTAx is job DTA:ACCT/WL to 1is run using the first command AS replaced with MOUNT DTAXx: and any is reference replaced by ACCT:. 5.1.5 Detached Job Procedure The purpose of this procedure specified times during the first shift operator. At 9 the The 9 a.m., 12 CTY. The a.m. compared noon, SYSTAT with and SYSTAT the is 9 is to day. rid the The action described system 3 p.m., for example, will show any jobs that 12 noon, a filed. a.m. At you of can are second in inactive run a here a jobs is SYSTAT detached SYSTAT 1s at for a on state. run and SYSTAT. You then determine if there are any jobs which have been detached and inactive for the complete 3-hour period. This can be determined by comparing job number, project programmer number, prodram, state, and runtime. The 3 p.m. SYSTAT can likewise be compared to the 12 noon SYSTAT. You can then attach to the inactive jobs, from the CTY, and attempt to log off the job as follows: OPERATOR TASKS FUNCTION STEP [4,111]. AT 5[4,111] Attach to job 5, user . C .SET SPOOL NONE Return to monitor and remove spooling to eliminate any output. .K/F Log off job with the F option. From Job 2 Monitor response. file Make a note on the SYSTAT output concerning the action taken and for job, the kill to unable are you If 1logbook. the in the SYSTAT example, if the user is over quota, you can take the following action: FUNCTION STEP Return to the monitor and detach the The second shift operator will job. take care of this job at 10 p.m. . C .DET From job 5 Make a note on the SYSTAT to the effect that job the could logged off and file the SYSTAT in the logbook for later use. not be The second shift operator can then complete the detached procedure The operator can run a SYSTAT at 6 p.m. initiated on the first shift. These SYSTATs can be compared to the previous SYSTATs and at 10 p.m. the operator At 6 p.m. to determine if there are any inactive jobs. He can operator. shift first the as procedure same the can follow the operator At 10 p.m. attach to the job and attempt to log it off. action becomes more involved. Up until 10 p.m., jobs which cannot be it is the operator's At 10 p.m. logged off are simply detached. By checking a list of first responsibility to get rid of these jobs. and second offenders, the operator can decide the appropriate action If this is the first time a user is detached over quota, the to take. following action might be taken: FUNCTION STEP R REACT Run the REACT program. *A Read AUXACC.SYS in the REACT buffer. *T proj,prog Type the disk quotas of the offending user. *C proj,prog CHANGE : FCF ARGS:DSKB:new value CHANGE :OUT ARGS:DSKB:new values$ current the values so that the Change new the becomes quota logged-out current and the value logged-in new the becomes logged-in quota logged-out value. *W Write the updated file back onto the system. Once the gquotas have been interchanged, the operator can log 1in a second job under the offender's project programmer number. The original detached job may now be killed and the operator can then kill the second job. OPERATOR TASKS If the the user in following question action is a after second offender, attaching to the the STEP . C Return to the monitor job with cause files log is very important job procedure be questions arise. 5.1.6 At BACKUP some of will the modified If saving be a you all to specific to the off the output 1logbook day, you day the all tape included BACKUP. and BACKUP to switches, Save system of 11,2 1,3 1,4 DSKB: DSKB will detached should any too time files have the The refer lost is disk program. event those of an entered which on the the or system need explained a daily created should during be system magnetic or BACKUPs modified be later saved in this filed in the crash, you can contain the tapes you set up some system of and that you enter CTY <cover only complete to the to were entire procedures determine a in to BACKUP consuming, that This implies that magnetic tapes below (For the procedure. procedure are arrange files logs. a few of description BACKUP the features of all BACKUP specification in the DSKB. STEP /SAVE the reference using system, before. weekly identification Notebooks.) BACKUP concerning for tape 1loss seems files logs a the those day the of commands .R This to automatically delete user under quota and should magnetic BACKUP only When Software /TAPE MTAOQ /REWIND /LIST DSK: and log off the option. job. the 1limit every BACKUP The procedures available in 1: /W/B the logout to get the reconstruct be restored. 1labeling the corresponding Example on week; Logbook. files to externally the previous time output refer of save The log the terminal saved to files run a CTY in and the only once chapter. System all time crash, since can that filed disks allow unforeseen since take (Daily) prescribed contents This can FUNCTION K/W/B It operator job. FUNCTION Run the BACKUP program. Use tape on MTAO. Rewind to the beginning of tape. Produce directory listing on (default Save file entire BACKUP types as it begins from that name is contents BACKUP.LOG). of DSKB. out each UFD to save files area. disk OPERATOR TASKS If the tape becomes full before the SAVE is completed, BACKUP stops, types out the full file identification and block number of the current file being saved, rewinds and unloads the tape, and types the message: SBKPEOT REACHED EOT -- MOUNT NEW TAPE THEN TYPE "GO" Remove the full tape, mount a new tape, and type GO. with the SAVE. (A file may be split across tapes.) Example 2: Save all p.m., files that have been created or modified since 6 yesterday. STEP FUNCTION .R BACKUP /TAPE MTAOQ Run Use /SSNAME WED-PARTIAL Give the SAVE /SAVE or modified since SAVE the files. /REWIND the BACKUP program. tape on MTAQ. Rewind to the beginning of tape. /MSINCE:YESTERDAY:18:00 1,2 DSKB file a name. Condition the save to all 6 p.m. <created files yesterday. BACKUP types out each UFD that contains . 5.1.7 BACKUP continues a file being saved. SPACE with /BATCH Switch The SPACE program with /BATCH switch is run each night immediately after completing the BACKUP save. 1Its function is to log in a batch job for all users who were on the system during the day and also for A quota by more than 100 blocks. 1logout their exceeded who users listing is produced showing each users quotas and gquota. SPACE 1logout their exceeded who users of case the automatically deleted to allow the Batch job to be is run while logged in under STEP [1,2] actual usage. as follows: FUNCTION .R SPACE Run *DSK :=DSKB:/BATCH Cause SPACE to look *7C .PRINT SPACE.LST Return to the monitor and queue SPACE.LST to be printed. the SPACE program. produce SPACE.LOG files are also generated for treated as normal In are files under out quota, 1logged line printer SPACE.LST. only individual users. at DSKB They can output and returned to the user. and be Use the /HELP switch in the SPACE program or type the monitor command HELP SPACE for more information on this program. The /FACT switch 1is illustrated in a separate paragraph in this section. OPERATOR 5.1.8 GRIPES During the normal run the GRIPE complaints, or course of TASKS timesharing, program. Using other comments, area [3,3]. The function of this gripes for the day and produce several to various people who will answer completely by Batch. submitting the All GRIPE.CTL .SUBMIT GRIPE.CTL The following manual for magnetic tape, GRIPE you need file while procedure use the user .R do them. is The ability to logged in DECtape BACKUP program combine all the are distributed procedure is the GRIPE tape under [1,2] mount assumes the as to a as handled backup save and after follows: medium; restore the files. FUNCTION *.CMP[3,3] Check area files. If PIP Run *GRIPE=* ,CMP[3, 3] the Create all *7C [3,3] there PIP a the for any are none, *.CMP[3,3] CMP disk CMP .AS DTAn files CMP stop (GRIPE) here. which contains program. file files GRIPE, from Return to the monitor .DEL the procedure is to listings, which STEP .DIR has this program, he can enter suggestions, which are then stored as disk files on from area [3,3]. and delete all the [3,3]. Assign DTAn (where n=0-7) and mount previous GRIPE DECtape on it with the write enabled. .R PIP Run *G=DTAn:*.TXT,DSK:GRIPE the Create : *DTAn:GRIPES.TXT=G PIP a program. disk the combined Put the file G, GRIPEs updated which consists from DTAn GRIPEs and file of DSK. back onto DTAn. *7C Return to the monitor .PRI GRIPE/COP:n/DIS:REN .DELETE In the G above day. The example, tape determined by based monthly tape capacity. 5.1.9 Saving The system user to This other run this the contains your upon the FACT Files FACT charges, loss. All copies of later. Delete file listing gripes disk contains accumulated files, the gripes schedule it can or containing all the data backed up each night file for the current some schedule can be based be procedure be the last job done must be logged off and only one The FACT files 5-12 weekly strictly or on necessary to compute to ensure against their system should be to backup jobs procedure. to G. according be should and queue the n GRIPE distributed installation. The gripe frequency, must the be each [1,2] saved on night. job left both a OPERATOR TASKS DECtape (or magnetic tape) and a private disk used both daily and monthly to produce the Section 5.1.2. The following steps assume for magnetic tape, use the BACKUP program. STEP .REN .AS .R pack. These files are MONEY listings discussed in DECtape as a backup medium; FUNCTION * *=8SYS:FACT.* DTAnN Copy the FACT files and at the same time delete (n=0-7) and mount program to Assign PIP *DTAn:DDMMM.FCT/Z=FACT.* DTAn tape on 1it. Run the PIP transfer the FACT from SY¥YS zero files to [1,2] them from a scratch the onto tape the and DECtape as a single file DDMMM.FCT where DDMMM = the date. For example, APR 10th would be 10APR.FCT. *7C Return to monitor . MOUNT .R xxXx PIP *xxx: [p,pnl/X/B=DTAn:*.* pack xxx. Run PIP program The the file on 5.1.10 level and mount the private from the to the DECtape private pack, transfer to the the area FACT [p,pn] xxX. System Shutdown termination of timesharing is normally accomplished through the operator-privileged OPSER command :KSYS time, where "time" is the time of shutdown in hours and minutes (hh:mm), or the time from "now" that timesharing will stop (+hh:mm). :KSYS takes <care of all system shutdown functions automatically. STEP :KSYS FUNCTION +00:30 This OPSER command stop 1in 30 messages will users You may system now over stop to the field system via service or the as described console whomever causes timesharing to minutes. Periodic warning automatically be sent to front may have in Section end and the system to get 4.1. turn the scheduled next. Enter the following: .CTRL/\ Control—backslash front-end PAR¥SHUTDOWN It is have important shut down Stop that the you system now make and the the a to the that you PARSER. TOPS-10 monitor. log entry to reason for the the effect shutdown. OPERATOR TASKS 5.1.11 DSKLST The DSKLST program compiles and prints an analysis of the contents and the current status of the system file structures. It provides the information with which the system administrator and you, the operator, can: You l. Analyze 2. Detect 3. Determine when 4, Determine optimum cluster file storage space. can the and run DSKLST, efficiency diagnose to while of disk problem refresh logged space areas various sizes in on disk. disk for under usage. assigning (1,2], STEP .AS areas. as releasing follows: FUNCTION DSK LPT .R DSKLST FOR HELP TYPE *<{CR> Assign output /H *7C the disk to rather than receive the the printer. DSKLST.LST report to If you include the above steps 1in DSKLST.CTL, you can submit the command: .SUB be and queue the printed. a Batch control Jjob to the Batch file such system with as the DSKLST.CTL Additional information on DSKLST can specification in the Software Notebooks. 5.1.12 DSKLST Run the DSKLST program, which will prompt with an asterisk. The default response of <CR> will print all DSKLST output for all structures. Return to the monitor .PRINT and be found 1in the DSKLST DSKRAT The DSKRAT program compiles and prints damage assessment information for level-D file structures. It also has the facility to free up lost disk space. You can run DSKRAT, while 1logged 1in wunder [1,2], as follows: STEP FUNCTION .AS DSK LPT Assign printer .AS str STR Assign the the file analyzing. .R DSKRAT Run .PRINT Queue RAT.LST the 5-14 to the disk. logical device name STR structure "str" that you DSKRAT the output program. report to be printed. to are OPERATOR If more steps To than using run one procedure sequence in a .SUB to be analyzed, repeat the last three under the Batch file DSKRAT.CTL and system, 1include the above submit it to Batch with: DSKRAT.CTL Additional information specification OTHER The is "str's". this command 5.2 structure different TASKS in the SCHEDULED following on DSKRAT <can be found 1in the DSKRAT Software Notebooks. TASKS operator tasks are usually scheduled at other than daily intervals. 5.2.1 The Account following showing all Control procedure the changes is usually that have during the previous week. The the previous week, are matched system. Two Changes of each used in reports, weekly. made account command sequence the Batch system. procedure is manually. medium; for usually Should The each account placed the tape, in need following magnetic file, an ACCT.CTL arise, sequence use the vyou assumes DSK Assign LPT REACT *R *L ACCT.NOW LIST are prepared. BACKUP file and run via <can also run the as the DECtape program. DTAn (n=0-7) and checkpoint DECtape. switch to WRITE ENABLE. .R listing AUXACC.SYS FUNCTION DTAnN .AS a and the STEP .AS produces files, as checkpointed on tape same files currently on the against for It to ACCT.SYS between the old and the current files are listed. At the end processing, the current account files are copied to tape to be the next processing. The backup one run been CODES?:N<CR> . Assign 1logical name produce listing files Run REACT the Set LPT on the mount the to the enable disk to disk. program. Read the current ACCT.SYS file into REACT buffer. List it to disk as ACCT.NOW without *A Read the current AUXACC.SYS *L, AUXACC.NOW the REACT buffer. listing List the it the passwords. file to into disk as AUXACC.NOW. *R DTAn:ACCT.CHK *L ACCT.OLD Read from LIST ACCT.OLD CODES?N<CR> *A DTAn:AUXACC.CHK *L, AUXACC.OLD the the previous week's ACCT.CHK file DECtape and list it to disk as without listing the passwords. Read previous week's AUXACC.CHK from the DECtape and list it to AUXACC.OLD. 5-15 file disk as OPERATOR TASKS STEP FUNCTION *"C .R Return to the monitor FILCOM and run the FILCOM program, *ACCT=ACCT.OLD, .NOW Create a disk file *AUXACC=AUXACC.OLD, .NOW Create a disk file AUXACC.SCM containing the differences in the two AUXACC files. *7C Return to the monitor .R the differences PIP ACCT.SCM in the containing two ACCT files. and run the PIP program, *DTAn:ACCT.CHK=SYS:ACCT.SYS Checkpoint the current ACCT.SYS file to DECtape as ACCT.CHK, replacing last week's *DTAn:AUXACC.CHK=SYS: copy. Checkpoint AUXACC.SYS the current AUXACC.SYS file to DECtape as AUXACC.CHK, last week's copy. replacing *7C .PRI ACCT.SCM,AUXACC.SCM Return to the monitor and queue the files containing the differences to .DELETE *.NOW,*.OLD Delete the temporary work files. 5.2.2 BACKUP printed. be (Weekly) On a weekly basis, you should save the entire contents of the system disks on magnetic tapes. The procedure is similar to that described under BACKUP (Daily) in Section 5.1.6. Once the files are saved, however, the disk areas can also be refreshed or wiped clean and the saved files then reloaded onto disk. This is done, primarily, to recover unusable disk blocks. After heavy use of the system, some disk blocks are marked unusable because of system failures and errors. The number of disk blocks marked this way is in reality greater than the actual number of unusable blocks due to the assigning of blocks in clusters. 1In addition, when the disk is nearly full, disk files become fragmented into non-contiguous parts. When this happens, more disk space 1is used to maintain the extra retrieval pointers. Also, more overhead time is used because the system has to locate more pieces of the file than when the file 1is in a contiguous area. Therefore, by saving, refreshing, and restoring the system files, the disk contains the same files as before, but it is better organized. Non-contiguous files are restored into contiguous areas. You can also take this opportunity to delete files that have been inactive for a specified period of time; this will free up additional room on disk for active files. The following procedure can be used as a basis for BACKUP, tailored to your installation. Stop timesharing operations. setting up a weekly OPERATOR TASKS STEP :KSYS FUNCTION +0030 This OPSER command will stop timesharing in 30 minutes. Users will be notified, periodically, as described in Section 4.1. When timesharing has stopped, you can proceed with STEP .R saving the FUNCTION BACKUP Run the BACKUP program. /TAPE MTAOQ /REWIND /LIST DSK: /SAVE DSKB: Use tape on MTAOQ. Rewind tape to load point. Request a directory listing Save system disk. '1,2 1,3 BACKUP types out each UFD as it to save files from that area. If DSKB the data overflows a reel of tape, you will receive SBKPEOT REACHED EOT -- MOUNT NEW TAPE THEN TYPE Replace the procedure full until tape you with a receive scratch the DONE The system. procedure can be and type the disk. begins message: "GO" "GO". Repeat this message: The above tape on SAVE repeated operation for any is other complete. system disks to be SAVEAd. The monitor can now be reloaded following the procedures in Chapter 3 with one 1important difference. When the system prompts you for the STARTUP OPTION, the system will Type you should prompt you TYPE STR NAME in system a TO BE answer REFRESH. as follows: REFRESHED structure. For (CR IF During NONE, the ALL IF ensuing dialog, ALL) example: DSKB<LKCR> The to prompt will be be refreshed. set of prompts. prompt. structure the repeated A <CR> The system If there are no parameters, answer so that with no will you can enter all the structures structure name will terminate that then repeat the STARTUP other <changes to be made to with QUICK or GO. You will then OPTION the file receive message: TO AUTOMATICALLY LOG-IN UNDER [1,2] TYPE "LOGIN" The following procedure assumes BACKUP resides on DECtape; if resides on magnetic tape, change the ASSIGN and RUN commands conform. it to OPERATOR TASKS STEP FUNCTION Automatically .LOGIN .SET SCHED 1 Assign DTAn containing .RUN /TAPE in under Run DTAn:BACKUP MTAOQ the (n=0-7) the and mount a BACKUP BACKUP /ASINCE:-30D program because the disk is Specify the tape drive /RESTORE past 30 DECtape empty from at DECtape this point. containing performed tape in the days). Restore all specifically conditioning. files, DONE RESTORE 1is /UNLOAD Rewind and /" C Return to If you should be tape will result restoring in a a multi-reel message: each into numbered those prior by UFD as it begins that area. complete. unload the the tape. monitor. SAVE, the end $BKPEOT REACHED EOT -- MOUNT NEW TAPE THEN TYPE sequentially except excluded BACKUP types out to restore files next to This entry is optional and allows you to restore only those files that have been recently accessed (in this case: within the the 1 program. number 1 of the SAVE previous procedure. Mount [1,2]. Set a schedule bit pattern of prohibit users from logging in. DTAnNn .AS log tape and type of each full "GO" GO. If you desire additional information to be printed at your for example, tape sequence numbers, SAVE set names, dates include the following entry before the /RESTORE entry. terminal, and times, /LIST CTY: BACKUP.LOG When the Direct the printing of the file to the OPR terminal. RESTORE operation 1is complete, do /" C Return SCHED following: FUNCTION STEP .SET the 0 to the monitor. Set the schedule bit pattern allow users to log 1in. 5-18 to 0 to OPERATOR TASKS STEP .LOG You FUNCTION 1,2 can system 5.3 Log in again under ([1,2] correct search list. now initiate system jobs following as are performed on an formal schedule. required you would after a a normal as-required basis than 5.3.1 Formatting Formatting on and This TASKS tasks rather use. just ensure load. NON-SCHEDULED The your to a Disk mapping on-call or Packs disk packs is 1is also recommended procedure search errors or other Formatting writes (or problems such rewrites) as header a prior if a to their disk pack first develops bad spots on the pack. record at the beginning of each sector so that the hardware can position itself when reading or writing on the disk. Mapping is the process of writing and reading each disk block, or sector, a number of times to search for bad blocks. A log of any bad blocks 1is kept and is output in two duplicate BAT blocks. Because should (Refer the formatting process destroys all data on the disk pack, you first run the BACKUP program and save any important files. to Section 5.2.2 for files.) information on saving and restoring | 5.3.1.1 Formatting formatted 1in a requirements for l. must You RP02s and timesharing running be RP03s DCRPE logged - RP02s environment and using RP03s the can DCRPE all be program. The are: in under [1,2], be mounted preferably on a hard copy drive; the pack appropriate RP10 disk terminal. 2. 3. The disk pack must must NOT have been ASSIGNed The "write controller header" must switch be on or inside set to a private MOUNTed. the -enable write headers (LK OUT position). Proceed as follows: STEP FUNCTION .R DCRPE[6,6] TYPE OF THE THE PHYSICAL DISK PACK Run DCRPE, which 1s wusually stored 1in the hardware and diagnostic area [6,6]. DCRPE will then enter into a dialog with NAME DRIVE: Reply the with drive; 5-19 the for physical example, designation DPAO or of DPB2. OPERATOR TASKS FUNCTION STEP DO YOU THE WISH PACK? TO Y Y will continue with the will skip the formatting FORMAT or N <CR>- mapping questions formatting; and go to that N the follow the NOTE below. NAME THE ERROR DEVICE Enter FOR the REPORTING: ***ARE TO YOU SURE A carriage ALL INFORMATION ON dev WILL LOST BE THIS POINT. Y N or FORMATTING logical for or physical name of error reports, return defaults e.g., to disk. TTY. This is your last chance to exit before Type Y if all losing data or disk. necessary data has been saved. YOU WANT PROCEED? the device DEVICE BEYOND <CR>- IN DCRPE notifies you that it has started to format the disk and gives vyou PROGRESS hh:mm:ss a timestamp. HEADERS HAVE VERIFICATION BEEN NOW DCRPE has completed writing the headers and is now reading them to verify their WRITTEN- IN PROGRESS validity. FORMATTING RECOMMEND DCRPE has completed the verification; you are notified of the number of errors (n) and of the time it took COMPLETE- MAPPING TOTAL ERRORS:n TOTAL FORMATTING THE PACK for TIME= the formatting process. hh:mm:ss PACK? THE DO YOU WISH TO MAP N continue with the mapping; Y or N will <CR>- exit switch NOTE new pack, formatting a been used since it have factory, it will not from the not valid HOM and BAT blocks mapping program one came the required by the Use the TWICE of DCRPE. option to the LONG scratch pack, giving it a portion with 'structure the name, and initializing both the HOM and BAT blocks. The detailed specifications TWICE program can be running for the After found in the Software Notebooks. is this Answer N FORMAT prompted done, to THE as reload the will the disk to the monitor. At this time you can switch the "write headers" controller back to the WH position. If you are has that Y DCRPE progranm. the question DO YOU WISH You will then PACK? follows: TO be on OPERATOR TASKS FUNCTION STEP USE OLD BAT BLOCK AS BASE? DO YOU WISH TO HOME BLOCKS THE YES, IF TO You must reply Y. <CR>- N or Y BE RETAIN THE Again, answer Y. PACK WILL HAVE REFRESHED THE HOME BLOCK PARAMETERS WILL HAVE TO BE REDEFINED IN ONCE IF NO, Y or <CR>- N NAME THE DEVICE CRASH RECOVERY The usual FOR DATA: ***ARE YOU SURE YOU WANT ALL TO PROCEED? INFORMATION ON DEVICE dev WILL BE LOST BEYOND END OF PASS =hh:mm:ss and gives you 1; ELAPSED TIME n ERRORS THIS PASS CONTINUE? Y or N <CR>- TOTAL MAPPING TIME FOR dev=hh:mm:ss HISTORY OF BAD BLOCKS: START OF BAD BLOCK: ss bbbbbb=ccc,hh, SIZE OF BAD REGION IN BLOCKS=n p=BAD g=BAD saved. DCRPE notifies you that it is mapping PROGRESS ss hh:mm: or been <CR>- IN MAPPING A Type Y if all necessary data files have POINT N or Y is DSK. This question is asked only 1if you Answer with TTY. skipped formatting. NAME THE DEVICE FOR ERROR REPORTING: THIS reply BLOCKS TOTAL REGIONS TOTAL a timestamp. DCRPE has read all the blocks once in the time shown and has found n errors. Type A to continue reading all the without times ten of total blocks a Type Y to read the blocks one stopping. again. question the more time and ask Type N to end mapping at this pass. final pass, DCRPE prints out mapping time and the location, and number of any bad regions on After the the total size, Each bad area is located by the disk. block number bbbbbb, as well as cylinder The (ccc), head (hh) and sector (ss). size of each bad region is given by n. After all bad areas have been logged, the total number of bad regions (g) and This same bad blocks (p) are printed. information is also stored in the two then The program duplicate BAT blocks. exits. EXIT Now use the TWICE program with the REFRESH option to re—initialize the two duplicate HOM blocks and clear the Storage Allocation Table (SAT). This procedure frees up any lost blocks and of files the files eliminates fragmentation since the subsequent BACKUP operation, RESTORE, will reload systematically. OPERATOR TASKS RP02 and RP03 program. disks This formatting can also program single be formatted dgives you the of disk pack cylinders a in exec mode additional and single using the DDRPC capability surfaces of of a cylinder. The requirements l. The for "write running header" controller must DDRPC are: switch be inside set to the appropriate enable write RP10 headers disk (LK OUT position). 2. Drives with Load and that the start the DDRPC disk of PDP-10 RP10 Disk Memory Map Pack not to be formatted must be placed it initialize off 1line switch. the description From are STOP program; will and print a systenm. Reliability Test (DDRPC) Version 000,002 = To SIZE/K 000000 077777 32K POWER FREQUENCY = 60HZ Write Enable Entire Disk Y DF10 in KA Addressing Mode or Number of DPAO = RP03, 4 STATUS-ON DPAl = RP02, STATUS-OFF DPA2 = RP03, STATUS-OFF LINE DPA3 = RP02, STATUS-OFF LINE N <CR> Y Drives= LINE LINE EDDT You are now ready to format an entire disk or selected portions of it. Example EX #1 - Formatting an entire FORMATSX disk pack Operator wants capability of program. WANT TO Y N OR FORMAT <CR> - THE DISK? that ESCape or the Operator types Format WANT TO The complete be formatted. FORMAT OR N formatting diagnostic $ ALTmode indicates key.) Y. Y DRIVE?-<CR>0 Y use the the DDRPC (Note pressing WHAT DISK? to ENTIRE <CR>-Y drive 0. disk pack on VERIFY ERROR, DISK ADDR, DPA=0 CYL=013 SURF=02 SECT=03 VERIFY ERROR, DISK ADDR, DPA=0 CYL=056 SURF=01 SECT=01 VERIFY ERROR, DISK ADDR, DPA=0 CYL=103 SURF=04 SECT=03 VERIFY ERROR, DISK ADDR, DPA=0 CYL=277 SURF=06 SECT=00 drive 0 is to kkkkkkhkkkkkx EXIT TEST-FORMAT RUN TIME 0:15:20 kkkkkhkkkkkk The error indicated messages disk above indicate that the addresses successfully. formatted again or the individual disk reformatted as indicated in the example 5-22 disk The failed disk addresses below. to format the may be completely (surfaces) may be OPERATOR Example #2 - Formatting a portion TASKS of the disk pack EXPLANATION ACTION EX Format that $ FORMATSX a portion of a disk pack. indicates pressing the ESC (Note or ALT key.) WANT TO Y N OR WHAT FORMAT THE DISK? DRIVE?-<CR>0 FORMAT ENTIRE Y <CR>-N OR Operator types Y. Operator specifies <CR>-Y N Operator wants portion of the DISK? CYL(8)=100 Cylinder SURF (8) =0 All CYL(8)=102 Cylinder SURF (8) =A All CYL(8)=B B 100 sectors drive 0. to format disk. only a (octal). of surface 0. 102. surfaces. is an illegal character. ?HUH? CYL(8)=217 Cylinder 217. (8) =40 SURF 40 illegal is an surface address. 2HUH? CYL(8)=217 Cylinder SURF (8) =4 Surface CYL(8)=E Either E or X at this point causes program to ask if there is another drive to be formatted (or tested). TEST At WHAT this time you can switch 5.3.1.2 and the back DDRPI DDRPI the position. Formatting RP0O4s and RP06s 1in either 4. "write headers" the WH mapped to again. The formatting for the above <cylinders and surfaces will be done, error messages may appear as 1in the above example, and EXIT TEST will be output. DRIVE?-<CR>E controller 217 - RPO4s and switch RPO6s a timesharing environment or on can be the disk formatted stand-alone using program. (Timesharing) Running DDRPI during l. You must 2. Packs list. to timesharing in requires be logged under be formatted must the following: [1,2]. not 5-23 be 1in the system structure OPERATOR TASKS 3. The following files must be in your area: DIAMON.SAV DDRPI.SAV KLDDT.SAV SUBRTN.SAV Proceed as follows: .ASSIGN . RUN DSK LPT Direct DIAMON DIAMON Load CMD- printer and start DIAMON will Enter "DDRPI" formatting The DDRPI rather the dialog lengthy. dialog for formatting Print questions out and RP04 and output file diagnostic the then request to a to disk. monitor. command. start the disk dialog. RP06 type the DDRPI.HLP file their suggested responses and use are disk drives it as reference; fully detailed. is CHAPTER SYSTEM RECOVERY 6 PROCEDURES Because of the complexity of the system, there will be times when it will cease to function correctly. Such a condition, commonly referred to as a "crash," may be the result of software problems, hardware problems, or environmental problems. Sometimes, the system will automatically reload itself, record the error conditions, and restart processing. At other times, it becomes your responsibility to recognize the problem and take corrective steps to get the system back up as quickly as possible. It is very important that you keep an accurate record of any system problem that may arise. 1In the event of a software crash, a Software Error Report (SER) form must be filled out, in addition to a concise and descriptive entry in the 1logbook. For hardware problems, a hardware error form should be filled out along with the log entry. 6.1 CENTRAL PROCESSOR RECOVERY Recovery procedures for three system categories of the central processor will be discussed under failures. 1. Failures due to software errors 2. Failures due to malfunctions 3. Failures due to a hostile in the hardware environment. The auto-reload feature of the DECsystem-10 will automatically reload the system after a system failure (crash) if the system has been up for at least five minutes. The usual procedure, if possible, 1is to record the system as it appeared at the time of failure and then reload the previously 1loaded monitor. System—-to-operator dialog provides you with the opportunity to load a different monitor or to change system parameters via the start-up options of the ONCE procedure. (See the ONCE specification in the Software Notebooks.) For installations where there may be no operator coverage at times, there 1is a 60-second timeout after the first restart question. If no answer has been received, the system assumes (and records on the CTY) the default The crash answers file to the ONCE (a copy of the procedure. system at the time it failed) is always written to the same area; if you wish to save this information, must be copied to another area before the system crashes again. it If the be system crashes twice automatically reloaded. within five minutes, it will not SYSTEM 6.1.1 Software PROCEDURES Errors Software errors l. RECOVERY fall Errors into three general categories: detected by the TOPS-10 monitor, resulting by the RSX-20F front-end monitor in STOPCD messages 2. Errors 3. Hung job 6.1.1.1 the XXX error the than CTY of n is 1s a Error executes ERROR. number mnemonic messages TOPS-10 Stop) a scheduler cannot run any job. - When STOPCD and of STOPCODE the CPU the macro, descriptions or the is The containing NAME (0 identifying Notebooks. module the null monitor which detects produces a an message form: MONITOR Software monitor it the the where the (Monitor error, ?2CPUn where conditions other STOPCD internal at detected 1) that error. part 1list the xxX of A the also STOPCD executed the complete list STOPCD the of and STOPCD specification 1includes and STOPCD the type name or of in the severity classification. There are are four DEBUG, recovery l. types JOB, of STOPCDs; STOP, and in HALT. increasing All but the order last of severity initiate they automatic procedures. DEBUG - If condition system. no 1s The priority interrupt not immediately monitor transmits 1is harmful the in to progress, any following job or message to to the the the CTY: ?2CPUn MONITOR CONTINUING and If 2. continues. a priority and counts JOB - If No STOPCODE immediate interrupt as no ERROR. a JOB is operator 2CPUn and priority MONITOR another in where The action progress, a is DEBUG interrupt is ERROR. in progress, the current to the CTY: STOPCODE NAME acts the condition The monitor xxx to ERROR; one UUO AT terminal: xXxx LOC n EXEC LOC n; EXEC CALLED FROM EXEC LOC m EXEC LOC n; EXEC CALLED FROM USER LOC m aborts the current job operator the user's USER then of the 1is monitor STOPCD job. xxx immediate required. JOB message ?MONITOR xxX STOPCD. Jeopardizes the integrity of transmits the following message ?ABORTING NAME SYSTEM following: action is 6-2 required. and continues. No SYSTEM RECOVERY PROCEDURES If a priority interrupt is in progress, like 3. a STOP STOP - The condition jeopardizes the as a the CTY: whole. 2CPUn RELOAD The monitor MONITOR ERROR. MONITOR All jobs are aborted and . reload of the monitor. 4. a JOB STOPCD acts STOPCD. integrity of the transmits the STOPCODE NAME the system system following message to xXxX initiates an automatic HALT - The condition is so serious that the entire system 1is affected and the monitor cannot be reloaded automatically. The system halts, requiring that you manually perform the CRASH procedures as described in Section 6.1.1.4. Note, however, that you will be required to perform the entire CRASH procedure very infrequently, only when the system cannot recover on 1its own. (Refer to the CRASH specification in the Software Notebooks for a detailed explanation of the procedures.) In addition, if the monitor can determine the information, the following messages are also printed on the CTY: JOB n ON TTYxxx RUNNING xxxxXxX UUO IS xxxxxxxxxxxx AT USER FILE dev:file.ext[p,pn] They will help you determine the PC XXXXXX user causing the problem. 6.1.1.2 RSX-20F Detected Errors - Nearly all the error conditions that are not covered by the STOPCDs in Section 6.1.1.1 are detected by RSX-20F, the console front-end monitor. Some of the following are caused by hardware errors, some by software errors, and others by environmental Hardware conditions. Errors: CLOCK ERROR STOP A serious hardware E-BUS An E-Bus parity error in PARITY ERROR the the DEPOSIT EXAMINE FAILURE KL10 KL10 CPU. failure has was detected on CPU. The front-end software was in an attempt to examine or KL10 occurred unsuccessful deposit into memory. In each of the above error conditions, the front end reloads KL10 microcode, reconfigures the cache and main memory, and restarts the KL10 at octal location 407. The code at 407 causes TOPS-10 to dump and reload itself. If the error conditions persist, call Field Service. Software Errors: TEN HALTED The KLL10 has executed a HALT due to 6-3 some other error instruction condition. SYSTEM KEEP ALIVE RECOVERY CEASED PROCEDURES The "keep alive" dialog between the RSX-20F and TOPS-10 monitors senses that the KL10 is looping and not functioning correctly. For each of TOPS-10 Service. Other TEN the above conditions, monitor 1is If core dump is taken the problem persists, and call the Field Conditions: REQUESTED RE-BOOT POWER a KL10 reloaded. FAIL For some reason, the KL10 monitor to be reloaded. RSX-20F calls KLINIT routine and takes the BOOT to the first question. RESTART wants in the reply RSX-20F has restarted the system when power was restored after a power failure. The microcode 1is reloaded, cache and memory are reconfigured, and the system 1is restarted at octal location 70. The usual error 1in sequence of events that takes place when RSX-20F senses an the KL10 is to call the KLERR routine to analyze the error and print key system to or restart reload information. the The KLINIT routine is then called system. When KLINIT attempts to reload after a hardware or software error, it passes control to the <crash restart routine at location 407 of the KL10. This routine brings in the bootstrap program BOOTS via the KL1l0 file system and executes it with the following default command string: /DKCR>SYSTEM.EXE[1,4]<CR> However, if the TOPS-10 monitor had been originally loaded by an explicit command to the bootstrap prompt, this same command will be substituted for SYSTEM.EXE[1,4]. For example, if you had answered the bootstrap prompt with DSKN:RK270A[1,2] instead of merely typing a carriage return, the auto-reload procedure will use the command string: /DKCR>DSKN:RK270A.EXE[1,2] If the 407 the PDP-11 The start fails, file system. following hardware DEPOSIT is an enter example KLINIT of CTY read the output bootstrap program via for one of the PI GEN: 000 errors. EXAMINE FAILURE KLERR -- VERSION KLERR -- KL NOT HALT LOOP KLERR -- KL ERROR OTHER THAN KLERR KLERR --- KL VMA: 000000 133051 PI STATE: ON , PI ON: KLERR -- EXIT KLI KLI to VOO01lB IN FROM RUNNING CLOCK ERROR PC: 175 , STOP 000000 133051 PI HLD: 000 , KLERR -- VERSION V003D RUNNING -- MICROCODE VERSION 131 LOADED LOGICAL MEMORY CONFIGURATION: ADDRESS SIZE RQO RQ1 RQ2 00000000 128K 04 FOR ALL CONTROLLER RQ3 CONTYPE INT DMA20 4 6-4 above SYSTEM KLI -- KL RECOVERY PROCEDURES RESTARTED BOOTS DSKN: /D DSKN:RK270A 6.1.1.3 HUNG Condition - A hung condition exists when cannot run any Jjob other than the null job. When it that the system is not doing any useful work, use procedure to examine the program counter: STEP Control front-end PAR>REPEAT 10;EXAMINE PC can attempt to perform a crash PAR>ABORT 407 boot system via gets language you into (PARSER). the above.) the KL typing: processor. Take a core dump and reload the monitor using BOOTS from the KL10 file system. If the command restart by Halt PAR$JUMP backslash These PARSER commands will cause the contents of the program counter to be printed 10 times. Successive values of 1l usually indicate a hung condition. Other values could indicate a "loop" condition. (See KEEP ALIVE CEASED error message the front "BOOTS" end as is not output, you can try to follows: STEP FUNCTION "\ Access the PARSER prompted with PAR>SET CONSOLE PROG Set PAR>RUN KLINIT KLI--BOOTSTRAP console Load KLI--ENTER DIALOG KLI>BOOT [NO, LOADED YES, AND and to programmer start EXIT, BOOT]? Answering "BOOT" will load the start it. A monitor loaded. from the set mode. STARTED filename to already to the first question bootstrap program and <CR> now want not the KLINIT dialog. This will cause a written out to disk. may if PAR>. /D You scheduler FUNCTION "\ You the appears to you the following the carriage console 6-5 return will core cause dump the to be default from SYSTEM.EXE[1l,4] to be A filename will load a monitor specified file. back to operator mode. SYSTEM 6.1.1.4 Crash Restart the switch to /D SYS:CRASH.EXE. overlays the one the shown the system performed on If first. below, RECOVERY Procedure BOOTS, the another Whenever dump data <crash Therefore, to - PROCEDURES core dump is taken via stored in the system file dump data follows, you preserve a is should and the follow augment second a procedure, crash data programmer when debugging the problem. the CTY while logged in under [1,2]. STEP such as use of following is for The the FUNCTION .COPY XPN:SERnnn.EXE<K055>=SYS:CRASH.EXE This will create a copy of the crash data just dumped and store it in the crash library, usually area [10,1]. nnn is the number of the SER (Software Error Report) .ASSIGN DSK .SYS SYS:CRASH XL LPT Assign form. the LPT SYSTAT.TXT Deassign .PRINT Print If know the value name LPT to the DSK. This causes the SYSTAT program to 1look at the CRASH.EXE file on §SY¥S: and produce a SYSTAT.TXT file on [1,2]. .DEASSIGN you logical in the PC at LPT from DSK. the SYSTAT output the time of the information. crash, you can use a monitor-specific FILDDT to convert it into the alphanumeric symbolic value. To create a monitor-specific FILDDT, use the following procedure: .R FILDDT Run FILDDT FILE:SYSTEM.EXE/S Reply to the prompt with the specific monitor to be examined. (/S loads the symbols from the file specified.) FILE: C Exit to the monitor. .SAVE Save file FDSYS Whenever you want to convert use the following procedure: .R FDSYS FILE:<CR> a PC value into Run FDSYS prompt with want NNNNNNXXXXXX the monitor-specific named FDSYS. Type to 1in followed and and a look the by its FILDDT symbolic as a counterpart, and reply to the FILE: <CR> to indicate that you at the running octal PC an monitor. value underscore (back the program will respond with the symbolic value XxxxXxxX. nnnnnn arrow) a tab SYSTEM 6.1.2 Hardware RECOVERY Errors The most common hardware crash This will cause the system used to bring the problems, you reload system. the system may have 6.1.2.1 Parity Error as result of the monitor, core, be the the explained on 1 - When a parity out are halt. If remain In the running. 1In terminal. of situations error error either The hardware assistance parity parity error in the or that case, occurs ?EXEC in PAR the ERROR or PAR ERR ON CPUn ?1MEM PAR ERR AT yyyyyy ON CPUn ?1MEM PAR ERR AT yyyyyy ON CHANNEL ?nMEM PAR ERRS [prog name] by the 1in SYSTEM? to since enter yyyyyy (TYPE continue the <CR>, the Y by will "BOOTS." Type /D to crash dump. Determine IN the ?MEM [prog FOR a message will to follow are CTY PAR will HALT, sound five then print and name] JOB IN [prog name] 0 zzzzzz ON CPUn FOR JOB IN in which memory bank <CR>») typing system with a OR may prompted get TO monitor be in have load the a ¥Y; been the parity however, seriously monitor error location typed out on the CTY and from the interleaving switches. (See Section 6.1.2.3.) this Section the not bootstrap and vyou occurred memory from selection the and remaining explained 6.1.2.2.) monitor. Fill out logbook. a Case Memory Parity 2 - When a parity one of the 1is damaged. Deselect the memory which had the error and reconfigure the memories. (The deselection and reconfiguration procedure is Reload the user messages: FOR JOB will in in question: attempt recommended FROM error monitor, HALT ?0MEM below arise occurs occurs steps merely Monitor following you the cases for distinct 1If the can other Service two error. operator Error out CONTINUE If There up. Field of followed You the result of a memory parity error. stop. The procedure below should be back call parity may your Parity print one - a is to below. Case bells, to system will system printed PROCEDURES Parity Error error following Error in User occurs in messages (PAR) form and make five bells an entry in the sounded and Core user is core, printed on the CTY: are SYSTEM At RECOVERY ?0MEM PAR ERR ON CPUn ?1MEM PAR ERR AT yyyyyy ON CPUn ?1MEM PAR ERR AT yyyyyy CHANNEL ?nMEM PAR ERRS [prog name] this point, the FROM FOR JOB PROCEDURES ON yyyyyy system is IN TO [prog name] FOR JOB IN name] O zzzzzz still [prog ON running CPUn and FOR you JOB IN should proceed as follows: l. If the program name jobs, such as that particular 2. Fill out a 3. Determine PAR the that typed BATCON, job. form and memory out OPSER, make bank an in was one LPTSPL, entry which in the Use the location typed out on the memory selection and interleaving of the PTPSPL, operator etc., the logbook. parity error restart occurred. CTY and the switches. setting of the (See Section in same memory the If users not, 6.1.2.3.) 4, 1If this is the second parity error the a 4-hour period, use SEND ALL to inform system will be reloaded in 15 minutes. system continue running. 5. At the specified time, stop reconfigure the remaining reload the system. the system, memories (See deselect Section the within that 1let the the memory, 6.1.2.2), and NOTE Under certain conditions, portions of can be dynamically deselected via the SET MEMORY OFF-LINE command. These conditions are specified in the section describing the command in Appendix A. memory 6.1.2.2 an error Altering Your Memory Configuration message will indicate that whole module is unusable due to certain conditions you can merely let the have system to stop continue the module, and Setting Memory Off-line The reload the described three of MEMORY in the n TO in Appendix A, following If this reconfigure of isn't memory a may be times memory when module possible, without the you will affected command: OFF-LINE detail portion system. operator-privileged SET There or a parity or other problems. Under set a portion of memory off-line and processing. system, - a FROM conditions m can are be met: used providing that all SYSTEM l. 2. The memory the resident After the When off-line memory 1is does not off-line, of "Reasonable amount" depends SET Consult MEMORY Memory above contain the there memory system on left any an OFF-LINE that was conditions set cannot will for portion command off-line be still user installation's of 1is is met, a the not interleaved. memory that is good (If and on usage this. successful, not be programs. of administrator The memory to be set off-line 1is interleaved memory 1is set off-line, usable will also be placed off-line.) the the set amount continues. If be PROCEDURES monitor. reasonable system. 3. to RECOVERY the system referenced. proceed to reconfiguring memories. Reconfiguring Memories ACTION If the any bad part two memory of monitor, EXPLANATION the skip the Memory occupied by the resident monitor cannot be set off-line. next steps. Set bad memory line. However, job contains resident can memory, off- if run without do make the succeed; not You are going to attempt an shutdown in preparation for figuring memory modules. no try that orderly recon- to command skip the next step. Stop timesharing. See Section 4.1.2.1 for the operator-privileged OPSER command KSYS to stop timesharing at a specified time. Allow enough time for those jobs complete their Type ~\ on the CTY. Invoke the that can run processing. RSX-20F command to language PARSER. PAR>SET CONSOLE MAINTENANCE PAR>RESET The first command changes console mode to allow you the second causes a command master which reset of the to issue in turn the KL processor. Reconfigure memories. Deselect lower the bound switches) to bad memory, addresses get check the (MADR contiguous memory, and correctly set the interleave switches. (See Section 6.1.2.3.) Reload the monitor 6.1.2.3 Refer Memory Selection and sequentially assigned octal five memories note that they would be must be to Interleaving Section - 3.3.1. Memories are selected or numbers beginning with 0. For example, numbered 0,1,2,3 and 4. It 1is important to numbered or selected sequentially. 6-9 SYSTEM This numbering of memories RECOVERY PROCEDURES effectively indicates the beginning memory address or lower bound address for a particular memory. In the example above, if each memory had a capacity of 32K, memory 0 would start with address 0, memory 1 with address 100000 (a 1 in bit 20), memory 4 with address 400000 (a 1 in bit 18). Memories system are run In memories pairs or normally interleaved because interleaving makes the faster. other fours rotate between would be than MGl0s such that memories. between In units number 4 operating alone. memories, for example, the and MH1l0s this consecutive the 0 example and 1, means memory and that they addresses above, between 2-way 2 and work in alternate or 1interleaving 3, with memory 1In the case of 4-way interleaving with nine sets 0-3 and 4-7 would each be interleaved, with 10 (octal) operating alone. Only memories of the same size and with consecutive addresses starting with an even numbered memory can be interleaved. For example, 2-way interleaving can exist between memories 0 and 1 but not between 1 and 2; 4-way interleaving can exist between 0,1,2, and 3 but not between 1,2,3, and 4. Interleaving in MGl0s and MH10s 1is somewhat different. For MG1lO0s 2-way 1interleaving 1is available within a single cabinet and 4-way interleaving between two cabinets. However, the units or <cabinets must still contain equal amounts of storage. For MH1l0s, either 2-way or 4-way interleaving is available within a single cabinet. The panel selection, containing the and inside door of memory. MF10 Memory In an each octal the the switches that control 1interleaving of memories is located front controls the interleaving and one switch deselects the memory. To deselect an memory, the operator should put all four position. The address switch settings of identical in any one memory. an the MF1l0 there are four groups of identical switches, one group for port. Each group has a set of seven switches that determine the number of the memory to be selected. There is also one switch in each group that group that selects or If number ing, MF10 memory is being used with 5.06, and you deselect a bank numbered one, you must renumber the a in each entire select switches into the DES all selected groups must be version of of memory memories to TOPS-10 earlier other than eliminate than the highest the hole. If after deselecting a memory, in the case of a 2-way interleave, an even number of memories remain, they will all be interleaved. If there 1s an odd number of memories, all but the last, or high order, memory will be to (no the NORM interleaved. The interleaving) high order memory should be switched position. Example: The system configuration consists of 0-11. Memory number 5 is deselected. memory now be (odd) . number 11 switched to become to The following table MF10-As (32K each) up number 5. 12 the NORM position indicates 256K. the to (octal) The operator Memory number because switch it memories would now 10 is settings the numbered reselect (octal) must ninth memory for numbering SYSTEM MF10-A (32K) RECOVERY PROCEDURES Table 6-1 Address Memory MADR Memory Address MF10 No. 14 15 16 Switch Settings switches 17 18 19 20 000000 0777717 0 0 0 O 0 O 0 0 100000 177777 1 0 0 0 O 0 O 1 200000 277777 2 0 0 O 0 O 1 0 300000 377777 3 0 0 O 0 O 1 1 400000 477777 4 0 0 O 0 1 0 0 500000 577777 5 0 0 O 0 1 0 1 600000 677777 6 0 0 O 0 1 1 0 700000 777777 7 0 0 O 0 1 1 1 The following table MF10-Gs (64K each) up MF10-G 1indicates 512K. the switch (64K) Table 6-2 Memory Address MADR Memory Address settings for numbering to MF10 No. Switch Settings switches 14 15 16 17 1IGN 18 19 0000000 0177777 0 0 0 0 0 IGN O 0 0200000 0377777 1 0 0 0 0 IGN O 1 0400000 0577777 2 0 0 0 0 IGN 1 0 0600000 0777777 3 0 0 0 0 IGN 1 1 1000000 1177777 4 0 0 0 1 IGN 0 0 1200000 1377777 5 0 0 0 1 IGN O 1 1400000 160G000 1577777 6 0 0 0 0 IGN 7 0 0 1 1777777 1 IGN 1 1 1 The following noninterleaved table indicates and interleaved MF1l0 the switch settings operation. Table 6-3 Interleave Switch Settings MADR switches Mode 34 35 Normal 2-way NORM NORM NORM INTL 4-way INTL INTL on 0 an MFl0 for SYSTEM MG10 and MH10 RECOVERY PROCEDURES Memories In an MG10 or MH10, there is only one group of seven switches used to number the memory, but there are eight switches to determine port selection, because there are eight ports per memory. Each port switch can be set for either the KI/KL or KA processor, or the port can be deselected. There are also switches that enable the deselection of specific banks of memory. The initial bank switch settings for various memory sizes are given in the table below. MG1l0 and MH10 6-4 Table Memory Bank Selection Memory Bank Switches ON LINE MO M1 M2 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 MG10 MH10 Memory Memory M3 Size Size 0 0 1 32K 64K 128K 64K 128K 256K 0=0OFF LINE (deselected) 1=ON LINE (selected) If a hardware problem arises, any bank can be deselected by setting a bank switch OFF LINE. Deselected banks are logically placed into the highest core in the cabinet, while other previously higher portions are pushed down, so that no hole appears in the address base within a cabinet. Also, interleaving switches may have to be reset. For example, a 128K cabinet with 32K deselected cannot be 4-way interleaved with another 128K cabinet. The following table indicates the memory address switch settings for numbering MG10 and MH10 memories of various sizes. Note that the lower bound address or beginning address of an MGl0 memory can only be 0 or a multiple of 32K and that of an MH10 memory can only be 0 or a multiple of 64K. MG10-A (32K) 6-5 Table Memory Address Switch Settings MADR Switches Memory Address 000000 100000 200000 300000 400000 500000 600000 700000 - 077777 277777 277777 377777 477777 577777 677777 777777 Memory No. 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 O o O O O o O O 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 O 0 O O O 0 o0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 o0 1 1 ©0 1 O 1 0O 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 o0 0 SYSTEM RECOVERY Table MG1l0-G or MH10-G (64K) 6-5 PROCEDURES (Cont.) Memory Address Switch Settings MADR Switches Memory Address Memory No. 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 0000000 0177777 0 o 0 0 0 0 0 O 0200000 0400000 0600000 0377777 0577777 0777777 1 2 3 o o o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 o 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 1000000 1200000 1400000 1600000 1177777 1377777 1577777 1777777 4 5 6 7 o o o o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 O O O 0 MG10-H or (128K) MH10-H Memory Address MADR Memory Address Switch Settings Switches Memory NoO. 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 0000000 0400000 1000000 0377777 0777777 1377777 0 1 2 o o o o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 o0 1 0 0 0 0 0O O o0 1400000 2000000 2400000 3000000 3400000 1777777 2377777 2777777 3377777 3777777 3 4 5 6 7 o o o o o 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 O O O O O MH10-L (256K) 1 1 Memory Address Switch Settings MADR Switches Memory Address 0000000 1000000 2000000 3000000 4000000 5000000 6000000 7000000 Memory No. 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 o o o o o o o o 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 O O 0 O O 0 O O on an 0777777 1777777 2777777 3777777 4777777 5777777 6777777 7777777 Table 6-6 indicates the interleaved and switch noninterleaved settings operation. Table MG1l0 and MH10 6-6 Interleave Switch Settings MADR Switches Mode MG1l0 34 35 Normal NORM NORM 2-way 4-way NORM INTL INTL INTL 6-13 or MH10 for SYSTEM Note RECOVERY PROCEDURES that any MG1l0 or MH10 can be 2-way interleaved, any MH10 1interleaved, and any two consecutively numbered MGl0's 4-way size (word storage) can be 4-way 4-way interleave two 96K MGlO0's, 96K MG1l0 256K. must indicate a lower can be of equal interleaved, with one provision. To the MADR switch settings of the first bound address of 0 or a multiple of It is imperative that the operator become proficient in this procedure of numbering, selecting, and interleaving memories. Needless system downtime may result from operator ineptness in this task. 6.1.3 The Environmental causes of Errors environmental fluctuations, power accidental spills, detectable before crashes outages, are varied. temperature mechanical <cause shocks, etc. the system to they failure of the air conditioning system would be temperature. Others, like power failures, will Whenever possible, these conditions can power Power up and failures fluctuations you are <can Some 1include power water leaks, of these are For example, a crash. noticed by the rise in occur without warning. should perform an orderly shutdown 1if any imminent. When the situation is rectified, reload and They extremes, the be of you system. classified prolonged 1into outages. two These categories: are discussed short separately below. 1In either situation, a power failure detection circuit senses the 1mpending conditions and initiates a power failure interrupt. This interrupt triggers the operation of a program that saves the PC, flags, mode processor. of time. equipment, shutdown. 6.1.3.1 information, and fast memory This allows the system to be registers; it then halts the restarted in a minimum amount strategically placed within the Temperature sensors, detect high temperature conditions This, also, initiates the power failure Power Fluctuation - Power fluctuations and cause power interrupt sequence. are variations in line voltage that occur over a short space of time. Although the power is not lost completely, the system will probably go through an automatic restart procedure. If the restart is unsuccessful, do the following: 1. Check the disk retracted. attempt 2. Check to all they load the other the unit. fails notify 3. drives If and have visually not, that Field the heads Service and have do not system. equipment to make If not, attempt Field Service. to sure that power up there the is power unit. If to this If necessary, reload the monitor. (Refer to Section 3.3.1). If the monitor won't 1load, check the various controllers; clear them if necessary (see the System Reference Manual 1in the Software Notebooks), and try If this still fails, notify your 6.1.3.2 ensure notify Power completely. Outage You - must A power now outage take to reload the supervisor. means that precautionary the steps monitor again. power drops before the out power SYSTEM RECOVERY PROCEDURES comes back on. pieces of The sudden surge of power may prove harmful to certain equipment. Turn the START/STOP switch on all disk pack drives to the STOP position and visually ensure that the heads have retracted completely. I1f they have the drives. POWERING THE not, notify Field Service and do not SYSTEM DOWN AND attempt to power up UP Most of the system hardware can be powered down or up by pressing the POWER switch on the console. However, all pieces of hardware to be controlled in such manner must have their LOCAL/REMOTE switch 1in the REMOTE 6.2 position during operation. FRONT-END PROCESSOR RECOVERY categories two 1into fall front-end processors The DECsystem-10 The console/diagnostic front-end takes care of usage. to according The diagnostics. system and interface system operator the <care of local and remote stations and take front-ends communication terminals. the on also Front-end error recovery is based not only on usage but The console/diagnostic and the KL processor. to interface of type 1interface integrated data the use DN87S communications front-ends The DC75NP, DN85, and memory and I1/0 buses. the access to (DTE20) to DN87 communications front ends use the DL10 communications channel connect to the memory and I/0O buses. error Front-end recovery will be discussed under the following headings: 6.2.1 1. Console/Diagnostic Front End 2. DTE20-Interfaced Communications Front Ends 3. DL10-Interfaced Communications Front Ends. Console/Diagnostic Front End Whenever the KL processor senses that the console front end 1is not alive" count not being incremented), it checks to see ("keep running ends front of reloading automatic if DTELDR is running and if the a switch function of DTELDR, the 1is /AUTO effect. 1in 1is (/AUTO) processor program that dumps and loads front ends connected to the KL via a DTE20 interface. If DTELDR is running and /AUTO 1is 1in effect, the KL processor front-end loader program. appropriate the activates electronically Also, unless you include the /NODUMP switch in the DTELDR command, the memory is dumped to a file DSK:DTEDOO.BIN (.B0O, .BOl, etc. front-end 1in The front-end bootstrap is then loaded and for successive dumps). The KL processor then ensures that the RSX-20F monitor. loads turn, the front end is running by checking the "keep alive" count. as To enable the automatic reloading of the console front end as well OPR.ATO your to job following the add ends, front communications any file: 6-15 SYSTEM : SLOG :DEF ;1o0g DTE= DTE-R DTELDR DTE-/AUTO If the auto-reload stopped [1,2] running, and .R RECOVERY bring up ;load the ;start it can the is DTELDR subjob the not run name DTELDR with enabled, from front end ;1load DTE program the DTELDR console * /RELOAD: 0 a 1t feature you in ;give PROCEDURES auto-reload or if any as the option DTE terminal subjob logged in has under follows: DTELDR ;reload the console front DTELDR program end (always on DTE 0) A complete your description console if you of the answer the DTELDR switches prompt with: Front Ends will be typed at */HELP 6.2.2 DTE20-Interfaced Communications Whenever the KL processor senses that a communications front end on a DTE 1interface is not running, it checks to see if automatic reloading of front ends (/AUTO) is in effect. /AUTO is a switch function of DTELDR, If the /AUTO front a switch 2, 1load or Default number unique that effect, a in dumps the KL default the file. files are loads DTE processor 1load DTELDR dump and file. command, interfaced automatically Also, the front unless you reloads the include front-end memory the 1s dumped DTE number \ named DSK:DTELOn.BIN where n is the dump files are named DSK:DTEDOn.BIN where n is again 1, 2, or 3. Successive dumps of the same front-end file that ends. 3. Enabling to in from default Default l, is end /NODUMP to program extensions the for /AUTO the of .B00, function console for front .B01l, .B02, the are DTE given etc. communications end. The OPR.ATO front end that front ends is identical subjob: :SLOG :DEF DTE= DTE-R DTELDR DTE-/AUTO will If automatically the auto-load terminal procedures. logged reload feature 1in any is under not crashes. in effect, you can [1,2] and have a run DTELDR choice of from any restart SYSTEM RECOVERY PROCEDURES srun .R DTELDR DTELDR :reload the front end on DTE 2 with the * /RELOAD: 2 sprogram in file DSK:DTELOZ2:BIN (default sname) or: *DTA3:COMSYS.BIN/RELOAD:1/NODUMP sreload the front end on DTE 1 with the file DECtape drive 3. Do not take +COMSYS.BIN on sa front-end memory dump. A complete description of the DTELDR program switches will be typed at vour console if you answer the DTELDR prompt with: * /HELP DL10-interfaced Communications Front Ends 6.2.3 or Whenever a DL10-interfaced front end such as a DC75NP, DN85, crashes, DN87 an error message such as: $3$PDP-11 NUMBER n IS NOT RUNNING or: $$PDP-11 NUMBER n IS HALTED AT will appear on your console. DL10 and 4-7 for the second, pcC 0-3 for the first n is the port number: pc is the address of the halt in if any. your and BOOTll is a DL10 load and The program to dump S5YS: the on available this made have wusually will programmer The following DL10-interfaced command sequence front ends. sload .R BOOTI11 be can used to dump and system area. reload in BOOTI11 FILE:/DUMP/PORTNO:p ;dump entire memory of the PDP-1l1 on port p. FILE:DN87.BIN/CLEAR/START/PORTNO:p sclear memory of PDP-11 on port p and load sand start the program from the file +DSK:DN87.BIN[1,2]. BOOT1l requires that a port number be explicitly entered if more than one port in the there is system. The default file descriptor for a load operation 1is: DSK:PDPXIp.BIN[self] and for a dump operation: DSK:PDPXIp.LST([self] where p is the port number. For additional information on BOOT1ll switches refer to the BOOTI11 specification in the Software Notebooks and the SYS:BOOT1ll.HLP file. BOOT11 reports its progress as follows: 6-17 SYSTEM RECOVERY "PDP-11 DUMPING PDP-11 memory "PDP-11 DUMPED into DECsystem-10 "CLEARING "PDP-11 PDP-11 LOADING a PDP-11 memory PDP-11 1is file "PDP-11 "PDP-11 6.3 LOADED The DX10 memory DATA data and systems. processor CHANNEL is being an DX10 being zeroed. loaded with problems arise provides contains you and binary input PDP-11 1is memory. own a direct access part the PDP-8 first of and power the PDP-8 to TU70 the must load up the channel should KL DECsystem-10 series you service maintenance has been performed. The reload the DX10 automatically after a crash. If formatted data. 1integrated whenever dumped file. RECOVERY channel 1s The being Loading is complete; now executing in its STARTED DX10 is PROCEDURES magnetic or halt, vyou to data this after field or processor tape reload will will usually receive a message: 3¥3TAPE where x MTA, MTB. CONTROLLER specifies First, you BOOTDX program .R should as the MTXx If a take a dump disk the ; load During the You descriptor area. For will record dump the the error channel, conditions. e.qg., Use the BOOTDX a dump is omitted as in be placed into a additional BOOTDX.RNO the to ;request memory files attached follows: BOOTDX file OFF-LINE controller FILE:/D PDP-8 IS and operation the above default information on the example, the dump of file, DXMPA.LSD, on your BOOTDX program, refer to BOOTDX.HLP. you will receive the following being dumped messages on CTY: "DX10 dumping "DX-10 dumped can now reload ; PDP-8 memory ;dumping the DX10 .R BOOTDX FILE:SYS:/C/S data has 1is completed channel using BOOTDX ;1f not already loaded s1load the default file as follows: DXMPA.BIN from the ;system disk after setting all of PDP-8 ;memory to HALT instructions. Then start at soctal 200. During the messages at clearing the "Clearing and 1loading, you will receive the following TTY: DX-10 ; PDP-8 memory "DX-10 loading ; PDP-8 1s "DX-10 loaded ; PDP-8 has "DX-10 started ;PDP-8 1is 1is being being now to all HALTs. loaded. completed 6-18 set loading. executing in its own memory. CHAPTER DEVICE It is your 7 OPERATION important that you know how to operate the peripheral devices on system and how to keep these devices in their best possible condition. Because most equipment operates more efficiently if it is kept clean, a cleaning procedure 1is included with each device section. This chapter discusses the operating and cleaning procedures for those devices Here most are commonly found on general rules for some DECsystem-10s. cleaning: The computer room should be kept as neat and clean as should have the following cleaning supplies available. l. 91% 2. Lint-free 3. Spray 4. Vacuum cleaner has 5. isopropyl possible. You 1intake and alcohol wipers cleaner rubber or Cotton-tipped that can blow plastic air as well as air attachments applicators You should clean the exterior of all equipment weekly. Vacuum outside surfaces including cabinet tops. Use spray cleaner on vertically exposed surfaces except around switches. all all In general, do not clean the interior of any equipment wunless so directed in the following sections. Your field service representative does that job. Specific instructions for cleaning line printers and magnetic tape drives are given in the sections covering those devices. Always be careful not to bump or change the position of any switches; this «could <cause a crash. Likewise, when vyou are cleaning the exterior of any disk drives, be careful not to Jjar the equipment; this could cause Lastly, if you operation of or service 7.1 a serious hardware head crash. ever have any problem or doubts concerning the a cleaning procedure for a device, consult your field representative. LINE PRINTER Some of the procedures below refer to an LP07 1line 7-1) and some refer to an LP1l0 line printer (Figure follow the procedures for the appropriate printer. 7-1 printer 7-2). Be (Figure sure to DEVICE OPERATION Figure 7-1 LP07 Line Printer DEVICE Figure 7-2 OPERATION LP10 L ine Pr inter DEVICE Changing 7.1.1 LPO07 The OPERATION Forms Procedure following adjustment procedure on an describes LP07 line forms printer. installation, (Refer to alignment, Figures 7-1, and 7-3, and switch 1lit). to 7-4.) If the printer is place the printer Lift the Unlatch printer and running, press the START/STOP in STOP mode (RUN indicator not window. fully open the band gate and ribbon mask. WARNING Wait until the proceeding to the If necessary, tractors. Unlock reposition Make the Charaband next step. sure upper that and stops the upper they are 1lower rotating and still tractor before 1lower 1left vertically 1locks on forms aligned. the right tractors. Open all Insert and tractor the close left the edge of pressure plates. the form the upper right tractor hand form feed holes and upper right Insert form in the upper left tractor plate. Slide to close a the position beneath pressure the plate. right Lock the tractor. Loosen the paper tension control (least tension). 10. pressure in tension to 1its the lower <control extreme left 1lock and set the paper counterclockwise position tractor and close the pressure plate. 11. 12, Slide the lower right tractor hand form feed holes and lower right Adjust the to close a position the beneath pressure the plate. right Lock the tractor. paper tension control clockwise to achieve proper vertical form tension. Proper tension occurs when there is a slight deformation of the top edge of the form feed holes. Tighten the paper tension lock. 13. Press the TOP OF FORM switch on the operator control panel. 14, Rotate the paper feed clutch clockwise to the ADJ position and use the paper advance adjustment control to position the form at the first line of print. Use the hammer faces as a print-line guide. Return the clutch to the RUN position. You can use the vertical paper position control to fine adjustment of wvertical position. This necessary when using pre-printed forms. 7-4 obtain 1is a often DEVICE 15. Close 16. Rotate the horizontal paper position control form horizontally; use the horizontal forms on the 17. Set 18. Close 19. Press latch the ribbon mask the form ribbon mask. assembly thickness control the band gate the TOP OF is feeding and FORM Replenishing printer switch to align the alignment scale reference. the form being loaded. window. several through switch times the to place to ensure that the tractors. the printer in RUN mode Forms are merely replenishing different for to match correctly Press the START/STOP (RUN indicator 1lit). 20. If you and OPERATION form, proceed 1. Lift the 2. Unlatch as printer and the form supply and not changing to a follows: window. fully open the band gate and ribbon mask. WARNING Wait until proceeding Open all Insert the to tractor the new page and all tractor Charaband the next pressure form, aligning pressure Close and latch the Close the band gate Press the START/STOP (RUN indicator 1lit). rotating before plates. overlapping the stops step. the old one by at least two at the page perforations. one Close plates. ribbon mask. and printer switch window. to place the printer in RUN mode HIMOT HOLOW d3ddn 9Inbrd €-L ,L0dT 1aded uot3lerTe3lsul | AIHMENHL 4OSN3S |H d3dVdNOILISOd H3dVdNOILOW TV.LNOZIHOH DEVICE OPERATION SHOAL0OVv7H1l NOogIY DEVICE OPERATION PAPER TENSION CONTROL LOCK FORMS THICKNESS ', CONTROL VERTICAL PAPER PAPER TENSION | CONTROL POSITION CONTROL HORIZONTAL PAPER - | POSITION CONTROL CLUTCH LEVER 6/8 LINES PER INCH CONTROL AND ENTRY SWITCHES Figure 7-4 LP07 Forms Alignment DEVICE LP10 OPERATION Procedure The following procedure describes forms installation, adjustment on an LP1l0 line printer. (Refer to Figures Press the ON/OFF LINE indicator Lift the Using printer the LINE not switch to set alignment, and 7-2 and 7-5.) the printer off line (ON the drum 1lit). window. drum gate latch, unlatch and fully open gate. WARNING Wait you for the character drum to stop rotating before proceed. Be sure that the proper vertical format tape has been mounted on the vertical format unit (refer to Section 7.1.2). Press the TOP-OF-FORM switch. Set the copies control lever Be 1lower sure the upper and to match 1left the form being used. tractors are vertically aligned. Rotate the fine adjustment thumbwheels completely on both the upper and lower right tractors. Unlock the wupper tractors and move and them 10. Open 11. Place the left close the pressure 12, all tractor 1lower to the pressure edge of the tracter 1locks extreme right. clockwise on the right plates. form in the upper left tractor and plate. Position the upper right tractor of the tractor feed pins to the to allow precise alignment form-feed holes in the form, Lock the upper plate over the close right form. tractor and the tractor pressure I13IHMENNH nNid 1ININLSNLrav T33IHMENNHL , INIA INIWLSNradv 3dV.Ll NOILISOd 13 HMEN HL TTVLVIINOLZHIIHAOH1V4I3NdHVOd4 d3aAI T V I O I L H I A d 3 d V d TOHLNOD gON>I S31d0J TOHLNOD TIHN3dIvNdLSdNArIaHvA3FHMANHL dO1l0VHL1l .HdO10:VAHLFlHMENAHL H3dvdN|OISN3L HO3NdIVXvdO0NTOIdSON3ML HOLOVHL °InbI|dG-/OTdT13\dedHuOoLTO3VHe.TLRISUI3IHMENHHOLLO-1 VHLMO0 anNtd INIANLSNrav HM 1O1OVHL30 7 ) DEVICE OPERATION DEVICE 13. 14. Loosen the paper tension locking knob and turn tension control knob completely counterclockwise. the Place close the pressure 15. OPERATION form in the 1lower left the lower and the | Position the lower right tractor of the tractor feed pins to the Lock tractor plate. paper right tractor, to allow precise form-feed holes in and close the alignment the form. tractor pressure plate. 16. Turn the paper tension control knob <clockwise wuntil the proper paper tension exists; this occurs when a slight deformation of the top edge of the form-feed holes 1in the form is noticed. Tighten the paper tension locking knob. 17. Rotate lower the fine adjustment thumbwheel on both the upper and right tractors until proper horizontal paper tension exists. The tension deformation of the 1is <correct when there 1is a right edge of the form-feed holes slight in the form. 18. Mount the forms alignment scale (located area, right side) across the hammer bank oins located on special castings at both in the paper storage area using the dowel sides of the hammer bank. 19. Using the horizontal paper position thumbwheel, move the form horizontally until the first print column on the form corresponds to the first column on the forms alignment scale. 20. Move the paper feed clutch lever (located to the right of the vertical format unit) to the ADJUST position. Using the paper drive adjustment thumbwheel, adjust the form vertically until the first print line of the form is aligned with the forms alignment scale print line. 21. Remove the forms alignment scale, scabbard (paper storage area, right 22. Move the paper feed clutch lever-to the RUN position. 23. Close and latch 24. Close the printer 25. 'Check the paper tension by pressing the several times and ensuring that the paper from the tractor feed pins. 26. Press the ON/OFF LINE LINE indicator 1lit). Replenishing If you form, the drum l. Lift 1it 1in the gate. window. switch to set TOP-OF-FORM switch does not pull loose the printer on-line changing a (ON Forms are merely replenishing proceed and replace side). as the forms follows: printer window. and not to different DEVICE 2. Using the drum gate OPERATION latch, unlatch and fully open the drum gate. WARNING Wait you 3. Open 4. all 1Insert character drum pressure plates. the new and all tractor form, the pressure two at stop rotating before 6. Close 7. Press the printer the ON/OFF indicator Controlling the the o0ld the page one least set the at one Close window. LINE switch to printer on-line (ON 1lit). Vertical Format Unit Procedure LP07 line printer has a direct by 143-line bit represent the punched holes control access software counterpart vertical format unit is 8-channel matrix. 1in vertical format of a carriage loaded with a The the ON printer (6 or 8 Information is contained To generate standard bits 1in corresponding on also provides for the software lines per inch) as well as for (DAVFU) this paper matrix carriage the in control of the operator control generating, the files: storing, and loading of MAKVFU.DOC and MAKVFU.HLP. a default matrix line printer carriage MAKVFU that corresponds tape Load for the to channels 1-8 proceed as MAKVFU *EXIT a custom commands as matrix, described load below. MAKVFU the print via a matrices of the follows: program. matrix 1s generated DSK:NORMAL.VFU on your Return to the monitor. generate is DAVFU LPl10, If » this the *QUTPUT MAKVFU unit control tape. The file containing an tape. The LP07 density switch. To by perforations. plates. Close and latch the drum gate. that 1is the direct access .R to overlapping aligning 5. 7.1.2 The the tractor page LINE LP0O7 for proceed. only and command, give and disk the the default 1is stored area. as appropriate DEVICE OPERATION Command CHANNEL n Function ALL Set all channel CHANNEL n Set BOTTOM n EVERY m (n last channel CHANNEL 1lines n. Set 1in 1line n. (n every m-th n LINES ml m2 Set ... lines ml, 1in n TOP Set line n. (n EXIT Exit FORMS Clear 1 in (n = m2, all forms this file INFORMATION Display a brief file, including break, OUTPUT dev:file.ext[p,pn] automatic LP10 in loading Section of channel a for 143). or channel the description channel physical - channels. equal n. terminal. to of the lines n. page size to Length must be page be x. greater size. the print density (lines per (y = 0, 6, or 8 where 0 means switch setting.) Generate a binary VFU file with the specified name. If the argument 1is omitted, the default is DSK:NORMAL.VFU z LPTSPL page m2... setting. the = user an area. Define the (z 1 = than The = description of the VFU length, page size, forms 1 on PAGE LPI on (x Define inch) . manual vy (ml for for (m physical page for Define than LPI and Display defined x in =1,2,...8) break Display LENGTH page from MAKVFU. HELP n for 1,2,...8) in physical break INFORMATION page =1,2,...8) forms n for physical etc. Define FORMS 1logical line for channel n. (n =1,2;,...1length) CHANNEL page =1,2,...8) channel n. l1,2,...1length) CHANNEL 1logical =1,2,...8) or logical - 143.) equal appropriate to DAVFU page Page size size to must be be z. less length. file is discussed under 4.5.1. Procedure To make of 11 a standard 1inch paper carriage with control tape lines of for vertical printing format per control 1inch, do the punch 12 following: 1. Obtain a manualchannel carriage or machine-operated control tapes. 7-12 punch made to DEVICE 2. Obtain a carriage control tape with feed numbered 1 through 12, and lines numbered 0 In this case, the tape loop accommodates two 3. Align line 4. the tape in the Using Table and punch 7-1 a as hole Standard Form 1 punch, so that you holes, channels at least 135. forms. to begin punching 0. line. Line OPERATION Form Line LP10 a in guide, proceed line by line on the tape, for each of the channels indicated on a Table 7-1 Printer Line Carriage Tape 2 Channels Punched 00 66 1-2-3-4-5-6-7-8-9-10-11-12 01 67 5-8 02 638 3-5-8 03 69 4-5-8 04 70 3-5-8 05 71 5-8-9 06 72 3-4-5-8 07 73 5-8 08 74 3-5-8 09 75 4-5-8 10 76 3-5-6-8-9 11 77 5-8 12 78 3-4-5-8 13 79 5-8 14 80 3-5-8 15 81 4-5-8-9-10 16 82 3-5-8 17 83 5-8 18 84 3-4-5-8 19 85 5-8 20 86 3-5-6-7-8-9 21 87 4-5-8 22 88 3-5-8 23 89 5-8 24 90 3-4-5-8 25 91 5-8-9-11 26 92 3-5-8 27 93 4-5-8 28 94 3-5-8 29 95 5-8 30 96 2-3-4-5-6-8-9-10 31 32 97 98 5-8 3-5-8 DEVICE Table OPERATION 7-1 (Cont.) Standard LPl0 Line Printer Carriage Tape Form 1 Line Form Line 2 Channels Punched 33 34 35 99 100 101 4-5-8 3-5-8 5-8-9 36 37 38 102 103 104 3-4-5-8 5-8 3-5-8 39 40 41 105 106 107 4-5-8 3-5-6-7-8-9-12 5-8 42 43 44 108 109 110 3-4-5-8 5-8 3-5-8 45 46 47 111 112 113 4-5-8-9-10 3-5-8 5-8 114 115 116 3-4-5-8 5-8 3-5-6-8-9-11 51 52 53 117 118 119 4-5-8 3-5-8 5-8 54 55 56 120 121 122 3-4-5-8 5-8-9 3-5-8 57 58 59 123 124 125 4-5-8 3-5-8 5-8 60 61 62 126 127 128 5 5 5 63 64 65 129 5 130 5 131 5 48 49 50 - DEVICE OPERATION 5. After you have punched all the lines through 131, cut the tape at line 135. Spread some rubber cement between lines 129 and 135. Place line 0 over line 132. Keeping the feed holes aligned, press the ends of the tape together. 6. Repunch the 7. Set printer 8. Lift the the clears 9. holes tape the covered by off-line, loop and reader sprocket the overlapped open handle so the tape. printer that the cover. sprocket shoe teeth. Place the tape over the tape loop reader capstan feed holes are over the sprocket teeth. Be sure 12 of the tape is toward your left as you are front of the line printer. 10. Close the tape loop reader. to the drive sprocket while in place. 11. Press TOP-OF-FORM. The tape should halt with star wheel just beyond the TOP-OF-FORM hole. 12. Align 13. Close the printer forms vertically. so that the that channel facing the Be sure the tape stays attached you clamp the drive sprocket shoe (Refer the channel 1 to Section 7.1.1.) cover. The standard LP10 carriage tape causes the vertical actions shown 1in Table 7-2. Channels 1-8 are used by system software, and channels 9-12 are used by diagnostic programs. DEVICE Standard Channel Table 7-2 Line Printer LP10 Vertical 1 Top of 2 Space 3 Double OPERATION Vertical Action Action form half a page (30 lines) space with automatic top of form after 30 with automatic top of form after 20 impressions 4 Triple space impressions 5 Single can space be (Channel specified 5 is for the the only last channel 6 lines that of the after 60 page.) 6 Space one sixth 7 Spéce one third of a page (20 lines) 8 Single space of with a page (10 lines) automatic top of form of (5 lines) (15 lines) impressions A Space one twelfth 10 Space one fourth 11 Space 25 lines 12 Space 40 lines programmer what a 9 wanting channels tape tape to loop need least Changing If print the LP0O07 or punched whatever ten and inches Reversing quality reverse nonstandard be accommodate at 7.1.3 change a to the isn't as of a page page carriage on each number in a of control line. Be forms are tape sure must that needed to you may tell you you punch make the circumference. the Ribbon good as it should be, need to ribbon. Procedure The following procedure describes line printer. (Refer Figqures l. 2. to Lift the operator circuit breaker to Lift the gate leaving printer the how 7-1, panel the ribbon access OFF window; to change the ribbon 7-3, and 7-6.) cover position. wunlatch mask and against and fully the set open forms. on an the the LPO07 POWER band 3dino dvd -‘HOSN3S . 3aino4vg ANVEVHVHD NOgIYNOILISOdu2InobWTOdLqO9g-LNOgLa0lddTyUOTIRTRISUI NOgIYSV HOLOW Nogaly43010H|NOgIY43070H v DEVICE NdOOd1d OPERATION . . T7-17 DEVICE OPERATION WARNING Wait until the proceeding to the Using to plastic the gloves, Charaband next step. grasp right until the ribbon completely stops the ribbon ribbon cores rotating rolls are before and free force of the them ribbon motors. Pull the the ribbon Remove unless the wrapping new and you ribbon are free of the reversing from its any protective band gate. Discard it. box and cardboard remove the plastic collars. Hold the ribbon cores with the fully wound core above the other so the ribbon will unwind from the underside of the ribbon core when installed. Force the right end of the upper ribbon core against the top floating ribbon holder, align the left end with the fixed ribbon holder, and allow the spring tension to lock the core into position. Unwind the other ribbon core over the Charaband. Position the lower ribbon ribbon holders in the same manner. Ensure that the slots engaged by the ribbon Ensure that ribbon. 10. Close 11. Set the the operator 12, band POWER ribbon gate position sensor printer window. and circuit panel ends of the guide pins. breaker access to Some listings the follows: the Lift the operator circuit breaker to 2. Lift the gate leaving printer the ON ribbon cores covered position on, press RUN mode. are by and the close unlatch mask the START/STOP (RUN indicator half of the forms. To you can reverse the ribbon panel access cover the OFF position. window; not in have more print on the 1left ribbon from wearing unevenly, 1. 1is ribbon bars and the bottom cover. When the READY indicator comes switch to place the printer prevent as the the in the holder ribbon guide core between and against and fully the set open the POWER the forms. WARNING Wait until proceeding the to the Charaband next step. stops rotating before band DEVICE Using plastic gloves, to the right until OPERATION grasp the ribbon the ribbon cores rolls and force them are free of the ribbon motors. Pull the ribbon completely Holding the two printer, rotate ribbon them free of the band cores as you so that the top gate. took them off and bottom cores the are reversed. Force the right end of the upper ribbon core against the top floating ribbon holder, align the left end with the fixed ribbon holder, and allow the spring tension to lock the core into position. Unwind the other ribbon core over the ribbon guide bars and Charaband. Position the lower ribbon core between the bottom ribbon holders in the same manner. Ensure that the slots in the engaged by the ribbon holder Ensure that the ends of the guide pins. ribbon position sensor is ribbon not cores covered are by the ribbon. 10. Close 11. Set the POWER circuit breaker to the ON the 12, the operator panel When the READY switch LP10 band gate to and printer window. access cover, indicator comes place the printer on, position press in RUN mode. the and (RUN close START/STOP indicator Procedure The following procedure describes how to change the ribbon on an line printer. 1. Use (Refer to Figures the plastic gloves Press the ON/OFF LINE LINE indicator Lift the printer the drum gate Move the not 7-2 and 7-7.) supplied with switch to set the LP10 ribbon. the printer off-line (ON 1lit). window. latch left and pull forward to fully open drum gate. WARNING Wait for character drum to stop rotating before you proceed. Grasp the ribbon cores drum gate latch until and the force them to the left toward the floating ribbon-holder springs are completely compressed. Remove the cores away ribbon by pulling the right from the drum gate. Discard are reversing it. end of the ribbon the ribbon unless you a3xid NOg 1d 43Q10H DEVICE OPERATION 7-20 DEVICE Remove the new together. Place ribbon Remove the fully holder. ribbon OPERATION from any the box protective wound ribbon and hold cardboard core over the the bottom Push the core to the left and place the right bottom fixed ribbon holder. Be sure that the slips into the slot on the core end. 10. Unwind enough up and ribbon 11. Slip the of the fully wound over the character ribbon between the ribbon drum. cores floating end over the holder guidepin core ribbon guide ribbon collars. to clips bring the the box and sensor. 12. Place 13. Push the the top the ribbon core core to fixed guidepin slips against the top floating ribbon the left and place the right core ribbon holder. Be sure that into the the drum 14. Close and latch 15. Close the printer 16. Press the ON/OFF LINE LINE indicator 1lit). slot on the core end. set the printer holder. end over the holder gate. window. switch to on-line Most listings have more print on the 1left half of the to prevent the ribbon from wearing unevenly, you reverse the ribbon. Do the following: paper. should Therefore, Use the plastic gloves supplied Press the ON/OFF LINE switch LINE indicator not 1lit). Lift the printer Move the drum the drum gate. with to set the the (ON ribbon. printer off-line (ON window. gate latch left and pull forward to fully open WARNING Wait for character drum to stop rotating before you proceed. Grasp the ribbon cores and force drum gate latch until the floating completely compressed. Remove the ribbon cores away Holding the printer, Push pin two core fixed slips into by the pulling drum them to the so the <cores that left ribbon slot the to the left ribbon-holder right end of toward the springs are the ribbon gate. ribbon rotate the bottom from them and holder. on the 7-21 as the vyou top took core is place the right Be sure that core end. them at the end the off the bottom. over holder the guide DEVICE 9. Unwind ribbon 10. Slip enough up and the OPERATION of the fully wound over the character ribbon between the ribbon drum. ribbon core guide to clips bring the the box and sensor. 11. Place 12, ©Push the ribbon core core to the against left the and fixed slips ribbon into the holder. slot on 13. Close and latch the gate. 14, Close the printer 15. Press the ON/OFF 7.1.4 indicator Cleaning the addition to the chapter, the drum top place the top guide-pin LINE In of the floating the right ribbon core Be sure that the core end. holder. end the over holder window. LINE switch to set the printer on-line (ON 1lit). Line Printer general cleaning procedures given at the beginning vyou should pay particular attention to the printing elements. You should excessive clean away Charaband should You be inspect the Charaband assembly on the LP07 daily for and paper residue collection. Use isopropyl alcohol to accumulation from the Charaband slugs. Whenever the removed or reversed, the roadbed and top ribbon guide 1nk ink 1is vacuumed. should clean the character sooner 1f necessary, wusing Every 500 hours, or sooner 1if isopropyl alchohol. 7.2 The CARD Use operator control Loading the cards to l. 2. on the LPl10 every 100 hours, or READER panels high-speed reader respectively. 7.2.1 drum a soft suede brush and a vacuum cleaner. necessary, clean the character drum with and following be read. Be sure Unloading Cards procedures the reader that the reader is the set decks to read left. is low-speed reader CR10-F shown 1in the input hopper (POWER indicator load powered switch ON on the Figures rear and 7-8 and with control the 7-9, punched 1lit), panel of and the REMOTE. follower into at to MODE to hopper card be the are check Pull for CR10-E the the back hopper. front with with Be the one sure 9 hand to edge and place down, begin the loading first column 1 to card the DEVICE POWER READ PICK OPERATION STACK || |HOPPER CHECK || | cHECK || | CHECK ||| CHECK Figure 7-8 CR10-F Card END OF STOP ||| RESET| 1TM Fi E Reader DEVICE OPERATION POWER ~ F=—==7 Fr——=—-7 + | READ , ItCHECK { l r===---- L | , STACK, |HOPPER, { CHECK 1 + CHECK | | CHECK} 1o b e med PICK p-~-——=q I el S L ) 7- 24 L m o | O | O | DEVICE 3. Continue placing loosely filled. cards OPERATION into the 1input hopper until it is CAUTION Do not pack the input hopper so full that the air from the blower cannot riffle the cards properly. 1If the cards are packed too tightly, the wvacuum picker cannot work properly. 4, Press 5. You RESET may to allow continue cards loading to be cards read. while the reader is operating provided you maintain tension in the front portion deck as you add cards to the rear. Do not add more until the hopper is at least half empty. of the cards CAUTION When you are trying to maintain pressure on the card deck, use just enough pressure to maintain the riffle action to prevent damaging cards or Jjamming the reader. 6. Usually, all stacker. hopper, deck. 7. To simply unload are if pull cards from back with stacker. Be careful Cleaning may the moved you back follower stacker 7.2.2 cards However, the one the be unloaded Card Reader to the remove follower output hand to through need remove maintain while and stacker, and the cards the order are reader cards 1into from remove pull the card deck of being the the the input the card stacker from deck. the The read. The important cleaning area for a card reader is the card path, which accumulates card dust. 1If this builds up, it causes data errors, card motion errors, and possibly even card jams. The card path should be cleaned at least weekly. With the power OFF, the path from the hopper to the stacker 7.3 DECTAPE The following dismount job, a should first procedures DECtape on be blown describe the TU56 the out and then actions transport. well vacuumed. necessary To assign to a mount drive to and your enter: .ASSIGN DTAnN (where n = 0-7, the indicator of some that on some drives still enter DTAOQ. number on the drive selector unused drive. Note, however, 0 is replaced by 8; you must DEVICE 7.3.1 Mounting Refer to Figure and Dismounting 3-1 for a view OPERATION DECtapes of the TU56 transport. Mounting l. Place the REMOTE/LOCAL switch to OFF switch 1is located immediately to selector indicator. 2. Mount the upward at Thread the 3. and 4., tape Wind 5. DECtape the left tape head, several to and turns onto the left perimeter the of right, clockwise of tape (middle position). the right of the This drive hand hub tape feeds the reel. tape guides over onto the the clockwise so top the of the take-up onto reel. the Press the REMOTE/LOCAL switch into the LOCAL take-up reel. (bottom pressed) position. 6. Advance the tape about depressing the top end ten turns onto the take-up reel of the rightmost rocker switch. 7. Press the position. switch 8. To write on the tape, set the WRITE ENABLE/WRITE to the WRITE ENABLE (top pressed) position. REMOTE/LOCAL into the REMOTE (top LOCK by pressed) switch Dismounting If the software has rewound and unloaded the tape,'skip steps 1 and 2. l. Set the REMOTE/LOCAL switch to the LOCAL position. 2. Wind the tape completely onto the left reel by pressing the rewind switch (top end of the leftmost rocker switch) and holding it pressed until all the tape has wound onto the left reel. 3. Place the remove 7.3.2 Cleaning REMOTE/LOCAL the switch to OFF (middle) position and tape. DECtape Drives DECtapes do not have a complicated tape path; however, the brown oxide powder that flakes off when a tape is in motion will accumulate on the tape guides and tape head. Once each shift, or at 1least once daily, vyou and isopropyl 7.4 91% MAGNETIC should <clean these areas with a cotton-tipped applicator alcohol. TAPE The DECsystem-10 supports a variety of magnetic tape drives. They cover both 7 track and 9 track operation, tape speeds of 45 to 200 inches per second, and recording densities of 200 to 6250 bits per inch. Various size reels can be accommodated and some drives will accept industry-standard cartridges. 7-26 DEVICE 7.4.1 Mounting and Dismounting The following procedures dismount magnetic tape DECsystem-10. tape onto manually. groove this Some the 1is drives back not drives, WRITE inhibited. 7.4.1.1 describe the action necessary to mount reels on the various drives supported by provide the take-up reel For all drives, on ring TUl0 of DISABLE TUl6 of the tape the an for tape the reel indicator on others) automatic in order light will Drives (Refer to reel holddown to threading and the while others require you to thread the you must insert a write enable ring in the present, and OPERATION allow (FILE warn Figure writing. 1If PROTECT on that writing vyou some is 7-10) Mounting l. Rotate the counterclockwise reel over the as far holddown knob Hold the reel firmly holddown knob clockwise 2. Press BR tape should REL and pull unwind toward the hub. TIf the reel is mounted 3. as knob it will with the against until it the tape from the the tape with the of go, groove bottom slot. and Pull left the slot. Lead the vacuum column side from the tape cover, and wind toward the back. and supply turn the The side unwinds from the top, check groove toward the back. that the head cover and slide it around the upper it into about six turns of draw tape into the over at the end tape against the upwards right the the oxide left hand Place the the and the upper tape guide, and lead Place the end of the tape over the hub, supply (dull) with of slide hub the reel. left taut tape lower place the hub flange is tight. Grasp the tape in both hands with the and the right hand back about a foot. the the and slot it top tape threading and into the of the corner between around of the the cover the guide. take-up reel <clockwise on the Press FWD reel. 4. Press LOAD and push loadpoint goes 5. out, to START marker and LD PT comes continues for more loadpoint. Press than STOP, move at back Press and vacuum to advance the tape is sensed, the tape stop ten REV on. columns. to loadpoint. When the stops, the FWD 1light Note that seconds, the and then START. if tape motion tape The 1is tape Dbeyond should the rocker loadpoint. ONLINE. Dismounting l. Rewind to loadpoint switch to REWIND, by and pressing pressing OFF LINE, START. setting DEVICE OPERATION UPPER TAPE GUIDE HEAD COVER —< \'4 L D o 1w E. — SUPPLY REEL VACUUM COLUMN COVER REEL HOLDDOWN KNOB Figure - 10 TUl6 Magnet 1C 7-28 Tap Dreilve DEVICE 2. Press BR REL and wind OPERATION the remaining tape onto the supply reel. 3. Turn the holddown 7.4.1.2 TU40 and TU4l knob counterclockwise Drives (Refer to Figure and remove the reel. 7-11) Mounting 1. If the transport is closed, press UNLOAD REWIND to lower the window. Pull one end of the reel lock release on the right hub and place the supply reel over the hub. 1If the reel does not have a cartridge, slip the end of the tape into the shoe at the lower right of the reel. 1If the reel has a cartridge, place it on the hub so that the projections from the cartridge fit into the two reel-positioning guides. The pin on the motor face plate should go into the opening on the tape 2. cartridge Press START toggle. LOAD REWIND to 1load to place the unit on the line. tape automatically. Press Dismounting l. Press RESET and then UNLOAD REWIND. 2. When reel 7.4.1.3 TU70, TU71, l. Press the HUB/WINDOW UP 2. Push the tape onto right-hand hub so that the clockwise. (The tape snaps onto the hub and is the window has opened, remove the lock release and pulling the reel and TU72 Drives (Refer tape by opening from the hub. the to Figure 7-12) Mounting button to open the transport window. tape unwinds automatically secured.) 3. Ensure that the the end of RESET button, tape is not twisted and lies flush 4, Press the 5. Press LOAD REWIND 6. Press START. causing button, READY light the putting goes window the tape to close. at load point. on. If the tape did not load correctly, the MACHINE CHECK will flash, and the window will open. The operator then reposition the tape and repeat steps 4, 5, described above. Dismounting l. on reel. Press RESET. button should and 6 DEVICE Figure 7-11 TU40 OPERATION Series Magnetic Tape Drive DEVICE Figure 7-12 TU70 OPERATION Series Magnetic Tape Drive OPERATION DEVICE 2. Press 3. Pull UNLOAD REWIND completely and the tape the off button causing the tape transport window to open. the to rewind hub. NOTE The TU70 series magnetic tape drives are able to accommodate tape reels that are enclosed in cartridges. When mounting, the cartridge must be positioned on the hub so that the two tabs on either side of the cartridge toggle fit into the two slots on the left side of the right-hand hub. (The cartridge toggle will automatically be opened in the 1loading process and closed 1in the unloading process.) 7.4.1.4 TU45 Drives (Refer to Figure 7-13) Mounting The supply reel (reel to be read or written) is located at the top of the transport. The tape must unwind from the supply reel when the reel is turned in a clockwise direction. Position the reel on the gquick-release hub and depress the hub actuator. Thread the tape as follows: 1. Toward the arrow to the upper left of 2. Over from right 3. Down and to the 4. Slightly 5. Down and to the 6. Down 7. Up and the two top guide wheels right under the right, left of and down, left of the upper to go the supply reel to left white guide wheel under lower the the head white guide wheel capstan toward the arrow to the left of the takeup reel Wrap the tape leader onto the take-up reel so that the tape will be wound onto the reel when it is rotated clockwise. Wind at least three turns onto the take-up reel. Remove all slack in the tape path. After the tape has been loaded and checked for correct seating in the guides, position the tape at the Load Point by pressing the LOAD switch. Recheck tape tracking in the guides and close the dust cover door. NOTE The transport door should remain during normal operation to maximum data reliability. 7-32 closed achieve DEVICE OPERATION TOP GUIDE WHEELS SUPPLY REEL POWER LOAD/RESET ON LINE REWIND FILE PROTECT 1600 CPI GUIDE. WHEEL HEAD GUIDE WHEEL TAKE-UP REEL CAPSTAN Figure 7-13 TU45 Magnetic Tape Drive DEVICE OPERATION When the load cycle is complete, the tape will stop at the Load Point. The transport Then, if the ONLINE indicator is not 1lit, press ONLINE. is now ready to receive additional commands. Dismounting To unload a tape, do the following: l. Press the OFFLINE 2. Press the REWIND (beginning 3. of switch. switch; tape) Press the REWIND unload sequence. the tape will rewind to the BOT start an marker. switch a second time; this will NOTE It is not necessary to wait for the tape to rewind to the BOT marker if an unload is desired; press the REWIND switch twice in succession and the tape will rewind and unload. 4, Open the transport transport 7.4.2 door and remove the reel. Close the door. Cleaning Magnetic Tape Drives Cleanliness is essential dirt trapped between the Each day you l. should Clean the moistened remove all do for proper operation. head and the tape can the Minute cause particles of data errors. following: head. Use a lint-free <cloth or in 1isopropyl alcohol. Wipe the head accumulated oxide and dirt. cotton swab carefully to NOTE Do not use rough or abrasive cloths to <clean the head. 2. Clean the fixed guides, capstan, and vacuum chamber with a cotton swab moistened with 1isopropyl alcohol to remove accumulated oxide and dirt. The vacuum column door may be opened to gain access to the chamber surfaces. 3. Clean the rotating tape guides a lint-free cloth alcohol. Wipe the accumulated oxide or cotton surfaces and dirt. and rubber punch rollers with swab moistened in isopropyl carefully to remove all DEVICE OPERATION NOTE Do not soak the guides with excessive solvent; it can seep into the guide bearings, causing bearing the of breakdown a or contamination lubricant. 7.5 DISK DRIVES Three types of disk drives with removable disk packs, along with their are shown in Figures 7-14, 7-15, and 7-16. panels, control operator not The RHS04 fixed-head swapping disk system does require operator action. 7.5.1 Mounting and Dismounting Disk Packs on packs The following steps describe how to mount and dismount disk Extreme care must be RP0O6 disk drives. and RP04, RP03, RP02, the put not Do drive. and taken to avoid physical damage to the pack anything on top of a drive except empty disk pack covers. (Refer to 1in controls mentioned Figures 7-14, 7-15, and 7-16 for the operator the following instructions.) Mounting 1. Slide back or lift the drive cover. 2. Remove the bottom plate from the disk pack container by means the locking handle located on the underside of the bottom of plate. 3. Be sure that you have the pack with the <correct visual information on it; slide the pack straight down onto the disk drive hub. 4. Turn the pack cover clockwise until the pack is 5. Pull 6. Close the drive cover and put the empty disk 7. Push or 8. When the READY light position. DO NOT the pack top of FORCE THE COVER ONCE cover locked IT STOPS TURNING. straight up and off 1into the pack. the drive. pack cover on toggle the START/STOP switch to the START position. is on, the drive is ready. Dismounting 1. Push or toggle the START/STOP switch to the STOP position and wait until the pack 2. Slide back or 3. Slip the pack cover lift comes to a complete stop. the drive cover. straight down over 7-35 the pack. DEVICE 4. Turn the cover 5. Lift the pack 6. Secure the locking 7. 7.5.2 Close Cleaning counterclockwise straight located drive Disk 7.5.3 Packs to the Disk section the pack is free. until it clears the drive. the pack cover by means the bottom plate. the underside of of the Drives outside leave Refer to on until cover. Other than keeping the clean, you should representative. Formatting up bottom plate handle the OPERATION called of the this Formatting drive task Disk and the cover of the packs to your field service Packs in Chapter 5. DEVICE ENABLE OPERATION R WRITE | : DISABLE 7-14 RP03 Disk START | READY } I gfifie Figure FILE Drive STOP DEVICE OPERATION CONTROLLER SELECT A STNDBY START STOP WRITE PROTCT DISABL READY UNSAFE A/B B Figure 7-15 RP04 Disk Drive — DEVICE OPERATION START WRITE CONTROL PROTEU! A ) START STANDBY CONTROL A B WRITE PROTECT READY DOOR LOCKED i CONTROL STOP B UNSAFE &4 LAMP TEST SWITCH 4 APPENDIX TOPS-10 A.1 A OPERATOR-PRIVILEGED COMMANDS INTRODUCTION The commands in this appendix are used to change various system parameters and, therefore, are restricted to users logged in under [1,2] or using device OPR. The commands discussed do not require LOGIN, unless otherwise stated; at completion they leave the terminal in monitor mode. (Note that operator-privileged commands for the OPSER system program are described in Section 4.1.2.1.) The remainder of the operating system commands (commands the general user) are described 1in detail 1in the Operating System Commands manual. A.2 COMMAND ATTACH available to DECsystem-10 DESCRIPTIONS device Function The ATTACH device command returns a previously DETACHed device the operator. The operator must then DEASSIGN the device order to place it in the monitor pool of available resources. Command to in Format ATTACH dev dev=the device to which the operator is attaching. Restriction The device Associated ?NO must have been previously DETACHed. Messages SUCH DEVICE The specified configuration. ?WASN'T The device does not exist DET specified device is not detached. in this monitor TOPS~-10 ATTACH OPERATOR-PRIVILEGED COMMANDS diskunit Function The ATTACH unit Command is disk now up unit command designates that the specified and the operator can then MOUNT packs on it. disk Format ATTACH diskunit/comment diskunit=the up, e.g., disk DPA2, comment=text, unit whose along with (PM=preventive that the operator wants to declare RPA3. first two characters go into ERROR.SYS the command as configuration changes maintenance, CM=corrective maintenance). Restrictions The unit must have been DETACHed or declared DOWN at system initialization. Associated ?NO Messages SUCH The ATTACH DEVICE disk unit specified does not exist. job Function The ATTACH job command detaches the current connects the terminal to any job specified. Command job, if any, and Format ATTACH n[proj,prog] n=the job attached. number of the job to which the terminal is to be [proj,prog]=the project-programmer number of the originator of the desired job. This argument may be omitted if it is the same as the project-programmer number of the Jjob to which the terminal 1is currently attached. The operator (device OPR) or a user logged-in wunder [1,2] may always attach to a Jjob provided the proper [proj, prog] is specified. Any other user, interrogated Associated ?NOT even for the with operator appropriate privileges, password. Messages A JOB The job number specified does not exist. will be TOPS-10 OPERATOR-PRIVILEGED COMMANDS ?CAN'T ATT TO JOB The DETACH [proj,prog] was not correct for the job number. device Function The DETACH thus device making it command assigns the specified be detached. device to JOB O, unavailable. Command Format DETACH dev dev=the name of the device to Restrictions DSK and Associated TTY be The ?CAN'T ASSIGNED device DET The SUCH TO JOB n specified is already in use. DEV user is attempting to detach DSK or TTY. DEVICE The specified configuration. DETACH detached. Messages ?ALREADY ?NO cannot device does not exist 1in this monitor diskunit Function The DETACH disk unit command designates the specified disk unit as being DOWN. This is similar to declaring it DOWN at system initialization. Command Format DETACH diskunit/comment diskunit=the e.g., DPAO, disk unit the operator wants to declare DOWN, RPA4. comment=text, whose along with (PM=preventive first two characters go into ERROR.SYS the command as configuration changes maintenance, CM=corrective maintenance). Restrictions The unit must not a DISMOUNT must be may be DETACHed. be part issued of for a mounted the file structure; structure. then, the If it disk is, unit TOPS-10 Associated ?NO COMMANDS Messages SUCH DEVICE The SET OPERATOR-PRIVILEGED disk unit specified does not exist. BREAK Function The address break facility of the hardware makes available to users of the system, a powerful debugging facility. To make this feature available the monitor must set the address which the user is breaking on into the address switches and the break conditions into the the operator break conditions to make register. the The address SET break BREAK command facility allows available to users; it also allows the operator to prevent it from being available to wusers if he wishes to make the address break facility available to system programmers for their exclusive use. The default setting when the monitor 1is loaded is SET BREAK USERS. Command Format SET BREAK USERS gives users the address break facility. The system will change the address switches and break conditions for programs being debugged using address break. SET BREAK NO causes USERS the message console 1if facility. the ?NOT AVAILABLE user attempts to to be typed use the on a address wuser's break Restrictions The SET in the command Associated ?NOT BREAK command FGEN dialog also requires depends during LOGIN. specified SET BREAK Messages AVAILABLE The operator tried break facility was SET on the value of FTSET as system dgeneration. The to SET BREAK NO USERS but the address already in use by one or more users. CORMAX Function The SET CORMAX CORMAX. The segments) can command largest be is is used to size that CORMAX-1. change any the system parameter job (sum of low and high TOPS-10 OPERATOR-PRIVILEGED COMMANDS Format Command CORMAX SET n n=decimal number representing nK. The minimum value of n is ten unless changed at system deneration or system initialization Associated time. | Messages None SET CORMIN Function The SET CORMIN command is used to change the system parameter CORMIN is the guaranteed amount of contiguous core that CORMIN. a single unlocked job can have. This command is used only with a monitor a that has the capability of locking jobs in core (usually real-time monitor). Command Format CORMIN SET n n=decimal number representing nK. This argument is reguired. Assoclated Messages None SET DATE Function The SET DATE command is used to change the date. Note, however, that this command does not check the validity of the argument as is the case at system initialization. Command Format SET DATE mm dd yy mm=1- or 2-character decimal number of month. dd=1- or 2-digit decimal day of month. yy=2-digit decimal year. Associated None Messages TOPS-10 SET OPERATOR-PRIVILEGED COMMANDS DAYTIME Function The Command SET DAYTIME command changes the time of day. Format SET DAYTIME n n=decimal number 0 through 2359, representing 24-hour time, hours * 100 + minutes. This argument is required. i.e., Associated Messages None SET MEMORY Function The SET MEMORY command allows the operator to dynamically alter the system memory configuration without necessarily affecting system operation. The command is most useful for removing faulty memory from the system, returning repaired memory to the systen, or reconfiguring systems that contain multiple CPU's. If the command 1is successfully executed, the specified memory is set on or off line. Command Format SET MEMORY ON-LINE SET MEMORY OFF-LINE where FROM FROM n FROM and TO TO n m TO are m optional portions of the command line. n and m are numbers (n less than or equal to m) that specify the range of addresses that are to be set ON or OFF line. The numbers are treated as decimal wunless preceded by # implying octal. If a number is followed by the letter P or K, the range is in pages Restrictions Available Associated (P) or blocks (K). ' only on systems that have the LOCK facility. Messages ?ATTEMPT TO SET MONITOR MEMORY OFF-LINE The range of addresses specified in a SET MEMORY OFF-LINE command overlaps the resident monitor. The memory occupied by the resident monitor cannot be set off-line. ?2JOB(S) TOO BIG TO CONTINUE ?PROBLEM WITH JOB(S) TO RUN nl[progl],n2[prog2],...nn[progn] If the range of addresses specified in a SET MEMORY OFF-LINE command were taken off-line, the jobs listed would be too big to continue to run. The job numbers and program names are listed so that the operator can ATTACH to the jobs, KJOB them, and type the command again if he wishes the command to succeed. | TOPS-10 OPERATOR-PRIVILEGED COMMANDS ?2ATTEMPT TO SET MEMORY CONTAINING LOCKED JOBS OFF-LINE ?PROBLEM WITH JOB(S) nl[progl]},n2[prog2],...nn[progn] The range of addresses specified in a memory overlaps command containing SET MEMORY OFF-LINE the operator locked jobs. numbers and program names are listed so - that can ATTACH again, ?p NXM ERRS to the ijobs, The Job KJOB them, and type the command if he wishes the command to succeed. FROM n TO m the system When a SET MEMORY ON-LINE command is executed, references the memory in the range specified in the command Should to ensure that it actually exists and 1is on-line. any nonexistent memory be encountered during this procedure, the range of nonexistent locations (n,m) 1is reported on the OPR terminal along with the number of errors (p) and the memory in that range is treated as off-line. SET NOMESSAGE Function The SET NOMESSAGE command is used by the operator to turn off the once-a-minute message that is output when a peripheral device The such as a disk, magtape, or PDPll has dropped off-line. message normally output is as follows: UNIT xxx WENT OFF-LINE where xxxXx is the unit name. PLEASE POWER DOWN AND TURN IT ON AGAIN When the unit is operating properly (that is, back on-line), the effect of this command is cancelled. The once-a-minute message will be restored for subsequent off-line conditions on the unit. Command Format SET NOMESSAGE unit unit=a peripheral unit name, e.g., DPA3, RPA2, PDP1ll 0 or PDPl1ll1l * for all front-end -11l's. Associated MTB, MTA3, Messages None SET OPR Function The SET OPR command is used to change the terminal designated OPR to another terminal while the system is running. Command Format SET OPR TTYn or SET OPR CTY as TOPS-10 TTYn=the CTY=the Associated name OPERATOR-PRIVILEGED of the terminal on terminal the to console COMMANDS be designated front as OPR. end. Messages None SET SCHED Function The Command SET SCHED command changes the stored in scheduled use of the system. Format SET SCHED n is word n octal and is in COMMON. regular n=0 The following can be timesharing bits have right and independent no further LOGINs allowed no further LOGINs from not answer o) ] of the STATES operations. meanings and several concurrently. n=1 batch half batch N specified the data except remote from CTY. terminals, and do sets. only. stand—-alone Associated n=100 device mounts intervention. n=200 unspooling n=400 no operator can be done without operator allowed. coverage. Messages None SET TTY Function When the than used with a device argument, the SET TTY command declares to scanner service special properties of a terminal line other the one on which the command is typed. The device argument may be the system. used to modify the characteristics of any terminal line on TOPS-10 Command OPERATOR-PRIVILEGED COMMANDS Formats l. SET TTY TTYn: word 2. SET NO 3. TTY TTYn: word 4, TTY NO TTY TTYn: TTYn: word word This controlled. = the terminal whose line is to be TTYn: if omitted, the command is identical optional; is argument DECsystem-10 the 1in described command TTY SET the to Operating System Commands manual. NO = the argument that determines whether or cleared. This argument is optional. represent word = the various words that modified. SET TTY TTYn: The words ALTMODE are as a bit is to be bits that to the standard of ASCII 175 SET TTY TTYn: NO ALTMODE Restores the SET TTY TTYn: BLANKS Restores multiple feeds and form feeds SET TTY TTYn: NO BLANKS Suppresses blank 175 and individual 176. and ESCape character 033 (initial state 1if, monitor generation, the TTYALT symbol assigned a non-zero value). codes be follows: Converts the ALTMODE codes 176 may set identity of at is the carriage return/line lines (consecutive (initial state). the after feeds return/line carriage first) and outputs form feeds and vertical tabs as two <carriage return line feeds. This is useful for a video display terminal in order to increase the on the amount of output which fits screen. SET TTY TTYn: CRLF Restores SET TTY TTYn: NO CRLF The free carriage of end the at carriage width is (initial the state). free carriage return return normally output exceeding the 1line a suppressed. SET TTY TTYn: DEBREAK Notifies the system SET TTY TTYn: NO DEBREAK Turns that the terminal TTYn: DEBREAK feature that allows the computer a has 2741 (Model keyboard. the lock to Terminals) off the SET TTY feature. SET TTY TTYn: ECHO Restores the normal echoing of each Most terminals on in. typed character the DECsystem-10 are used in full-duplex mode which means that the terminal does not print each character as the user types 1it. Instead the monitor echoes A-9 TOPS-10 OPERATOR-PRIVILEGED each COMMANDS character character typed will terminal prints does not characters command "C print be that printed. when it any typed can SO be is of by the used to the If typed the a but noncontrol user, then this establish normal echoing. (Initial setting determined by installation when constructing its monitor at system generation time.) each SET TTY TTYn: NO ECHO This command suppresses monitor echoing characters. Local copy i.e., terminals which of input terminals automatically the user monitor print types it) echoing, would cause each printed twice. stop on double a SET TTY TTYn: ELEMENT n Changes Model copy of as normal the echoing typed command is This to used be to each <character terminal. (Initial by each installation its monitor at system time.) the typing 2741-type numbers character require because printing local not character setting determined when constructing generation each do available Element element number terminals. The for element are: Meaning 987 APL 029 Standard 087 Call correspondence correspondence 963 360 Extended 938 988 APL BCD Note SET TTY TTYn: NO ELEMENT BASIC Binary that (EBCD) the SET TTY TTYn: command also sets the terminal SET TTYn: NO LC command SET TTY TTYn: TTY Turns off the ELEMENT as if were used. ELEMENT command. SET TTY TTYn: FILL n The filler terminal. terminals class n Many are DECsystem-10 is assigned different suppor ted operating terminals require one characters to sent control (LF) be characters n to this types of by the system. or n the Some more filler following certain such as 1line feed and horizontal tab (HT). Table A-1 illustrates the number of fillers sent for each character and The filler characters are for even characters parity) (RUBOUT, 377 characters. image mode determined (CR, class. (215 octal <carriage return 215 octal) octal) for and DEL all other No fillers are supplied for output. (Initial setting by each installation when constructing its generation time.) A-10 for filler CR monitor at system TOPS-10 SET TTY TTYn: NO OPERATOR-PRIVILEGED FILL Equivalent COMMANDS to TTY FILL O. (Initial setting is determined by each installation when constructing its monitor at system generation time.) Fillers for output and echoing are determined from Table A-1. Number Character of Fillers Octal Number Name 0 of BS 010 0 2 011 0 1l LF 012 0 FF . CR on output free CR+++ CRLF on output and Fillers 1 HT VT SET Table A-1 by Character Filler for Filler 2 6 6 l 2 6 6 2 class 3 0 or Class or 013 0 2 6 6 014 0 12 21 21 015 0 1 3 3++ 0 2 4 4 2+ 015-012 0 3 9 9++++ XON 021 1 1 1 1 TAPE 022 1 1 1 1 XOFF 023 1 1 1 1 NTAP 024 1 1 1 1 stop; +1 if ++ Output +++ Refer ++++ Sum TTY 0-3 TTYn: spaces to tab only; no fillers to of the the SET TTY fillers FORM 2 on if TTYn CRLF output for The 4-7 spaces to tab stop. input. command. a CR terminal and VT (initial and has LF. hardware FORM (vertical tab) setting determined (page) characters by each installation when constructing monitor at system generation time). SET TTY TTYn: NO FORM The monitor FORM and sends four (initial eight 1line setting line feeds feeds for determined for a by TTY TTYn: GAG Messages transmitted by the SEND a VT each installation when constructing monitor at system generation time). SET its its command cannot be received at this terminal unless the terminal is at command 1level (initial state). SET TTY TTYn: NO GAG Messages transmitted by the SEND command can be received at this terminal though it is not at command level. SET TTY TTYn: IGNORE Allows The SET TTY TTYn: NO IGNORE the line Turns off command. A-11 operator will the be to disable ignored SET TTY by the TTYn: a even 1line. PDP-1l1. IGNORE TOPS-10 SET SET TTY TTY TTYn: TTYn: The LC NO OPERATOR-PRIVILEGED COMMANDS LC translation of input to uppercase This command translate 1lowercase is character suppressed. causes the monitor to to uppercase as they are received. Frequently, 1t 1is convenient to have a terminal with both uppercase and lowercase to simulate the behavior of one with uppercase only. This command causes lowercase the characters monitor to perform 'this simulation. The echo sent back by the monitor always matches the case of the characters after translation. By looking at the printout, the user can determine what translation was performed by the monitor (initial state). SET TTY TTYn: PAGE This command gives the user the ability to temporarily suspend system typeout without losing it. suspends typeout, ("Q) the restores it. The XOFF and The XOFF key the XON and XON (°S) key keys are not echoed and are not sent to the user's program. This command is useful for video display terminals where the user may want to read before it disappears a page of text from the screen. Note that this preempts the use of °8 and "Q for reading paper tape. (See SET TTY SET TTY TTYn: NO PAGE TAPE.) The typeout control ability of the XOFF and XON keys is disabled. The current interpretation of these keys depends on the 1last SET TTY TAPE command (initial state) . SET TTY TTYn: RTCOMP Disables the "R (reprint after making corrections) job status execution) to SET TTY TTYn: NO RTCOMP SET TTY TTYn: SLAVE be passed Turns on the The without features specified to the current 1line and "T (print interrupting allowing "R and T user "R and the terminal program. "T features. becomes slaved; that is, no commands may be typed on terminal. The terminal may then the be ASSIGNed by another user. The operator can slave any terminal including his own. (Initial setting 1is determined by each installation when constructing 1its monitor at system generation time.) SET TTY TTYn: NO SLAVE The specified terminal becomes unslaved; that 1is, commands may now be typed on the console. If a user terminal 1is slaved, the operator may unslave it (since the operator is the only person that can give the command with a device argument) . If OPR 1is slaved, the operator can LOGIN wunder [1,2] on another terminal to unslave OPR. A-12 TOPS-10 OPERATOR-PRIVILEGED COMMANDS (Initial setting 1is determined by installation when constructing monitor at system generation time.) SET TTY TTYn: SPEED Sets the speed at which the system sends and receives characters to n baud (DC76 only). (The user adjusts the speed at n the SET TTY TTYn: SPEED each its terminal by setting a switch.) Sets the terminal transmitting n baud and the receiving speed m,n (DC76 only). for display transmitting speed to to m baud (This 1is especially useful terminals as they allow and receiving at different speeds.) SET TTY TTYn: The TAB terminal has every eight is determined constructing generation SET TTY TTYn: NO of SET SET TTY TTY TTYn: TTYn: TAPE NO TAPE SPACE TAB stops set time.) The monitor programs by TAB hardware columns. (Initial setting by each installation when its monitor at system simulates TAB output from sending the necessary number characters. The XON key read paper ("Q) causes the terminal to tape. The XOFF key (°S) causes the paper tape. free CRLF's terminal to stop reading Rubouts will be ignored and will not be sent. The XON ("Q) key and the XOFF key (°S) have no special paper tape function. They may, however, have a PAGE function. (See SET TTY TTYn:PAGE command.) SET TTY TTYn: Specifies (for Model 2741 terminals) that every character occupy one print space. The terminal normally types out TIDY characters so as user [ SET TTY TTYn: NO TIDY what the prints prints out Turns off that out as they typed as “<. appear in. For the same example, 1In TIDY mode, | <. the SET TTY TTYn: TIDY command. SET TTY TTYn: UC SET TTY TTYn: NO SET TTY TTYn: WIDTH UC Equivalent to SET TTY TTYn: NO Equivalent to SET TTY LC. The carriage width (the point at which a free carriage return is inserted) 1is set to n. The range of n 1is 17 (two TAB stops) to 200 decimal. The 1initial state is 72. n Restrictions The SET TTY command: Requires LOGIN TTYn: LC. if unslaving OPR. TOPS-10 OPERATOR-PRIVILEGED COMMANDS Associated Messages None SET VMMAX Function The SET VMMAX command specifies the maximum memory system. available to all users of the amount of wvirtual Format Command SET VMMAX nP nk where nP and nK are alternative arguments. 1K equals 1024 words, and 1P equals a page of 512 words. If K and P are omitted, K 1s assumed. After the execution of this command, one of the new value of VMMAX will be following: the 1. The total amount of allocated swapping space, 2. The amount currently in use by all virtual memory users, 3. The value of n, than the total amount allocated. is less than the total Associated if n is greater amount in use. if neither of the above if n is true. Messages None XCHNGE Function The XCHNGE command enables a system with a bad disk wunit to user disruption by logically exchanging wundue continue without disk drives and then having the operator physically exchange disk packs. Command Format XCHNGE diskunitl diskunit2/comment diskunitn=the disk unit the operator wants to exchange another disk unit, e.g., with DPAO DPA2. comment=text, whose first two characters go into along with the command as configuration changes ERROR.SYS (PM=preventive maintenance, CM=corrective maintenance). TOPS-10 OPERATOR-PRIVILEGED COMMANDS CAUTION command can this on disk packs assumes that the packs have been switched physical disk both For that reason, by the operator. be powered down should disk drives One command. the before issuing does take monitor precaution the issued 1s to whenever this command 1is both disk drives automatically place the operator to It is up to OFFLINE. disk packs before the then switch placing the units back ONLINE. of Injudicious use information monitor because the destroy Restrictions diskunitl Associated and diskunit2 must be on the same controller. Messages ?XCHNGE The ?XCHNGE The diskunitn? disk unit diskunitl two disk specified does not exist. diskunit2? drives are on different controllers. APPENDIX RSX-20F The PARSER, console KL and B.1 an You RSX-20F terminal front-end ENTERING can enter CONSOLE and AND EXITING THE the PARSER from (control-backslash) If you are to get to If you are KLINIK, currently commands various entered console exit B.2 the a on the TOPS-10 the CTY. a monitor communicating with communicating with another task and CTRL/Z are CONSOLE subset four to of the PROGRAMMER mode TOPS-10 exit the by job, enter RSX-20F task then the QUIT command or use console (See mode modes Section that you B.4.) a CTRL/\ USER mode commands you will mode mode has While allows only those allows the allows effect PARSER PROMPTS you in are typing a to CTRL/Z be set modes a CTRL/\ the following character PAR> to such as enter the character. allowed commands to via all PARSER commands the of full PARSER set exiting task, that will except commands. the PARSER (equivalent by crash diagnostic PARSER be prompted not to a QUIT one of the sequences: indicate that the KL processor is SET which use. of you will the determine monitor. command) . B.3 the can These functions. MAINTENANCE the MODES PARSER console TOPS-10 type PARSER command. OPERATOR the PARSER, PARSER CONSOLE There the on PARSER PARSER. To on functions PARSER. currently enter accepts performs processors. CTRL/\ the PROCESSOR COMMANDS program, (CTY) B running a program. RSX-20F PAR% to indicate but PAR# to the KL CONSOLE that the clock is that the indicate PROCESSOR COMMANDS KL on processor and KL is EXAMINES clock is not are running a program, allowed. off. NOTE If you during should ever see the PAR# prompt timesharing, reload the system. If the PARSER encounters an error during its message will be typed preceding the prompt. B.4 PARSER COMMANDS When you give must use one 1. A 2. Several FOR THE commands of the single to displayed initialization, an error OPERATOR the following console processor command language, you forms. command followed commands separated If you need to terminal, end continue a the 1line When you command the final <CR> of a buffer for invalid by <CR> by semicolons and ending with <CR> line beyond a physical line on the hyphen followed by <CR>. The PARSER will prompt you for the next line by typing a hyphen. The command line 1is complete when there 1is a <CR> that is not preceded by a hyphen. (The maximum number of characters in a command line is 280.) press 1line invalid character of the command PARSER begins encounters an any others left (LINE command with a FEED or command line, the PARSER scans the characters. 1If the PARSER finds an ESCAPE) in the command line, no part line 1is executed. If the characters are all valid, the executing the individual commands. If the PARSER 1invalid command, it stops and that command as well as in the command line are not executed. There is a help facility built into the PARSER. If you type ? after the prompt, the PARSER will output a list of available commands. This list will conform to the console mode in effect at the time. In the example below, the console was in OPERATOR mode. ————— PAR>? PARSER COMMANDS ABORT CLEAR EXAMINE JUMP MCR REPEAT RUN SET SHUTDOWN QUIT WHAT PAR> ARE: Example ----- RSX-20F You can also type ? 1in CONSOLE place of PROCESSOR COMMANDS the argument of a command what arguments are available for that command. Again, reflect only those arguments available to you based on mode in effect at the time. PAR>EXAMINE EXAMINE to find out the list will the console ? COMMANDS ARE: PC DTE-20 ELEVEN KL TEN DECREMENT INCREMENT NEXT PREVIOUS THIS PAR> The following commands comprise the subset of the console processor command language allowable 1in OPERATOR console mode. They are the commands relevant to your functions as an operator. In the subsequent conventions are command l. Any single 2. A multiple choice means formats, the following notational used: that argument an must list, entry be specified. enclosed is in special optional. A brackets default entry [ ] , will be specified. 3. A multiple choice list, enclosed in braces { }’ , Mmeans that one of the entries must be specified. ABORT This command stops the KL processor by forcing it 1into a HALT loop. Use this command only when the SHUT DOWN command fails to come up with the DECSYSTEM-10 NOT RUNNING or the **HALTED** message. CLEAR CONSOLE This CLEAR command forces the console into OPERATOR mode. INCREMENT This command sets the increment counter EXAMINE INCREMENT/DECREMENT commands.) CLEAR to zero. (Refer to the MEMORY This command PDP-10 forces memory. all subsequent EXAMINE commands to reference RSX-20F CONSOLE PROCESSOR COMMANDS CLEAR NOT This combination an CLEAR argument. is the equivalent of a SET command and (Refer to the SET commands.) requires REPEAT This EXAMINE command sets the command line repeat counter to zero. PC This command types out the contents of the KL program counter in octal. EXAMINE KL This command types out the contents of the KL program counter (PC) and virtual memory address register (VMA), the state of the priority interrupt system (PI), and the PC flags; all in octal. EXAMINE [[TEN ELEVEN fl addr INCREMENT DECREMENT PREVIOUS THIS NEXT This command location in TEN ELEVEN types command. will There be contents of the command will specified core specifies that this in KL10 specifies that addresses in nor will this command will PDP-11 ELEVEN be reference physical memory. reference word (even) memory. are specified, determined by If no SET MEMORY command has the been the memory to be most recent SET MEMORY the specific memory issued, PDP-10 memory referenced. are location; addr the addresses If neither TEN referenced out octal. six one arguments of to them must be determine entered. is the location address number when referencing in octal. This the PDP-11. must be INCREMENT means add the contents of the increment counter address of the location last examined to current location PDP-11 memory, are ignored and give DECREMENT means the same subtract to be examined. When an even to get the the referencing the contents of the increment counter both EXAMINE INCREMENT and EXAMINE NEXT result. the contents of the 1increment counter from the address of the location last examined to get the current location to be examined. When referencing PDP-11 memory, the contents of the increment counter are ignored and both EXAMINE DECREMENT and EXAMINE PREVIOUS give the same B-4 result. RSX-20F PREVIOUS means CONSOLE examine PROCESSOR COMMANDS the word previous to the one last examined. JUMP THIS means re—-examine NEXT means examine the word word that after was the last last examined. one examined. addr This command and then address MCR the starts exits with a the the KL processor at the addr an octal, PARSER. maximum value of is 17777777 1location specified positive, non-zero octal. filename This command loads the file name of a and starts a PDP-11 task. This the PDP-11 program. filename must be 1line a QUIT command REPEAT nnn; This exits command nnn will number is execute of the command language. The command the 280 the command line the two number of rest of factor and 1is contain buffer line. as many REPEAT will examine The command: REPEAT execute the command decimal, Also, if a SET You REPEAT can as command to will nest EXAMINE the PC ten EXAMINE the positive, 1is arrive PC times. PC; following EXAMINE PC EXAMINE NEXT EXAMINE NEXT EXAMINE PC EXAMINE NEXT EXAMINE NEXT EXAMINE PC EXAMINE NEXT EXAMINE NEXT REPEAT sequence: 2; EXAMINE fit REPEATs command: 10; 3; a commands limitation. repeat factors are multiplied times commands are repeated. example, the number. can character the times. repeat non-zero will processor [commandl; command?2; ...] specified For console NEXT 1in at the within within effect, actual RSX-20F CONSOLE PROCESSOR COMMANDS I1f SET REPEAT 4 had been previously would be repeated four times. entered, If no commands are specified, effect the the 1s above that sequence of a null command. RUN filename This command performs the same function as the MCR command. SET CONSOLE }_MAINTENANCE_ OPERATOR PROGRAMMER t USER —ted You must use this command to change the subset of PARSER commands that you can subsequently execute. Entry and exit to the PARSER does not change MAINTENANCE allows OPERATOR mode. all PARSER commands. allows only those commands that can not crash the TOPS-10 PROGRAMMER monitor. allows all commands except PROGRAMMER USER SET console is the default diagnostic argument. allows no PARSER commands; the command language as INCREMENT functions. 1its effect is to leave in the QUIT command. nnn This command sets the nnn increment counter to the value specified. is any octal number (36-bit maximum) and must Dbe specified. Note that if the value 1is zero, EXAMINE INCREMENT and EXAMINE DECREMENT both function as EXAMINE THIS. Also, 1if the value is negative, the functions of EXAMINE INCREMENT and EXAMINE DECREMENT are reversed. The initial value of the increment counter SET MEMORY is zero. {ELEVEN} TEN This command forces all subsequent EXAMINE commands to the memory specified. ELEVEN means reference PDP-11 memory. TEN means reference PDP-10 memory. The command initialized, SET has no default. PDP-10 memory When references the are system in effect. reference is first NOT This combination 1is requires an argument. the equivalent of a CLEAR command (Refer to the CLEAR commands.) B-6 and RSX-20F SET REPEAT CONSOLE PROCESSOR COMMANDS nnn This command sets the repeat counter to the value specified. All subsequent command lines will be repeated that number of times. nnn is a decimal, positive, non-zero number and must Dbe specified. (See the value of REPEAT the command repeat for an example counter is one. of its use.) The 1initial SHUTDOWN This command stops the KL timesharing system without causing a reload. This command is used to stop the TOPS-10 monitor after the TOPS-10 system type WHAT a OPSER jobs. command, To control reenter KSYS, the has 1logged off PARSER after issuing all user and this command, the console backslash. CONSOLE INCREMENT MEMORY REPEAT VERSION This command types the requested information on terminal. CONSOLE INCREMENT types out the current console types out the contents of out the mode. the 1increment counter 1in octal. MEMORY types referenced REPEAT types type by out of EXAMINE the memory that 1is <currently being commands. contents of the repeat counter 1in decimal. VERSION B.5 types out the version RSX-20F monitor. following by the list contains PARSER while message PAR -- in any the PARSER and the caused an command. [command name] error in the For example, PAR>KLEAR will PAR the error the three code - message messages console that may modes. name of the command name can be PARSER that if you be The the [PARSER] caused typed a command parser, rather than if you type an invalid command: CONSOLE receive -- all of output format of 1is: The command name is the However, this command you of PARSER ERROR MESSAGES The each number error message: NSK NO - SUCH KEYWORD B-7 "KLEAR" 1in the error. string that a specific RSX-20F However, if you PAR>CLEAR you will short -- the [CLEAR] explanation operator in PROCESSOR COMMANDS an invalid argument: error message: KONSOLE receive PAR A type CONSOLE action, NSK - of each where CODE MESSAGE AND AMB AMBIGUOUS NO SUCH KEYWORD error "KONSOLE" message 1s 1included along with PARSER found you typed. more necessary. EXPLANATION KEYWORD where xxx 1s the than one keyword "xxx" ambiguous matching keyword. The abbreviation the NOTE The PARSER complete the APE KL APR The BAE subset PARSER Call BURST ARGUMENT ERROR was CRAM There was <code> 1s the the code CAN'T STOP either to FIND PARSER your field IS tried However, error field line mode you (nonexistent service are of 1in. memory, parity representative. programming failure. Notify vyour ©programming failure. Notify vyour two - <code> CRAM, or and reload the 1in or FS-STOP. internal your field This hardware service via DISK you reload or Note representative. DECtape, the happens error. or via the microcode. halt the KL and failed to do so. Notify representative. NOT REPEATABLE to repeat the characters LOOP to service FM, that 280 lines. STOP fatal system over command ERROR call provided HALT tried a was more DRAM, encounters KL that as received, The You console the OVERFLOW register, COMMAND CPU 1internal command CPU try switch CNR a ERROR Also the against regardless ERROR Reenter when a your internal an BUFFER typed CLOCK by arguments contact. length. CFH an ADDRESS COMMAND You abbreviation and contact. software CES encountered etc.). KL your commands allowable error, software CBO of ERROR There CAE matches set command a has command been that executed cannot once. be repeated. RSX-20F CPE CAN'T PHASE CONSOLE PROCESSOR COMMANDS EBOX There was an internal hardware error. Call your field service representative. CSK CAN'T START KL The PARSER tried to start the KL and failed to your DCK field service DIVIDE do representative. so. Call CHECK software your Call There was an internal programming error. contact. DMF FAILED MEMORY KL DEPOSIT programming There was an internal accept a deposit directive. DNP DTE-20 This IS NOT DSF DTE-20 The DTE-20 mode switch DTC your This FAILED software CONFUSED - ECT EBOX DTE status registers RUN AND an HALT The LOOP run and halt 1impossible loop flags situation. Call CLOCK EXAMINE the KL the halt loop within the allotted time. KL MEMORY FAILED programming accept an examine directive., END OF failed Call your contact. There was an internal EOC set TIMEOUT reenter software EMF were vyour field representative. While the PARSER was doing an execute function, to failed. contact. is a fatal error. simultaneously, service in the wrong contact. STATUS DTE-20 is Call your field service representative and/or your A read or write to one of the Call software contact. PRIVILEGED is a fatal error. position. software didn't RSX-20F failure. Call your COMMAND Call failure. your RSX-20F didn't software contact. REQUIRED The command was ended with a ? and no further arguments exist. Retype the command and press carriade return. EPE EBUS PARITY ERROR This a fatal error. The PARSER encountered an error. Call your field service representative. ESD EBOX STOPPED - EBUS parity DEPOSIT The PARSER executed a deposit directive and found that the clock was stopped. KL RSX-20F ESE EBOX STOPPED - CONSOLE EXAMINE The PARSER executed clock was stopped. FRF FUNCTION n FWF is the code of the contact. FUNCTION WRITE n code of is the an function vyour field If the and found that the KIL that failed. service system This 1is a representative crashes, try to fatal and reload your it. the function that failed. This is a fatal Call software your field service representative and vyour contact. If the system crashes, try to reload it. FUNCTION XCT is the n code FAILED of the error. Call software contact. ILLEGAL function your field If FUNCTION the was an internal 1illegal function software contact. ILLEGAL c is CHARACTER the converted to Sections B.l ILLEGAL s 1s system failed. This is a representative crashes, programming read, try to fatal and reload your it. error. write or The execute translation of an are preceded by printing equivalent for characters their through SEPARATOR PARSER received Call your code. "c" printer's Non-printing that service CODE an ILS directive FAILED There ILC examine FAILED software n IFC n Call error. FXF READ error. n PROCESSOR COMMANDS 1illegal an character. up-arrow output. B.4.) CHARACTER (") and (Refer to "s" the printer's translation of an 1illegal separator Control characters are preceded by an up-arrow (). (Refer to Sections B.1l through B.4.) Note that each tab is converted to a single space. character. I0C ILLEGAL The IRC ITN KCN KL OPCODE PARSER tried format. Call ILLEGAL REPEAT You typed SET REPEAT a The RUN or KL CLOCK the KL instruction with an 1illegal or negative argument to either the REPEAT or NAME MCR IS tried and a contact. COUNT zero TASK on execute software command. ILLEGAL You to your command was entered with no argument. OFF to execute clock was a command off. that requires the clock to be RSX-20F KLA KL ADDRESS CONSOLE PROCESSOR COMMANDS ERROR You specified an EXAMINE or DEPOSIT that was out of range (over 22 octal KLR KNC format. ILLEGAL COMMAND to KL CONTINUABLE IS NOT tried the KL command. MRA MISSING You execute to resume was not REQUIRED didn't command, NER WHILE You tried running. You command with a KL address bits), negative, or not in NUMERIC KL a command that processing with in a continuable is illegal the while CONTINUE state. there all is EXPRESSION an the error arguments in after You NUMBER OUT specified a number NSK NST OAI NO SUCH XXX 1s NO SUCH base. an necessary OF You specified command. ODD ADDRESS number to that was Section to SET occur out of range or in the wrong "xxx" keyword. (Refer to Section B.4.) a nonexistent task as an argument examine an internal PARENTHESIS CLOCK to the MCR or an odd-numbered PDP-11 address. This is CODE You specified missing. SCF and also B.4.) programming error. Call contact. RIGHT argument can ILLEGAL FUNCTION There was RPM the RANGE incorrect RUN ODD for TASK You tried illegal. OFC but RESET REQUIRED (Refer KEYWORD a is syntax. command expects a numeric expression as an something else was entered. This error message if the command syntax is in error. INPUT KL command i.e., The NOR the ARGUMENT specify or RUNNING a vyour software MISSING numeric expression with a right parenthesis FAILED The command set. This parser 1is representative. a cannot validate the parameter hardware error: call your it has field just service RSX-20F SPF SET PARITY CONSOLE PROCESSOR COMMANDS FAILED The command parser cannot validate the parameter set. This 1is a hardware error;: call your it has Just field service representative. SZI TAA START ZERO You tried TASK IS You UEC AT to start ALREADY issued a RUN UNMATCHED KL the KL at location zero; this or MCR command while - another NOT COMMAND NOT XTO KL current EXECUTE AVAILABLE console TIMED an 1internal LOADED IN The command just issued PAR> prompt to obtain the active. "xxx" Reload the system via DISK or DECtape, or via register, provided that you reload the microcode. WRM illegal. task was unmatched error code. There was error. Notify your software contact. MICROCODE 1is ACTIVE ERROR CODE XXX is an programming UNL ILLEGAL THIS CONSOLE the switch MODE is not available. Type a ? to the a listing of the commands available in mode. OUT While performing an execute function, the KL failed to reenter the halt 1loop within the allotted time. Call your field service representative. APPENDIX KL The KL method When initialization program, operation. PROGRAM KLINIT, (KLINIT) has both a default and you does load the system path 1is taken the l. following Loads the via 2. without KL 3. front-end Configures DISK the KL asking processor Configures and configuration the the through microcode file on KL10A, UB.MCB for the the or DECTAPE load initialization dialog you any 4, from load the device. appropriate (UA.MCB 5. load and and device, interleaves starts the disk The bootstrap TOPS-10 If you of KLINIT. do not or all cache KL memory want all you the 1is enabled. according to the KLINIT present on configured a file by device. The in effect at these 2. Configure cache 3. Configure KL 4., Load 5. Specify 6. Load enter the and in 1loads the defaults, do the bootstrap program located on and file you starts the default SYS:SYSTEM.EXE. must enter the dialog mode following: microcode. memory memory start any switches start dialog, at KL BOOT.EXB. then located can Verify and default file, program monitor Then, the DECtape l. switch with the time. Loads 6. for enables cache memory according to the KLINIT file, KL.CFG. 1If this file is not present on If the KL.CFG file did not exist, KLINIT creates that name and stores it on the front-end load file contains the cache and memory configuration the a dialog. questions: microcode front-end KL10B.) switch, operator configuration file, KL.CFG. 1If this file 1s not the front-end load device, all available memory is with the highest possible interleaving. To a of default It INITIALIZATION C least you you the the system 0, 1, it. 1it. program. bootstrap monitor switches want want bootstrap to any load as as program. from disk using and 2 the set. or magnetic switch (See tape. register Section 1load 3.2.3.) KL During the 1. dialog, All INITIALIZATION the answers following to a PROGRAM rules question (KLINIT) apply: must end with <CR> (carriage return). 2. RUBOUT 3. Typing or DELETE only question. a <CR> 5. CTRL/U deletes 6. NO 7. to unless 8. 9. all operator rewriting current the default the the answer first answer to the listed. dialog and exits the KL.CFG file. to the line. default the rest of the dialog answers. any question returns you stated RESTART in the the is the ENTER DIALOG question skips assumes BACK character. selects CTRL/Z terminates the RSX-20F monitor without to a The default answer 4. and C.1 deletes to the previous question otherwise. to the EXIT question goes back to the first question dialog. Pressing ESCape at any point restarts the dialog. Note that terminal. 10. An unacceptable the question to answer results be repeated. 11. The dialog continues with stated otherwise. 12. The minimum truncation for the first two characters. the any in 1in a reply, before <CR>, ESCape does not echo on your an next error message question answer other and 1listed than causes unless filename 1is KLINIT OPERATOR DIALOG The following are all the possible questions from KLINIT and the acceptable answers. However, depending on the answers that you give, some guestions may be omitted in an actual dialog. When a question from KLINIT appears on your console terminal, it 1s preceded by KLI --. KLINIT then prompts for an answer with KLI>. Therefore, during the KLI question -- actual dialog [ansl, the format 1is: ans2,...]? KLI> The brackets [ questions, are ], for used 1in <clarity the following explanation of KLINIT only; do not type brackets around your answers. ENTER DIALOG Ans. 1 [NO,YES,EXIT,BOOT]? [NO] means questions. take Ans. 2 [YES] the assume This default continues the is default the answers last chance for all to bypass the remaining the dialog path. the dialog and asks the next question. and KL INITIALIZATION PROGRAM Ans. 3 [EXIT] means discontinue RSX-20F monitor. Ans. 4 [BOOT] skips directed by standard defaults RELOAD Ans. MICROCODE dialog and return to the the rest of the dialog, enables cache memory as KL.CFG, and immediately loads and starts the bootstrap program found 1in BOOT.EXB. No taken when this option is selected. KL are [YES,VERIFY,NO]? [YES] 1loads the KL10 microcode file on the 1 the (KLINIT) microcode from the bootstrapping device appropriate into the KL10 processor. Ans. 2 [VERIFY] verifies that the microcode in the KL10 processor matches the microcode in the appropriate microcode file on the bootstrapping device. Ans. 3 [NO] RECONFIGURE Ans. neither CACHE [FILE] 1 loads nor verifies [ALL] with microcode. [FILE,ALL,YES,NO]? means configure cache memory configuration file, KL.CFG. all cache memory is enabled. CONFIGURE KL MEMORY question. Ans. the means enable CONFIGURE the cache MEMORY [NO] means do not reconfigure cache memory; configuration 1is left unchanged. The dialog the CONFIGURE KL MEMORY question. 1 [ALL] Ans. 2 [NONE] Ans. 3 [n,n,...] (where n caches specified. KL means enable means MEMORY 1in the under dialog continues control. the existing continues with [ALL,NONE,O0-3] Ans. CONFIGURE memory dialog Ans. CACHES cache memory. The question. [YES] WHICH configure specified Ans. ENABLE means all KL as If this file does not exist, The dialog continues with the all disable is cache all 0, memory. cache memory. 1, or 2, 3) means enable only the [FILE,ALL,YES,NO]? NOTE A reply return of you BACK to to the this question RECONFIGURE will CACHE question. Ans, 1 [FILE] means configuration configure KL file, KL.CFG. assumed. The dialog memory as specified 1in the If this file does not exist, continues with the LOAD KL [ALL] is BOOTSTRAP question. If the configuration in the KL.CFG file is not <consistent with the setting of the memory interleaving switches, an error message is issued and the dialog restarts with the first question. KL Ans. configures KL memory with as much memory as possible the highest interleaving possible consistent with setting of the memory interleaving switches on the units. BOOTSTRAP [YES] 3 the [NO] 4 means means LOAD INTERLEAVE 1 KL configure continues a physical do not BOOTSTRAP MEMORY [OPTIMAL] memory 1is under asked, memory configure configuration KL with the LOAD KL dialog KLINIT control. examines Before memory and map. memory remains. at The all. dialog The previous continues with the question. [OPTIMAL,4,2,1]? means interleaving memory dialog question out memory The question. next prints Ans. (KLINIT) with the memory Ans. PROGRAM [ALL] 2 and Ans. INITIALIZATION configure possible interleaving KL memory consistent switches on with with the the the memory highest setting of the units. Ans. [4] means 4-way interleaving. A test is performed on the available memory to see if 4-way interleaving is possible. If it is, the available memory 1is configured with 4-way interleaving. Otherwise, an error message is issued and the question 1is repeated. Ans. [2] means 2-way 1interleaving. A test 1s made on the available memory to see if 2-way interleaving is possible. If it is, the available memory is configqured with 2-way interleaving. If not, an error message 1s issued and the question is repeated. Ans. [1] means configure interleaving. LOAD KL BOOTSTRAP all available memory with 1l-way or no [YES,NO,filename]? NOTE A reply of return BACK you to to this the question CONFIGURE KL will MEMORY question. Ans. 1 [YES] means the default KL into KL memory from the which the program is RSX-Binary over; you read version will now bootstrap program bootstrap is BOOT.EXB .SAV is device. of a file). be communicating to The (.EXB be loaded file from denotes The KLINIT with the an dialog is bootstrap program. Ans. 2 When the bootstrap program has will be prompted with BTS>. TOPS-10 monitor default monitor, [NO] means memory. Ans. 3 no (See [filename] is KL the the (XXXXXXXXX.YYy) 9-alphanumeric to be 1loaded been loaded Enter or press and the started, filename <CR> to you of the get the into KL SYS:SYSTEM.EXE. bootstrap program next question.) name of to be the filename C-4 to be alternative 1loaded. character is XXXXXXXXX of the KL loaded bootstrap 1s the bootstrap file 1- to and KL INITIALIZATION PROGRAM (KLINIT) VYY is the l1to 3-alphanumeric character filename extension. If only a filename 1is specified, a default extension of L(EXB 1is assumed. This file must be 1in RSX-Binary format. The KLINIT dialog is over; you will now be communicating with the bootstrap program. NOTE The following when NO question. EXIT [YES,RESTART]? Ans. 1 [YES] Ans. 2 [RESTART] exits Before KLINIT loads cache memory was to answered the RSX-20F means the question 1is restart asked the dialog. program, 1If only previous monitor. the bootstrap configured. 1is to the it checks reply to to the see 1if RECONFIGURE the CACHE question was NO, KLINIT configures the cache according to the KL.CFG file. If the KL.CFG file does not exist, KLINIT configures all cache. In the latter situation, a KL.CFG file is created and stored on the front-end When the load bootstrap prompted with specified). press C.2 device. <CR> Enter to program BTS> get has (or the the been BTM> filename default loaded if of and the the monitor started magnetic TOPS-10 from you tape monitor will be bootstrap was to be loaded or SYS:SYSTEM.EXE. KLINIT MESSAGES There are four programs: classes of messages informational, issued warning, by dialog the KL error, 1initialization and system error messages. C.2.1 Informational Informational function. Messages messages The indicate message text The informational messages KLI -- ENABLED KLI -- ALL CACHES All four BOOTSTRAP A KLI -- of KL the KL LOADED bootstrap processor AND normal particular bootstrap "KLI --". caches have been has messages been that program 1loaded follow being DISABLED cache memory completion by of a KLINIT has enabled. STARTED program Any All the preceded are: started. CACHES is been disabled. will used. into be KL a memory function of and the KL KLI -- CACHES The KLI -- n,n... specified CONFIGURATION INITIALIZATION PROGRAM (KLINIT) ENABLED caches FILE have been enabled. ALTERED The KL.CFG file was updated with a new cache and/or memory configuration. This message 1s issued whenever you set up a non-default configuration or if the KL.CFG file did not previously exist. KLI -- KL RESTARTED The or KLI -- KL a processor hardware MICROCODE has or VERSION The KL microcode, system from the KLI -- been software bootstrap device. MICROCODE VERSION xxx restarted a power failure LOADED version xxx, appropriate xxx following crash. has been microcode loaded file on 1into the KL the front-end VERIFIED The KL microcode, version Xxx, currently residing in the system has been compared correctly with the code in the appropriate microcode file on the front-end bootstrap device. C.2.2 Warning Messages Warning messages inform the operator of some unusual condition. KLINIT dialog continues. These messages are preceded by "KLI -The warning KLI -- % messages DMA20 are: PARITY ERROR AT loc=data BEING REWRITTEN KLINIT encountered a parity error while trying location "loc". "loc" is expressed as eight the data, as KLINIT read it, is represented as six octal digits. SYSTEM KLI -- ¥ NO to FILE rewrite read - ALL it -- SYSTEM ACTION: KLINIT enables $ NO at and of the data at the CACHE FILE - ALL all specified 1location and question was taken in the directory. and again. BEING CONFIGURED The default to the RECONFIGURE CACHE KLINIT could not find the KL.CFG file KLI to read data octal digits two dgroups ACTION: KLINIT will attempt The %", caches. MEMORY BEING CONFIGURED The default to the CONFIGURE KL MEMORY question was taken KLINIT could not find the KL.CFG file in the directory. and KL SYSTEM INITIALIZATION PROGRAM (KLINIT) ACTION: KLINIT configures all available memory and interleaving at the highest level consistent with of the interleave switches on the memory units. C.2.3 Dialog Error Dialog error messages sets the the setting Messages indicate that your answer to the current KLINIT guestion 1s unacceptable. KLINIT repeats the question and waits an appropriate reply. The message text 1is preceded by "KLI --". Unless noted otherwise, the system is to repeat the question and action for re-prompt. messages The dialog KLI -- error COMMAND messages SYNTAX Your reply was the question. OPERATOR all dialog -- error are: ERROR not one of the possible answers as specified 1in ACTION: Reply with one of the acceptable answers, correctly use carriage return to take the default answer. KLI for INTERLEAVE TOO HIGH FOR SWITCH spelled, or SETTINGS Your reply to the INTERLEAVE KL MEMORY expressed a value higher than possible according to the physical setting of the interleave switches on the memory units. OPERATOR Reply with a lower value Change switches on the KLI -- ACTION: NO the previous EXTERNAL Physical memory OPERATOR Change switches 1is the question. MEMORY of interleaving. memory Retype the unit. Type two previous BACK to get to that no answers. AVAILABLE on available the memory (all modules units are set such deselected). ACTION: the switch settings on the memory boxes and repeat the reply. C.2.4 System Error Messages System error messages 1indicate conditions 1in which KLINIT cannot continue. These <conditions can be brought about by software, hardware, or environmental failures. Sometimes a retry will Dbe successfull; other times you may require the assistance of your field service engineer or software support specialist. For any system KL error, 1t dump listings; is very troubleshooting "KLI -- ?2". Unless noted messages 1s file is a important to PROGRAM save all log of prime material is problem. System error in a the the (KLINIT) console this otherwise, to restart specified following INITIALIZATION data messages and memory importance are when preceded by system action for all system error KLINIT dialog and re-prompt. Whenever a message text, it will be 1identified in the the KL format. 'dev:filename.ext;ver' The system KLI -- messages 2?2 BOOTSTRAP A software bootstrap are: LOAD or FAILED hardware program. error (See occurred while accompanying 1loading messages for additional information.) OPERATOR Reload ACTION: the bootstrap program by replying: KLI>BOOT KLI -- If the trouble ? C-RAM persists, DIFFERS AT OPERATOR KLI -- code the If the trouble ? CACHE ENABLE KL OPERATOR cache KLI -- ? service engineer. verify operation, the contents the KL10 Control RAM did not in the microcode appropriate and persists, microcode of octal match the file. reverify call your it field via the KLINIT service dialog. engineer. FAILED This is probably cache memory. information.) a hardware error while trying accompanying messages (See to configure the for additional ACTION: the service field ACTION: Reload Retry your XXXXXX During the microcode location xxxxxx in corresponding call operation; engineer. 1if You the can trouble also persists, temporarily call your reconfigure field with no memory. CANNOT DETERMINE DMA20 INTERLEAVE When configuring memory, KLINIT cannot determine the 1interleave switches on the memory boxes. hardware or a software failure. OPERATOR ACTION: Check the setting of operation. If the engineer. the setting of This can be a the 1interleave switches and retry the trouble persists, call your field service KL.L INITIALIZATION PROGRAM KLI (KLINIT) ? CANNOT DETERMINE PHYSICAL CONFIGURATION When configuring memory, KLINIT cannot determine the physical (See accompanying messages configuration of the memory units. for additional information.) OPERATOR ACTION: Reload the service KLI ? if system; trouble call persists, field your engineer. DIRECTORY [5,5] FIND CANNOT the KLINIT cannot locate PDP-11 system software error may have overlaid it. file directory; a SYSTEM ACTION: The system exits the KLINIT program. OPERATOR ACTION: if the trouble persists, call your software Reload the system; support KLI ? specialist. FIND HALT CANNOT LOOP KLINIT tried to start the microcode and it failed to run properly. OPERATOR ACTION: Reload the microcode; service KLI ? if the trouble persists, call your field engineer. CANNOT GET DEVICES KLINIT cannot open a system device for communications. probably a software error This is in RSX-20F. SYSTEM ACTION: The system exits the KLINIT program. OPERATOR ACTION: Reload the system; support KLI if the trouble persists, call your software specialist. ? CANNOT RUN KLINIT WHILE KL IS IN PRIMARY PROTOCOL An attempt was made to run the KLINIT program while the KL This condition can arise only if KLINIT processor was running. is loaded via the PARSER command language instruction: PAR>RUN SYSTEM KLINIT ACTION: The system exits to the TOPS-10 monitor. OPERATOR ACTION: follow the appropriate If the intent was to rerun KLINIT, then reload the system and to shut down TOPS-10; procedures C-9 KL enter the KLINIT properly, KLI INITIALIZATION set ? CANNOT A hardware restart or to If (KLINIT) TOPS-10 PROGRAMMER mode will and not software a determination. information.) failure power (See has failure while trying occurred or system accompanying crash messages CLOCK The a KL during for to memory additional ACTION: the microcode and retry the operation. persists, call your field service engineer. ? down KLINIT. Reload KLI shut reload KL from OPERATOR program. console START PROGRAM ERROR STOP DURING processor restart clock operation. KL If the trouble RESTART has stopped (See accompanying while KLINIT was messages monitoring for additional information.) OPERATOR ACTION: Retry loading the KL bootstrap and monitor. If persists, call your software support specialist. KLI ? CONFIGURATION The KL.CFG FILE cannot be other error has OPERATOR If the read, file the cannot new occurred. be file (See updated cannot because the o0ld written, or some messages for accompanying ACTION: 0old file cannot be read, you can exit file so no attempt will be made to read operation. A sequence of commands to do KLI -- PAR%M be information.) old the ENTER KLI>"2Z trouble CHANGED configuration file additional NOT the DIALOG KLINIT, rename the it, and then retry this would be: [NO,YES,EXIT,BOOT]? PIP PIP>XKL.CFG/RE=KL.CFG PIP>" 7% PAR%M KLI KLI KLI -- If the ? D-RAM ENTER DIALOG trouble [NO,YES,EXIT,BOOT]? persists, DIFFERS AT OPERATOR KLI code the If trouble ? DEPOSIT KLINIT software support specialist. verify operation, the contents the KL10 Dispatch RAM did not in the appropriate microcode of octal match the file. ACTION: Reload the your XXXXXX During the microcode location xxxxxx in corresponding call KL microcode and persists, reverify call your it field via the service KLINIT FAILED could not store information into KL10 dialog. engineer. memory. KL OPERATOR INITIALIZATION PROGRAM ACTION: Reload the system and retry the persists, call your field service KLI ? DEVICE 'device' KLINIT cannot for updated an OPERATOR (KLINIT) operation. engineer. If the trouble load device FULL find room on of the copy the specified front-end configuration file KL.CFG. ACTION: Exit from KLINIT and use a front-end system program such as PIP to delete files and make room for the updated KL.CFG file. KLI Then reenter KLINIT ? EXECUTE FAILED DF and retry the A diagnostic function execute initializing the KL10 processor. OPERATOR ? DF A diagnostic the READ KL10 function read failed WRITE OPERATOR the system call ? DIRECTIVE A system file ERROR error and your retry field -n ON occurred 'filename.' software support. OPERATOR ACTION: The ? DMA20 Over 16 HAS MANY the trouble while was initializing If the KLINIT operation. trouble engineer. failed while KLINIT was FILE your KLINIT is an was trying octal error the to trouble access the for by code the operation. If support specialist. blocks of ACTION: field If engineer. 'filename' while "n" operation. the use trouble GAPS non-contiguous OPERATOR Call TOO the service Reload the system and retry persists, call your software KLI If ACTION: persists, KLI operation. engineer. FAILED A diagnostic function write initializing the KL10 processor. Reload was ACTION: the system and retry the persists, call your field service DF KLINIT FAILED Reload ? while processor. OPERATOR KLI failed ACTION: Reload the system and retry the persists, call your field service KLI operation. service engineer. C-11 memory were found on a DMA20. KL KLI ? DMA20 INITIALIZATION PARITY ERROR RETRY PROGRAM FAILED AT (KLINIT) loc=data A previous parity error, signalled by a retried and failed again. "loc" is the octal digits) and contents of that OPERATOR ACTION: If possible, and reload "data" (12 octal warning failing digits) message, was address (eight represents the address. deselect the that portion systenm. of memory Otherwise, call that your is failing field service the trouble engineer. KLI ? EXAMINE KLINIT could OPERATOR Reload FAILED ? FILE KLINIT the the cannot on Ensure load 2 and your 'filename' OPERATOR KLI system call contents retry field NOT find alternate [5,5] examine of the memory. If engineer. FOUND BOOT.EXB, KL operation. service the bootstrap appropriate file in the microcode PDP-11 file, or file directory the front-end SYO0:. ACTION: that the file being requested device and retry the operation. NOT FIT FILE KL10 ACTION: persists, KLI not DOES PHYSICAL resides on CONFIGURATION The configuration file, KL.CFG, specifies an interleaving mode higher than that allowed by the interleaving switches on the memory units. OPERATOR ACTION: Reconfigure memory via the KLINIT dialog settings; then retry the operation. KLI ? I/0 An I/O file by ERROR error FILE software Reload The switch "n" is KLINIT an was RSX-11l trying octal to access the error code for use If the trouble ACTION: the system and call your ? ILLEGAL DMA20 IN A hardware error physical OPERATOR the support. persists, the change 'filename' occurred while 'filename.' OPERATOR KLI -n ON or retry software operation. support specialist. CONFIGURATION occurred memory the while KLINIT was trying to determine configuration. ACTION: Reload the system and retry the persists, call your field service C-12 operation. engineer. If the trouble KL KLI ? INPUT INITIALIZATION RECORD LENGTH PROGRAM (KLINIT) ERROR Error occurred while KLINIT was trying to read KL.CFG, appropriate microcode file, or the KL bootstrap file. error could be caused by software or hardware failure. OPERATOR the This ACTION: If possible, try other copies of the files. If the trouble persists, call vyour software support specialist. If the file in question is KL.CFG, you can get around the error by renaming or deleting the file. KLINIT will then write a new KL.CFG file by KLI ?2 default. INSUFFICIENT MEMORY FOR BOOTSTRAP Insufficient or no memory is available where KLINIT 1is trying to 1load the bootstrap program. (See any accompanying messages for additional information.) Memory selection switches on the memory units OPERATOR may be set in error. ACTION: Check memory selection switches on the memory units and retry the operation. If trouble persists, call your field service engineer. KLI ? KL HALT DURING RESTART The KL processor stopped on a HALT monitoring a restart operation. OPERATOR ACTION: Re-boot and load the KL monitor; your software support specialist. KLI instruction while KLINIT was ? MASTER RESET FAILED A master function reset to the KL if the trouble failed. This persists, 1is call a hardware the trouble error. OPERATOR ACTION: Reload the system and retry the persists, call your field service KLI ? A MEMORY CONFIGURATION hardware configuring or If FAILED software memory. operation. engineer. (See error occurred while accompanying messades KLINIT for was additional information.) OPERATOR ACTION: Reload the system and retry the persists, call your field service operation. engineer. If the trouble - KL KLI ? MICROCODE INITIALIZATION PROGRAM LOAD (KLINIT) FAILED A hardware or software error occurred while KLINIT was loading the KL microcode. (See accompanying messages for additional information.) OPERATOR Retry your KLI ? ACTION: loading the microcode; field service engineer. MICROCODE The verification are itemized OPERATOR Reload KLI in the ? NO MEMORY AT When KLINIT was of the KL preceding field unit OPERATOR and service persists, call microcode error discovered errors which messages. verify If the trouble ©persists, ZERO configuring with it. engineer. LOCATION address memory switches it set could at not locate any zero. ACTION: the memory switches set ? RECORD OUTPUT Error trouble FAILED microcode your Check the ACTION: call memory KLI VERIFY if at occurred configuration OPERATOR and ensure zero; units then retry LENGTH ERROR while file, KLINIT that one has 1its address write an updated loading. was trying to the problem KL processor KL.CFG. ACTION: > Retry the software KLI ? operation support POWER-FAIL KLINIT could recovery. if persists, call your during power-fail specialist. RESTART not and FAILED restart (See the accompanying message a for additional information.) OPERATOR Reload ACTION: the system the system engineer. KLI ? A READ using still one will of not the load come up, switch call procedures. your field If service ERROR hardware accessing bootstrap or software error occurred while KL.CFG, the appropriate microcode file. (See any accompanying messages KLINIT was file, or the KL for additional information.) OPERATOR Retry the software ACTION: operation; if the support specialist. C-14 trouble If the persists, file 1in call vyour question is KL KL.CFG, KLI -- you get ? ERROR DURING SYSTEM is a Reload you KLINIT A PROGRAM the the read operation by new file will be written by KL RESTART software error using of system still have one problems support TIMEOUT during the OPERATOR -- ? WRITE A hardware KL the OPERATOR KL processor the PHYSICAL switch up the procedures. system, call If your KL restart, the 30-second the up, dialog call your default. If software you support software copy error occurred while of the configuration messages for additional KLINIT file, was writing KL.CFG. (See any information.) ACTION: RELATING TO YES to will the trouble persists, call your KL MEMORY CONFIGURATION the CONFIGURE get a physical TYPE STORAGE DMA20 512K KL MEMORY memory question in the configuration map KLINIT printed as always 4 down by MEMORY: CONTROLLER ADDRESS 4 EXTERNAL MEMORY ADDRESS SIZE 00000000 512K This via system Retry the write operation; if software support specialist. If you answer dialog, you follows: operation. RESTART bring or updated REPORTS restart ERROR accompanying C.3 or ACTION: reloading an KL renaming default. specialist. DURING still cannot specialist. KLI a load bringing While KLINIT was monitoring a allowable time limit was exceeded. Try (KLINIT) ACTION: software ? file. around the OPERATOR -- can deleting This KLI INITIALIZATION map RESPONSE represents CONTROLLER the ADDRESS physical = memory for TYPE = STORAGE memory = controller total storage Under E XTERNAL MEMORY contiguous blocks and ADDRESS SI ZE = = their of the allocation, controller number; where: this is DMA20 type available RESPONSE, beginning size a memory the total beginning address memory of memory block C-15 storage addresses, block is broken where: KL INITIALIZATION PROGRAM (KLINIT) Whenever KLINIT configures KL memory, either by default or through the dialog, it prints a logical memory configuration map on your console terminal. 1If you answer NO to the CONFIGURE KL MEMORY gquestion, the map 1s not printed. The format of the map is as follows: LOGICAL MEMORY CONFIGURATION: ADDRESS SIZE RQO RQ1l RQ2 000000 512K 04 FOR ALL This tells you how KL memory CONTROLLER map ADDRESS SIZE = = KL size in = SBUS request bit 0 = = = SBUS SBUS SBUS request request request bit bit bit 1 2 3 = = 2 memory MG1l0-A total of 4 been configured, where: K words type; DMA20 for external memory mode maps memory 256K. INT DMA20 has controller interleave following Assume memory CONTYPE address RQ1 RQ2 RQ3 INT a memory RQO CONTYPE The memory KL RQ3 provide cabinets, The lower an example each with bound address of non-contiguous 4 banks in each of 32K cabinet memory. memory, is and 00400000, respectively. bank 1n each cabinet and question, PHYSICAL the memory MEMORY MEMORY: CONTROLLER ADDRESS 4 EXTERNAL MEMORY ADDRESS SIZE 00000000 96.K 00400000 96.K The If you deselect the high order answer YES to the CONFIGURE KL memory map will look like the following: physical for 00000000 logical INTERLEAVE STORAGE DMA20 192.K RESPONSE memory KL TYPE configuration, MEMORY question, LOGICAL MEMORY ADDRESS SIZE RQO RQl1 RQ2 00000000 96.K 04 FOR ALL 00300000 32.K NONEXISTANT 00400000 96.K 04 after will an look appropriate like the reply to the following: CONFIGURATION: CONTROLLER C.4 KLINIT l. DIALOG This FOR RQ3 CONTYPE INT DMAZ20 1 DMA20 1 MEMORY ALL EXAMPLES example shows the output at your console terminal when you load the system wusing the DISK load switch. KLINIT automatically takes the default values without asking you any questions. However, it does tell you that the RAMs (random access memories) have been loaded with the microcode. It prints out the logical memory map and then loads and starts the KL bootstrap program. KL INITIALIZATION RSX-20F V006A 0:02 -- VERSION KLI -- MICROCODE KLI -- ALL LOGICAL DBO:] V002Q MEMORY RUNNING VERSION CACHES (KLINIT) 21-JUN-76 [SYO:REDIRECTED TO [DBO : MOUNTED] KLI PROGRAM 131 LOADED ENABLED CONFIGURATION: ADDRESS SIZE CONTROLLER RQO RQ1l RQ2 00000000 256K 04 KLI -- BOOTS BOOTSTRAP FOR LOADED RQ3 CONTYPE INT DMA20 4 ALL AND STARTED Vv22(103) BTS> This example you load 1l and 2 start shows the set. The the microcode KL and RSX-20F the system output via KLINIT VOO6A -- KLI -- at your switch dialog bootstrap. memory is This configuration 0:02 console register terminal with when switches 0, entered only to 1load and allows vyou to leave the as were. they 21-JUN-76 [SYO:REDIRECTED TO [DBO : MOUNTED] KLI the DBO:] VERSION V002Q RUNNING ENTER DIALOG [NO,YES,EXIT,BOOT]? KLI>BOOT KLI -- ALL KLI -- BOOTSTRAP BOOTS CACHES ENABLED LOADED AND STARTED Vv22(103) BTS> This example shows the reconfigure KL memory. memory that configuration the 256K RSX-20F of VOO6A -- KLI -- the is 0:02 [SYO:REDIRECTED [DBO : MOUNTED] KLI and memory KLINIT dialog KLINIT prints out logical now 2-way being used to both the physical memory map interleaved. 21-JUN-76 TO DBO:] VERSION V002Q RUNNING ENTER DIALOG [NO,YES,EXIT,BOOT]? KLI>YES KLI -- RELOAD MICROCODE [YES,VERIFY,NO]? KLI>YES KLI -- MICROCODE KLI -- RECONFIGURE VERSION CACHE 131 LOADED [FILE,ALL,YES,NO]? KLI>ALL KLI -- ALL KLI -- CONFIGURE CACHES ENABLED KL MEMORY [FILE,ALL,YES,NO]? TYPE STORAGE DMAZ20 256K KLI>YES PHYSICAL MEMORY: CONTROLLER ADDRESS 4 EXTERNAL MEMORY ADDRESS SIZE 00000000 KLI -- RESPONSE 256K INTERLEAVE KL MEMORY KLI>2 C-17 [OPTIONAL,4,2,1]7? indicating KL INITIALIZATION LOGICAL MEMORY PROGRAM (KLINIT) CONFIGURATION: CONTROLLER ADDRESS 00000000 KLI -- SIZE 256K LOAD KL RQO 04 RQl FOR BOOTSTRAP RQ2 RQ3 CONTYPE ALL DMA20 [YES,NO,FILENAME]? INT 2 KLI>YES KLI -- CONFIGURATION KLI -- BOOTSTRAP BOOTS FILE LOADED ALTERED AND STARTED V22(103) BTS> This example shows the console terminal output when the system is loaded via the DECtape load switch. KLINIT did not find a KL.CFG file on the DECtape (¥NO FILE messages); therefore, it configured all cache and all available memory. Note that KLINIT informs you whenever it writes a new KL.CFG file; it does so whenever vyou answer ALL or YES to the CONFIGURE KL MEMORY question or if there was no previous KL.CFG file. RSX-20F VOO6A 0:05 21-JUN-76 [SYO:REDIRECTED TO [DTO : MOUNTED] DTO:] KLI -- VERSION KLI -- MICROCODE VERSION KLI -- % - KLI -- ALL KLI -- % LOGICAL NO V002Q FILE CACHES NO FILE MEMORY RUNNING ALL 131 LOADED CACHE BEING CONFIGURED ENABLED - ALL MEMORY BEING CONFIGURED CONFIGURATION: CONTROLLER ADDRESS 00000000 SIZE 256K RQO 04 RQl1 FOR FILE KLI -- CONFIGURATION KLI -- BOOTSTRAP BOOTS LOADED RQ2 ALL RQ3 CONTYPE DMA20 INT 4 ALTERED AND STARTED v22(103) BTS> 5. This example XXBOOT.EXB messages, shows that not found. KLINIT dialog was the RSX-20F V006A 0:02 [SYO:REDIRECTED TO [DBO : MOUNTED] KLI -- VERSION KLI -- ENTER DIALOG the specified Therefore, bootstrap after the restarts. 21-JUN-76 DBO:] V002Q RUNNING [NO,YES,EXIT,BOOT]? KLI>YES KLI -- RELOAD MICROCODE [YES,VERIFY,NO]? KLI>NO KLI -- RECONFIGURE CACHE [FILE,ALL,YES,NO]? KLI>NO KLI -- CONFIGURE KL MEMORY ([FILE,ALL,YES,NO]? KLI>NO KLI -- LOAD KL BOOTSTRAP [YES,NO,FILENAME]? KLI>XXBOOT KLI -- ? FILE KLI -- ? BOOTSTRAP KLI -- ENTER DIALOG KLI> 'DBO:XXBOOT.EXB;0' LOAD NOT FOUND FAILED [NO,YES,EXIT,BOOT]? fatal file error KL INITIALIZATION PROGRAM (KLINIT) reply first the This example shows that a <CR> defaults to listed. (NO to ENTER DIALOG) 1In this case the default the and assume signals KLINIT to bypass any further dialog default answers to all the remaining questions. However, it found only 96K of core available and when it tried to load two error the After failed. it program, bootstrap the messages, KLINIT restarts RSX-20F v006A the dialog. 21-JUN-76 0:02 [SYO:REDIRECTED TO DBO:] : MOUNTED] [DBO KLI -- VERSION V002Q RUNNING KLI -- ENTER DIALOG [NO,YES,EXIT,BOOT]? (carriage return was pressed here) KLI> KLI -- MICROCODE VERSION 131 LOADED KLI -- ALL ENABLED CACHES MEMORY CONFIGURATION: LOGICAL CONTROLLER SIZE ADDRESS 00000000 96K RQO 04 RQ2 RQ1 ALL FOR RQ3 CONTYPE DMA20 KLI -- ? INSUFFICIENT MEMORY FOR BOOTSTRAP KLI -- ? BOOTSTRAP KLI -- ENTER DIALOG LOAD INT 4 FAILED [NO,YES,EXIT,BOOT]? KLI> and 1load to This example shows the dialog first being used Then it shows the cache memory being microcode. the verify a from loaded be to 1is The TOPS-10 monitor configured. magnetic tape so the program BOOTM must be loaded in place of the default program, BOOTS. BOOTM is contained in the file MTBOOT.EXB. KLINIT accepts the file name, appends the magnetic default file type of .EXB, and loads and starts the tape bootstrap program. RSX-20F V006A 0:02 21-JUN-76 [SYO:REDIRECTED TO DBO:] [DBO : MOUNTED] KLI -- VERSION V002Q RUNNING KLI -- ENTER DIALOG [NO,YES,EXIT,BOOT]? KLI>YES KLI -- RELOAD MICROCODE [YES,VERIFY,NO]? KLI>YES KLI 131 --— MICROCODE VERSION KLI>BACK KLI -- RELOAD MICROCODE [YES,VERIFY,NO]? KLI>VERIFY KLI -- MICROCODE VERSION KLI -- RECONFIGURE CACHE 131 VERIFIED [FILE,ALL,YES,NO]? KLI>YES KLI -- ENABLE WHICH CACHES KL1>0,1,3 KLI -- CACHES 0,1,3 LOADED [FILE,ALL,YES,NO]J? KLI -- RECONFIGURE CACHE ENABLED KLI -- CONFIGURE KL MEMORY [ALL,NONE,0-3]7 [FILE,ALL,YES,NO]? KLI>YES PHYSICAL MEMORY: CONTROLLER ADDRESS TYPE 4 DMA20 EXTERNAL MEMORY RESPONSE ADDRESS SIZE 00000000 256K KLI -- INTERLEAVE KL MEMORY KLI>2 C-19 STORAGE 256K [OPTIMAL,4,2,1]7 KL INITIALIZATION LOGICAL MEMORY PROGRAM (KLINIT) CONFIGURATION: CONTROLLER ADDRESS SIZE RQO RQl RQ2 RQ3 CONTYPE 00000000 256K 04 FOR ALL DMA20 KLI -- LOAD KL BOOTSTRAP [YES,NO,FILENAME]? INT 2 KLI>MTBOOT KLI -- CONFIGURATION KLI -- BOOTSTRAP BOOTM FILE LOADED ALTERED AND STARTED V1(10) BTM> This example shows that an error occurred 1in verifying the existing microcode. Because the dialog is restarted after a fatal error, the solution to try is to answer YES to the RELOAD MICROCODE guestion the next time. RSX-20F VO00O6A 0:02 21-JUN-76 [SYO:REDIRECTED TO DBO:] [DBO : MOUNTED] KLI -- VERSION V002Q RUNNING KLI -- ENTER DIALOG [NO,YES,EXIT,BOOT]? KLI>YES KLI -- RELOAD MICROCODE [YES,VERIFY,NOJj? KLI>VERIFY KLI -- ? C-RAM KLI -- ? MICROCODE DIFFERS KLI -- ENTER DIALOG AT 1 VERIFY FAILED [NO,YES,EXIT,BOOT]? KLI> This example shows ESCape RELOAD MICROCODE question also shows repeated. console being used during the reply to in order to restart the dialog. unacceptable answers causing questions Finally, a CTRL/Z causes the dialog to exit processor RSX-20F command V006A 0:02 language (the PARSER). 21-JUN-76 [SYO:REDIRECTED TO DBO:] [DBO : MOUNTED] KLI -- VERSION V002Q RUNNING KLI -- ENTER DIALOG [NO,YES,EXIT,BOOT]? KLI>YES KLI -- RELOAD MICROCODE [YES,VERIFY,NO]? KLI>VER<KESC> KLI -- ENTER DIALOG [NO,YES,EXIT,BOOT]? KLI>YNOT KLI -- COMMAND KLI -- ENTER DIALOG SYNTAX ERROR [NO,YES,EXIT,BOOT]? KLI>YES KLI -- RELOAD MICROCODE [YES,VERIFY,NO]? KLI>NO KLI -- RECONFIGURE CACHE [FILE,ALL,YES,NO]? KLI>MAYBE KLI -- COMMAND KLI -- RECONFIGURE SYNTAX ERROR CACHE [FILE,ALL,YES,NO]? KLI>NO KLI -- ' CONFIGURE KL MEMORY [FILE,ALL,YES,NO]? KLI>NO KLI -- KLI>"Z PAR% LOAD KL BOOTSTRAP [YES,NO,FILENAME]? to to the It be the INDEX Abnormal ABORT termination, command Account in 1-2 PARSER, BATCON, B-3 control, weekly, 5-15 ACCT.SYS file, interpreter, /ALCNT switch 2-6 in LPFORM.INI, ALGOL compiler, output 2-6 spooler 4-29 /ALIGN switch 4-38 /ALSLP switch command, of, operator messages, 4-26 starting up, in LPFORM.INI, of memory of file configuration, 4-21 4-22 EXAMINE, 4-22 structures, KILL, a front operator 4-22 MCORE, 2-6 DECtape drive, Asynchronous 4-21 GO, 4-22 HELP, 4-22 5-14 interpreter, APL Assigning ends, MJOB, 7-25 4-21 4-21 MTIME, 2-2 NEXT, command, 4-21 4-21 NONJOB, 4-22 OPERATOR, 4-23 device, A-1 disk unit, A-2 job, A-2 :AUTO command in OPSER, 4-5 /AUTO switch in DTELDR, 6-15, 6-16 Auto-load with DTELDR, 6-15, REQUEUE, 4-23 RESET, 4-21 ROUTE, 4-24 START, 4-21 STOP, 4-24 TELL, 4-24 6-16 TIME, 4-21 Auto-reload, WHAT, 4-22 DECsystem-10, 6-1 default monitor, KLINIT, 6-4 AUXACC.SYS file, 6-4 BOOT1ll program, 3-12, 6-17 BOOTDX program, 3-14, 6-18 5-4 Capabilities Card BACKSPACE output spooler command, 4-29 BACKUP overflow, weekly, Backup BACKUP /BANNER switch CR10-E, 7-24 CR10-F, 7-23 unloading, 5-16 Card 5-10 in LPFORM.INI, BASIC interpreter, 2-6 BAT blocks, 5-19 /BATCH switch in SPACE, reader CARDS 4-38 C-1 2-3 loading, 7-22 operation of, 5-18 5-17 system disk, utility, 2-7 KLINIT, punches, Card reader, 2-3 cleaning of, 7-25 program, daily, 5-10 multi-reel save, tape 4-19 CURRENT, EXIT, 6-8 Analysis 4-22 commands, CORE, 4-38 ATTACH display parameters LOG file, 4-25 monitoring, 4-26 operation of, 4-24 BATCON in LPFORM.INI, Altering subjobs, 4-21 4-37 ALIGN to, 4-19 to control commands to set parameters, 5-4 Addressing memories, 6-10 /AFTER switch in QUEUE, 4-15 AID 4-19 commands commands 4-22 7-22 7-22 input to SPRINT, output spooler command, 4-29 Carriage control channels LPl10, 5-11 tape, 7-16 7-12 standard Index-1 for, LP10, 7-13 4-47 INDEX Central processor, error /CHAIN recovery, switch 2-1 Console terminal, 2-1 Console/Diagnostic processor, 2-1 :CONTINUE command in OPSER, 4-6 Conventions for KLINIT, C-2 Convert PC value to symbolic, 6-1 in LPFORM.INI, 4-38 Changing forms, LP07 printer, 7-4 LP10 printer, 7-8 Changing MLIMIT in LPTSPL, 4-35 CHANNEL command in MAKVFO, 7-12 Channels for carriage control tape, 7-16 CHKPNT output spooler (CONT.) 6-6 /COPIES switch in QUEUE, 4-15 CORE command in BATCON, 4-21 /CORE switch in QUEUE, 4-15 command, 4-29 CpPl10-D, 2-3 CR10-E card reader, 2~ CR10~-F card reader, 2- Crash data, Cleaning, card preserve, reader, 7-25 DECtape drive, Crash 7-26 devices, 7-1 disk drives, 7-36 line printer, 7-22 magnetic tape, 7-34 CLEAR CONSOLE command 6-6 restart procedure, 6-5 CRT display terminals, 2-5 :CTRL/C command in OPSER, 4-7 CURRENT command in, BATCON, 4-22 output spooler, 4-29 in PARSER, :CURRENT OPSER command, 4-6 B-3 CLEAR INCREMENT PARSER, command in B-3 CLEAR MEMORY command in PARSER, Damage CLEAR NOT command in PARSER, B-4 CLEAR REPEAT command in PARSER, B-4 :CLOSE command in OPSER, 4-6 COBOL compiler, 2-6 Command switches in QUEUE, 4-15 Commands, operator-privileged, A-1 output spooler, 4-29 SPRINT, set user to parameters, 4-21 4-53 4-53 front ends, 2-6 2-6 FORTRAN, 2-6 Configuration maps in KLINIT, log program, 5-22 DDRPI program, 5-23 command, A-6 documentation, OPERATOR, PROGRAMMER, USER, B-1 5-19 in QUEUE, 4-15 6-2 2-3 6-4 Defaults in KLINIT, C-1 :DEFINE command in OPSER, 1-3 DETACH :DEVICE bit, operator disk unit command, B-1 4-6 2-5 dismounting, 7-26 mounting, 7-26 Default monitor auto-reload, Console mode, MAINTENANCE, OPSER, auto-reload of, 6-1 DECtape drive, assigning a, 7-25 cleaning of, 7-26 operation of, 7-25 DECtape load switch, 3-1 DETACH device A-3 C-3 operator Console program, DDRPC Definitions, switch register C-15 Configure memory, KLINIT, in station, DCRPE DECtapes, 2-2 Compiler, COBOL, command STOPCD, 2-5 7-11 DECsystem-10, operator, Communications file station, LPO7, remote of 5-14 DDT utility, 2-7 /DEADLINE switch subjobs, 4-54 ALGOL, on :DAYTIME 4-19 BATCON BATCON two-way, remote DAVFU DEBUG Communication, one-way, DAS98 DC72 4-48 to BATCON, to control 4-22 to assessment structures, B-3 operator command in cleaning of, 7-1 operation of, 7-1 B-1 Index-2 3-6 command, A-3 Devices, B-1 4-6 OPSER, 4-7 INDEX Dialog error messages KLINIT, DIGITAL in Dual processor, loading, 3-11 Dual-ported disk drives, Dumping a DL10, 6-17 Dumping a DX10, 6-18 Duties, hardware-related, 1-1 C-7 documentation, Direct access vertical unit, 7-11 Disk drives, cleaning of, 7-36 (CONT.) 1-2 format dual-ported, 2-3 operation of, 7-35 Disk formatting, operator, 1l-1 data channel, DCRPE program, 5-19 dumping, DDRPC program, 5-22 error DDRPI program, 5-23 reloading, Disk input DISK load to SPRINT, switch, Disk packs, formatting, 6-18 recovery, 4-47 5-19 5-19 systems, EMERGENCY POWER OFF 2-3 ENABLE RHP03, 2-3 RHP04, 2-3 Entering Entry RHP06, 2-3 RHS04, 2-3 4-37 Environmental Display parameters of BATCON, 4-22 /DISPOSE switch in QUEUE, 4-15 Error format error Error 6-17 central DN81 DN82 remote remote station, station, 2-5 2-5 DTE20-type installation-supplied, operator, 1-2 4-38 2-1 DTE20-type front-end 6-15, error 6-16 DTELDR, action switches, 3-13 /AUTO switch in, 6-15, 6-16 auto-load with, 6-15, 6-16 /IMAGE switch, 3-13 modification switches, 3-13 /NODUMP switch, 3-13, 6-15, /NOLOG switch, 3-13 OPR.ATO file for, 6-17 end, 6-15, 6-15, EXAMINE command EXAMINE ELEVEN in BATCON, command in 4-22 PARSER, EXAM?&% KL command in PARSER, EXAM?&% PC command in PARSER, EXAM?&% TEN command in PARSER, Exam?lis of KLINIT dialog, Exam§1%§ of LPFORM.INI file, 5-14 5-14 DTE20, recovery, front 6-1 end, power failure, 6-14 user core failure, 6-7 in LPFORM.INI, program, front HUNG condition, 6-5 parity error, 6-7 1-2 Documentation on tape, 1-2 Documenting complaints, 5-12 program, 4-7 DX10 data channel, 6-18 front-end processor, 6-15 1-3 DSKRAT OPSER, 6-1 6-16 Documentation, DSKLST file, conditions, processor, DL10-type /DRUM switch in recovery, 2-5 1-2 error QUASAR, 4-17 command station, DIGITAL, 5-12 LPFORM.INI :ERROR remote log, 3-1 messages, DN80 console switch, complaints, OPSER, 4-9 PARSER, B-7 dumping a, 6-17 reloading a, 6-17 front-end load 6-14 DL10, recovery, switch, 3-1 RHP02, DL10-type 6-18 6-18 3-1 mapping, Disk 1-1 software-related, DX10 2-3 6-16 :EXIT OPSER EXIT command 6-16 /RELOAD switch, 3-13 reload with, 6-15, 6-16 BATCON, 4-21 7-12 output 4-7 in, MAKVFU, SPRINT, Index-3 command, spooler, 4-48 4-29 INDEX FACT files, MONEY 1listings, (CONT.) HALT STOPCD, 6-3 5-13 Hardcopy terminals, 2-4 saving, 5-12 /FACT switch in SPACE, FACT.SYS file, 5-3 Hardware control print Faulty memory module, FILCOM program, 5-7 FILDDT 6-6 program, for output errors, Hardware-related and HELP line output echoing, in, 4-22 MAKVFU, 7-12 spooler, SPRINT, :HELP printer, 7-4 LP10, 4-30 4-48 OPSER command, 4-7 /JHELP switch in SPACE, 5-3 HUNG condition error recovery, 5-23 6-5 7-4 INFORMATION 7-8 control, LP07, 7-11 LP10, 7-12 FORMS command output in MAKVFU, spooler 7-12 in MAKVFU, 7-12 Informational messages KLINIT, command, :FREE command output command, in OPSER, spooler 4-7 command, 4-30 Front-end BOOT1l1l, DTELDR, Front-end C-2 TOPS-10, WHY 3-10 OPTION:, 3-10 3-9 RELOAD:, Input device SPRINT, 3-10 characteristics 4-48 Input devices for SPRINT, 4-47 Installation-supplied documentation, 1-2 loader, 3-12 3-12 processor recovery, 3-10 TIME:, 4-30 FREEZE DATE:, KLINIT, STARTUP compiler, 2-6 output spooler command C-5 Initialization dialog, 4-30 FORTRAN FORWARD Front command BATCON, change, LP07, FORMS 1l-1 4-38 A-11 Forms 6-7 duties, /HEADER switch in LPFORM.INI, Formatting, disk packs, 5-19 partial disk pack, Forms den- 7-11 Hardware 6-8 File compare program, 5-7 File structures, analysis of, 5-14 damage assessment of, 5-14 Fillers sity, 5-2 of error 6-15 ends, Interleave memory in C-4 Interleave settings, asynchronous, 2-2 synchronous, 2-2 switch MF10, 6-11 MG1l0, 6-13 MH10, 6-13 Interleaving memory, KLINIT,. 6-9 Interpreter, GALAXY batch GALAXY components, BATCON, LPTSPL, system, 4-16 SPRINT, JUMP 4-43 file, 2-6 command STOPCD, command in OPSER, in PARSER, "keep-alive" count, in, command BATCON, 5-12 output 5-12 SPRINT, Index-4 4-4 6-2 KILL 4-48 program, GRIPE.CTL :JCONT JOB GALAXY utility, 2= GO command in, BATCON, 4-22 output spooler, 4-30 GRIPE 2-6 4-28 QUEUE, 4-14 SPRINT, 4-46 SPROUT, 2-6 APL, BASIC, 4-19 4-34 output spoolers, QUASAR, 4-16 AID, 6-4 4-22 spooler, 4-48 4-30 B-5 INDEX :KILL OPSER /KILL switch command, 4-7 in QUEUE, :KJOB command KLERR routine, in Loading card reader, 7-22 communications front ends, 3-11 Loading dual processor, 3-11 4-15 OPSER, Loading 4-7 6-4 KLINIT, capabilities, Loading RSX-20F, from DECtape, 3-4 from disk, 3-3 C-1 configuration maps, C-15 configure memory, C-3 conventions for, C-2 defaults, C-1 via SW/REG, 3-5 Loading the central 3-8 Loading dialog error messages, C-7 dialog rules, C-2 exit, C-5 how to enter, C-1 informational messages, C-5 interleave memory, load bootstrap, memory maps, messages, C-4 C-5 auto-reload, KLINIT dialog, examples :KSYS 3-3 the DL10, DTE20, LOCK spooler command, BATCON, 4-25 output 3-12 3-12 4-30 C-7 file :LOGIN C-3 in command in OPSER, 4-7 LP07 line printer, forms change, 7-4 C-6 6-4 forms OPSER, 4-4, control, 7-11 ribbon change, 7-16 ribbon reversal, 7-18 vertical forms control, C-16 in front end, the C-2 of, command channel, Loading via Loading via LOG messages, KLINIT data TOPS-10, from disk, 3-8 from tape, 3-8 C-4 verify microcode, warning messages, DX10 processor, Loading C-15 error the 3-14 Loading the reconfigure cache, C-3 reload microcode, C-3 system (CONT.) 5-13 7-11 LP10 line printer, carriage control LA180 terminal, LA35RO LA36 2- 4 terminal, terminal, LA37APL 2 -4 entry 2-6 LIMIT output in spooler cleaning of, operation printer forms Line printer 7-16 ribbon change, 7-4 change, printers, LP07, 2-2 LP1l0, 2-2 /LINES switch in LPFORM.INI, 4-38 LINK-10 utility, 2-7 /LIST switch Load bootstrap in Load switches, 3-1 in QUEUE, Loader, BOOTDX, 3-14 4-15 KLINIT, 4-40 switches, /CHAIN, 4-38 /DRUM, 4-38 /HEADER, 4-38 /LINES, 4-38 /NOTE, 4-38 /PAUSE, 4-38 /RIBBON, 4-38 /TAPE, 4-38 /TRAILER, 4-39 /VFU, 4-39 /JWHAT, 4-39 /WIDTH, 4-39 7-1 Line Line 4-15 7-22 of, of, 4-37 4-37 4-37 4-38 /ALSLP, 4-38 /BANNER, 4-38 command, in QUEUE, 7-12 /ALCNT, /ALIGN, 7-12 4-30 /LIMIT switch Line printer, file, format, LPFORM.INI MAKVFU, tape, 7-8 7-12 change, 7-19 reversal, 7-21 examples 2-6 interpreters, 2-6 command control, LPFORM.INI compilers, LENGTH forms ribbon 2-4 Languages, assemblers, change, ribbon 2-4 terminal, forms LPI command LPTSPL, C-4 abort in MAKVFU, 7-12 4-34 current print request, 4-36 changing MLIMIT in, divert output from, Index-5 4-35 4-36 INDEX MG10 LPTSPL (cont.), operator messages, special 4-40 forms handler, starting, (CONT.) 4-28 starting and stopping, 4-37 6-13 6-12, 4-35 switch settings, 6-13 memory selection switches, 6-12 memory, 6-12 interleave switch settings, 2-6 Magnetic tape drives, 2-3 cleaning of, 7-34 operation of, 7-26 Magnetic tape input to SPRINT, 6-13 memory address switch settings, 6-13 memory selection switches, 6-12 4-47 Magnetic tapes, dismounting, 7-27 mounting, 7-27 MAINTENANCE console mode, MAKVFU commands, CHANNEL, 7-12 EXIT, 7-12 FORMS, 7-12 HELP, 7-12 INFORMATION, 7-12 LENGTH, 7-12 LPI, 7-12 ouTrpuT, 7-12 PAGE, 6-12 memory address MH10 MACRO assembler, memory, interleave switch settings, MJOB command in BATCON, 4-21 MLIMIT output spooler command, 4-31 /MODIFY switch in QUEUE, B-1 Modules, memory, 4-15 2-1 MONEY listings FACT files, 5-13 MONEY program, 5-3 Monitor error stop, 6-2 :MONITOR command in OPSER, 4-7 Monitor parity error, 6-7 Monitoring BATCON, 4-26 Mounting DECtapes, 7-26 Mounting disk packs, 7-35 Mounting magnetic tapes, 7-27 +MSGLVL command in OPSER, 4-7 MSGLVL command in SPRINT, 4-48 MTIME command in BATCON, 4-21 Multi-reel save in BACKUP, 5-18 Multiplexer, 2-2 7-12 MAKVFU program, 7-11 Mapping disk packs, 5-19 MCORE, BATCON command, 4-21 SPRINT command, 4-48 MCR PARSER command, B-5 Memory, addressing, 6-10 interleaving, 6-9 maps, NEXT command, BATCON, 4-21 output spooler, C-15 modules, 2-1, 6-10, 6-12 multiplexer, 2-2 parity errors, 6-7 port switches, 6-12 selection switches, 6-12 Memory address switches, MF10, 6-11 MGl10, 6-12, MH10, 6-13 /NODUMP 6-15, 6-16 Non-daily operator tasks, 5-15 Non-scheduled operator tasks, 5-19 NONJOB command in BATCON, 4-22 NOSUPPRESS output spooler 6-13 command, Memory configuration, altering of, 6-8 Message format, STOPCD, 6-2 Message of the day, 4-31 switch in DTELDR, 4-31 /NOTE switch in LPFORM.INI, NOTICE.TXT file, 5-1 Numbering of memories, 6-10 4-38 5-1 MESSAGE output spooler command, 4-30 MF10 memory, 6-10 OMOUNT, FILE command, 4-11 MOUNT/DISMOUNT command, interleave switch settings, 6-11 memory address switch settings, 6-11 Index-6 PROCEED? PROCEED? prompt, 4-12 replies, 4-12 4-11 INDEX OMOUNT system program, 4-11 One-way communication, Operating systems, 2-5 4-54 Operator in commands :AUTO, 7-26 BATCON, :CTRL/C, :DEFINE, A-2 4-6 4 A-3 7 SET CORMAX, A-4 :JCONT, SET CORMIN, A-=5 :KILL, 4-7 :KJOB, 4-7 DATE, A-6 MEMORY, SET NOMESSAGE, SET OPR, SET SCHED, TTY, A-6 A-7 A-8 4-8 : RESOURCES, A-14 : RESTRICT, configure memory, A-6 :REVIVE, XCHNGE, A-14 Operator commands, OPSER, 4-4 PARSER, B-2 :SCHED, : SEND, OPERATOR console mode, B-1 Operator dialog, KLINIT, C-2 Operator documentation, Operator duties, 1-1 Operator 4-4 :QUEUE, A-8 SET VMMAX, 4-7 :KSYS, 4-4 : LOGIN, 4-7 :MONITOR, 4-7 :MSGLVL, 4-7 A-7 SET to :HELP, A-5 SET 7 7 A-3 A-4 DAYTIME, 4- 6 4- 6 BREAK, SET 1-2 messages, 4-8 4-5 4-8 4-8 4-8 :SET BATMAX, 4 :SET BATMIN, 4 4- :SET BREAK, :SET CORMAX, 4-5 :SET CORMIN, 4-5 :SET DATE, :SET DAYTIME, 4- 5 :SET LOGMAX, 4-5 4-5 4-5 BATCON, 4-26 :SET MEMORY, LPTSPL, 4-40 :SET NOMESSAGE, SPRINT, 4-49 :SET OPR, :SET RUN, SPROUT, 4-44 Operator responsibilities, Operator tasks, 1-1 5-1 daily, 5-1 non-daily, 5-15 non-scheduled, 5-19 Operator's notebook, 1-3 Operator-privileged commands, 4-4 6-15, 4-5 SCHED, 4-5 :SET TTY, : SLOGIN, : SYSTAT, 6-16 feature, commands to operation, 4-8 :TIME, 4- 8 :TLDG, 4- 8 4-8 4-9 :UNRESTRICT, 4-2 subjobs, 4-9 4-1 error messages, 4 - 8 :TSILENCE, 4-4 to OPSER, 4-5 4-8 4- 8 :TTYTST, commands 4-5 :SILENCE, OPSER, AUTO :SET :STOP, 4-5 4-5 :SET VMMAX, A-1 OPR.ATO file, for DTELDR, 4-5 4-6 :DAYTIME, SET SET 4-2 4-7 A-2 DETACH diskunit, 4-4 to, 4-6 :CONTINUE, A-1l DETACH device, for, 4-5 :CLOSE, :CURRENT, ATTACH diskunit, job, (cont.), operator commands, ATTACH device, ATTACH OPSER specifying subjobs starting, 4-1 timestamp, 4-3 user commands for, OPSER commands, Operation of, card reader, 7-22 DECtape drives, 7-25 devices, 7-1 disk drives, 7-35 line printer, 7-1 magnetic tape drives, OPERATOR command 4-23 (CONT.) 4-5 :WHAT, 4-9 :WHERE, 4-9 4-3 OPSER system program, 4-1 OUTPUT command in MAKVFU, Index-7 7-12 INDEX Output spooler ALIGN, CARDS, CHKPNT, 4-29 4-29 4-29 4-29 FORMS, FREEZE, (cont.), ELEVEN, EXAMINE KL, B-4 EXAMINE PC, B-4 EXAMINE TEN, MCR, 4-30 B-4 B-=5 B-5 REPEAT, 4-30 RUN, B-=5 B-6 HELP, 4-30 SET CONSOLE, KILL, 4-30 SET INCREMENT, SET MEMORY, SET NOT, SET REPEAT, LIMIT, LOCK, 4-30 4-30 MESSAGE, MLIMIT, NEXT, 4-30 4-31 PAUSE, PLOT, 4-31 4-31 4-31 REPRINT, 4-31 REQUEUE, 4-32 B-6 B-6 B-6 B-6 SHUTDOWN, 4-31 NOSUPPRESS, B-4 B-5 QuUIT, 4-30 B-4 EXAMINE JUMP, 4-30 FORWARD, commands CLEAR REPEAT, 4-29 CURRENT, GO, PARSER 4-29 BACKSPACE, EXIT, commands, (CONT.) B-7 B-7 WHAT CONSOLE, WHAT INCREMENT, B-7 WHAT MEMORY, B-7 WHAT REPEAT, B-7 WHAT VERSION, B-7 B-7 SKPCOPY, 4-33 Partial save of system, 5-11 /PAUSE switch in LPFORM. INI, 4-38 SKPFILE, 4-33 PAUSE RESET, 4-32 START, STOP, 4-33 4-33 SUPPRESS, TAPE, 4-33 PIP 4-34 in PLOT spoolers, starting, utility, PLEASE UNLOCK, 4-34 WHAT, 4-34 Output in, spooler, 4-31 SPRINT, 4-49 Peripherals, 2-2 4-34 UNFREEZE, command output 4-28 2-7 command, 4-53 BATCON, 4-25 output spooler command, 4-31 4-28 Plotter XY10-A, 2-4 Plotter XY10-B, 2-4 Ports, memory, PAGE command Paper in MAKVFU, installation, LP07, 7-4 LP10, 7-8 Parity error, monitor, user error 6-7 B-1 B-1 commands, prompts, B-1 3-1 system, data, 3-3, 6-6 of, 7-11 of, 7-11 switch in QUEUE, — PROCEED?, OMOUNT prompt, OMOUNT B-1 reply, 4-12 4-12 Processor, B-3 INCREMENT, CLEAR MEMORY, CLEAR NOT, the crash 3-1 6-14 4-15 B-=2 B-3 CLEAR CONSOLE, CLEAR switch, outages, /PRIORITY B-7 operator commands, switch, Print density, hardware control software control B-1 messages, ABORT, 6-14 Preserve exiting, PARSER 6-14 fluctuations, Powering up 6-15 modes, entering, restart, Power POWER ON PARSER, console fail Power 6-=7 core, 2-2 Power POWER OFF 6-7 recovery, 7-12 B-4 central, 2-1 Console/Diagnostic, B-3 B-3 front-end, PROGRAMMER Index-8 2-1 2-2 console mode, B-1 INDEX QUASAR, 4-16 error QUEUE :RESTRICT messages, 4-17 :REVIVE command, format, 4-14 queues, 4-14 switches, 4-15 :QUEUE command QUEUE switches, in OPSER, /AFTER, 4-15 /COPIES, 4-15 /CORE, 4-15 /DEADLINE, 4-15 /DISPOSE, 4-15 /KILL, 4-15 /LIMIT, 4-15 /LIST, 4-15 /MODIFY, 4-15 /PRIORITY, 4-15 /RESTART, 4-15 /TAPE, 4-15 /TIME, 4-15 QUEUE QUIT (CONT.) | | system program, command in 4-8 4-14 PARSER, B-5 command command in in OPSER, OPSER, RH20, 2-1 RHP02 disk system, 2-3 RHPO03 disk system, 2-3 RHP04 disk system, 2-3 RHP06 disk system, 2-3 RHS04 disk system, 2-3 Ribbon change, line printer, 7-16 LP07, 7-16 LP10, 7-19 Ribkon reversal, LP07, 7-18 LP10, 7-21 /RIBBON switch in LPFORM. INI, 4-38 ROUTE command in BATCON, 4-24 RP02 disk packs, dismounting of, 7-35 formatting, 5-19, 5-22 mounting of, 7-35 RP03 disk drive, RP03 disk packs, 7-37 dismounting of, 7-35 formatting, 5-19, 5-22 REACT program, Reconfigure 5-5, cache mounting 5-6 with C-3 Reconfiguring memories, Recovery procedures, Reloading, DL10, 6-17 DX10, 6-18 KLINIT, drive, RP04 disk packs, 6-1 2-5 DN80, 2-5 DN81, 2-5 DN82, 2-5 Removing REPEAT Reply REPRINT in PLEASE output Output RESET drive, RP06 disk packs, jobs, Output crash, /RESTART monitor, 2-5 in program, Saving disk 6-3 PARSER, B-6 2-7 4-32 contents, files, command Selection of command, :SEND command 4-32 BATMAX in 5-10 5-12 OPSER, memory, SEND :SET 4-8 6-9 4-54 in OPSER, 4-8 command in OPSER, command in OPSER, 4-5 :SET OPSER, BREAK command in OPSER, 4-5 6-5 in QUEUE, BATMIN 4-5 :SET procedure, switch command RUNOFF :SCHED in B-1 errors, Saving FACT 4-49 4-8 Restart command, in, command parser, B-5 in, spooler, :RESOURCES 7-35 4-54 4-21 SPRINT, of, detected 5-8 PARSER, command, spooler, BATCON, 7-39 formatting, 5-23 mounting of, 7-35 4-23 command 7-35 7-35 disk dismounting spooler command BATCON, of, RP06 RUN 4-31 REQUEUE 5-23 RSX-20F, inactive to of, formatting, command command 7-38 dismounting mounting 2-5 DC72, 7-35 disk 6-9 stations, DAS98, of, RP04 microcode, C-3 with DTELDR, 6-15 Remote 4-15 4-5 4-8 SET BREAK A-4 Index-9 operator command, INDEX SET CONSOLE command Special in PARSER, Specifying operator input, SET LOGMAX command to, operator messages, 4-49 in PARSER, in OPSER, GO, 4-48 4-48 HELP, 4-48 KILL, 4-48 MEMORY, MSGLVL, command, command, MEMORY A-6 B-6 command in OPSER, command in OPSER, operator command, 4-49 RESET, 4-49 4-49 STOP, 4-49 TELL, 4-49 4-49 SPRINT A-7 system program SET OPR operator SET REPEAT B-6 4-5 command, A-7 command in PARSER, B-7 :SET RUN :SET SCHED command in OPSER, command in 4-5 OPSER, 4-5 divert output from, 4-44 operator messages, 4-44 starting, 4-28, 4-44 SPROUT system program, 4-43 Standard LP10 carriage control tape, 7-13 START command in, SET SCHED operator command, A-8 :SET TTY command in OPSER, 4-5 BATCON, SET SPRINT, operator command, :SET VMMAX command A-8 in OPSER, 4-5 SET VMMAX operator command, A-14 Setting memory off-line, 6-8 Shutdown of system, 5-13 SHUTDOWN command in PARSER, B-7 :SILENCE command in OPSER, 4-8 SKPCOPY output spooler command, output spooler command, 4-21 spooler, : SLOGIN command in OPSER, Software control of print density, 7-11 Software-related duties, program, 2-7 SPACE program with, /BATCH switch, 5-11 /FACT switch, 5-2 /HELP switch, 5-3 4-8 4-33 4-49 Starting, BATCON, 4-19 LPTSPL, 4-28 OPSER, 4-1 output spooler, SPRINT, SPROUT, the STOP 4-47 4-28, system, command output :STOP 4-28 4-44 3-1 in, 4-24 spooler, SPRINT, 4-33 SOUP output BATCON, 4-33 SKPFILE 4-46 SPROUT, SET NOT command in PARSER, :SET OPR command in OPSER, TTY 4-48 PAUSE, WHAT, 4-5 SET NOMESSAGE 4-48 START, 4-5 :SET NOMESSAGE 4-47 starting, 4-47 commands, MCORE, PARSER :SET 4-48 input devices, 4-47 magnetic tape input 4-5 operator 4-28 SPRINT B-6 :SET 4-2 card reader input to, 4-47 disk input to, 4-47 input device characteristics, command, command OPSER, SPRINT, EXIT, INCREMENT to 4-46 output, A-6 SET subjobs Spoolers, SET DATE operator command, A-5 :SET DAYTIME command in OPSER, 4-5 DAYTIME forms handler LPTSPL, 4-37 :SETBEgRMAX command in OPSER, SET éggMAX operator command, :SETAEgRMIN command in OPSER, SET éagMIN operator command, :SETjggTE command in OPSER, SET (CONT.) 4-33 4-49 command in OPSER, 4-8 STOPCD, 1-1 DEBUG, 6-2 HALT, 6-3 JOB, 6-2 STOP, STOPCD 6-3 message SUPPRESS output Index-10 format, command in, spooler, 4-33 6-2 INDEX SW/REG load Switches, DECtape DISK switch, load, load, EMERGENCY ENABLE SYSTAT 3-1 command L.LA180, LA36, 2-2 for OPSER, 2-1 of, 3-3 5-11 procedures, services, 4-1 shutdown, software, 2-5 2-4 2-4 LA37APL, 4-8 6-1 5-13 2=-5 2-4 2-4 LA35R0O, System, recovery 2-1 display, hardcopy, command, 5-8 logbook, 1-3 partial save powering up, 4-25 4-49 console, 3-1 hardware, BATCON, SPRINT, CRT 3-1 front-ends, 2-7 in, Terminals, 3-9 :SYSTAT command 3-1 SW/REG load, 3-1 Switch register, 3-1 bit definitions, 3-6 SYSCHK, program, TELL 3-1 POWER OFF, POWER OFF, Synchronous TECO 3-1 load, POWER ON, 3-1 (CONT.) 2-4 vI50, 2-5 VT52, 2-5 VT6l, 2-5 Terminating timesharing, Termination, abnormal, 1-2 Text files on tape, 1-2 TIME command in BATCON, 4-21 :TIME command in OPSER, 4-8 /TIME switch in QUEUE, 4-15 Timesharing, starting terminating, 5-13 Timestamp in OPSER, total : TLOG the, 3-1 save of, 5-16 utilities, System 2-7 components, 2-~1 System program, command TOPS-10 batch TOPS-10 TOPS-10 initial monitor, Total OMOUNT, 4-11 /TRAILER switch 4-1 QUEUE, 4-14 4-16 dialog, 3-9 2-5 system, 5~16 in LPFORM.INI, 4-39 TRPSET, 3-14 SPRINT, 4-46 :TSILENCE SPROUT, 4-43 :TTYTST command command TUl0 magnetic TULlO0 tape, in OPSER, OPSER, 4-9 tape drive, 2-3 7-27 TUle, 7-27 TU40, 7-29 TUl6 TU41l, 7-29 TU45, 7-34 7-27 mounting, 7-27 TU40 magnetic tape drive, TU70, 7-29 TU71, 7-29 TU72, 7-29 7-28 tape, dismounting, 7-30 TU40 tape, Tape mounting, 7-27 dismounting, 7-29 mounting, 7-29 TU41 magnetic tape drive, TU40, 7-29 TU41 TU41l, 7-29 dismounting, TU45, 7-32 mounting, TU70, 7-29 TU71, 7-29 TU72, 7-29 TUl0, 7-27 TUle, TAPE output TU45 spooler command, switch in LPFORM.INI, switch 7-29 7-29 magnetic tape drive, TU45 tape, dismounting, 7-34 mounting, 4-38 /TAPE tape, 7-33 4-34 /TAPE 4-8 in dismounting, 7-27 mounting, 7-27 TUl6 magnetic tape drive, Tape dismounting, TUl0, of 4-8 system, 4-34 save 4-3 in OPSER, LPTSPL, OPSER, 5-13 TU56 TU70 in QUEUE, 4-15 7-32 DECtape, 2-3 magnetic 7-31 Index-11 tape drive, 2-4, INDEX tape, dismounting, 7-29 mounting, 7-29 /VFU switch in LPFORM.INI, VT50 terminal, 2-5 VT52 terminal, 2-5 VT61l terminal, 2-5 TU70 TU71 magnetic tape drive, TU71 (CONT.) 2-4 4-39 tape, dismounting, 7-29 mounting, 7-29 TU72 magnetic tape drive, TU72 2-4 Warning messages tape, dismounting, mounting, Two-way 7-29 account control, BACKUP, 5-16 7-29 communication, 4-53 :WHAT WHAT UNFREEZE output spooler command, 4-34 Unloading card reader, 7-22 UNLOCK output spooler command, 4-34 command in OPSER, 4-5 Updating account files, 5-4 User commands for OPSER, 4-5 USER console mode, B-1 User core failure error recovery, 6-7 User core parity error, 6-7 User to operator communication, 4-53 Utility programs, 2-7 Verify microcode in KLINIT, Vertical forms control, LP07, 7-11 LP10, 7-12 C-6 5-15 command in OPSER, command BATCON, :UNRESTRICT in KLINIT, Weekly, output SPRINT, 4-9 in, 4-22 spooler, 4-34 4-49 WHAT CONSOLE command in PARSER, WHATB;;CREMENT command in PARSER, WHATB&;MORY command in PARSER, WHATB;;PEAT command in PARSER, /WHAg-;witch in LPFORM.INI, WHAT4;§gSION command in PARSER, B- :WHERE command in OPSER, 4-9 /WIDTH switch in LPFORM.INI, 4-39 C-3 XCHNGE operator command, XY1l0-A plotter, 2-4 XY10-B plotter, 2-4 Index-12 A-14 DECsystem=-10 Operator's Guide (KL Series) AA-5104A-TB READER'S NOTE: This form is use comments discretion. COMMENTS for document comments only. DIGITAL will submitted on this form at the company's Problems with software should be reported on a Software Performance Report (SPR) form. If you require a written reply and are eligible to receive one under SPR service, submit your comments on an SPR form. Did you find Did you find Please Is make there requirec errors this manual? this manual suggestions documentation the of software is missing the type on associated described and where of should user/reader Assembly language programmer [:] Higher-level language programmer Occasional programmer little in and well-organized? system this it be programs manual? not, nearly represent. (experienced) programming experience Student programmer Non-programmer interested Name in | computer concepts Date Organization Street City If placed? that you most [j User with specify by page. usable, 0000 indicate so, improvement. sufficient use If understandable, for for what material Please in State Zip Code or Country and capabilities Fold Here Do Not Tear - Fold Here and Staple FIRST CLASS PERMIT NO. 33 MAYNARD, MASS. BUSINESS REPLY MAIL NO POSTAGE STAMP NECESSARY IF MAILED IN THE UNITED STATES Postage will be paid by: dlilgliltiall Software Documentation 146 Main Street ML5-5/E39 Maynard, Massachusetts 01754 Printed in U.S.A.
Home
Privacy and Data
Site structure and layout ©2025 Majenko Technologies